GL (2014) - Automotive Mercedes-Benz - Free user manual and instructions
Find the device manual for free GL (2014) Mercedes-Benz in PDF.
User questions about GL (2014) Mercedes-Benz
0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.
Ask a new question about this device
Download the instructions for your Automotive in PDF format for free! Find your manual GL (2014) - Mercedes-Benz and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. GL (2014) by Mercedes-Benz.
USER MANUAL GL (2014) Mercedes-Benz
natural_image
Exterior view of a silver Mercedes-Benz SUV (no visible text or symbols)(1) Operator's Manual
GL
Operator's Manual
Mercedes-Benz
Symbols
Registered trademarks:
^R Bluetooth ^® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc.
R DTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
^R Dolby and MLP are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories.
^R BabySmart ^TM , ESP ^® and PRE-SAFE ^® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG.
^R HomeLink ^® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls.
^R iPod ^B and iTunes ^B are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
^R Logic7 ^® is a registered trademark of Harman International Industries.
^R Microsoft ^® and Windows media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
R SIRIUS is a registered trademark of Siriu XM Radio Inc.
R HD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation.
^R Gracenote ^® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc.
^R ZAGATSurvey ^® and related brands are registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols:
WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others.
Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal.
Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle.
i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you.
This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed. Several of these symbols in succession indicate an instruction with several steps.
(▷ page) This symbol tells you where you can find more information about a topic.
This symbol indicates a warning or an instruction that is continued on the next page.
DisplayThis font indicates a display in the multifunction display/COMAND display.
Parts of the software in the vehicle are protected by copyright © 2005 The FreeType Project
http://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved.
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Editorial office
^10 Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstraße 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on:
- model
- order
• country specification - availability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas:
- design
- equipment
- technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations.
The following are integral components of the vehicle:
- Operator's Manual
- Maintenance Booklet
• Equipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner.
The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
Index 4
Introduction 23
At a glance 3
Safety 41
Opening and closing 79
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 105
Lights and windshield wipers ..... 127
Climate control 145
Driving and parking 165
On-board computer and displays .... 271
Stowage and features 339
Maintenance and care 369
Breakdown assistance 385
Wheels and tires 403
Technical data 443
1, 2, 3 ...
115 V socket 353
12 V socket
see Sockets
360° camera
Cleaning 380
Function/notes 235
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) 256
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message 291
Function/notes 67
Important safety notes 67
Warning lamp 327
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification 155
Active Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) 281
Display message 314
Function/information ..... 247
Trailer towing 250
Active Curve System
Display message 311
Function/notes 218
Active Driving Assistance package . 2
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) 282
Display message 313
Function/information ..... 251
Trailer towing 253
Active light function 133Alarm
Active Parking Assist
Display message 314
Exiting a parking space 229
Function/notes 226
Important safety notes 226
Parking 228
Towing a trailer 230
ADAPTIVE BRAKE 75
Adaptive Brake Assist
Display message 298
Function/notes 71
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Display message 306
Function/notes 134
Switching on/off 134
Additives (engine oil) 450
ADS (Adaptive Damping System)
Function/notes 217
Air bags
Display message 301
Front air bag (driver, front passenger) 46
Important safety notes 44
Knee bag 47
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp 49
Safety guidelines 43
Side impact air bag 47
Window curtain air bag 48
Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
Air filter (display message) 309
AIR FLOW 157
AIRMATIC package
ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ... 217
Function/notes 217
Level control 218
Air vents
Glove box 1 6 3
Important safety notes 162
Rear 163
Setting 162
Setting the center air vents 162
Setting the side air vents 163
Alarm
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) 77
Switching off (ATA) 77
Switching the function on/off (ATA) 77
Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ambient lighting
Setting the brightness (on-board computer) 283
Setting the color (on-board computer) 283
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system 221
AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 287
Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Approach/departure angle 200
Ashtray 351
Assistance display (on-board computer) 280
Assistance menu (on-board computer) 280
ASSYST PLUS
Displaying a service message ...... 375
Hiding a service message 375
Notes 374
Resetting the service interval display . 375
Service message 374
Special service requirements ..... 375
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating 77
Function 7
Switching off the alarm 77
ATTENTION ASSIST
Activating/deactivating 281
Display message 309
Function/notes 239
Audio menu (on-board computer)
Audio system
see separate operating instructions
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop
AUTO lights
Display message 306 see Lights
Automatic headlamp mode 128
Automatic transmission
Automatic drive program 178
Changing gear 176
DIRECT SELECT lever 173
Display message 320
Drive program display ..... 173
Driving tips 176
Emergency running mode 182
Engaging drive position 175
Engaging neutral 174
Engaging park position automatically 174
Engaging reverse gear 174
Engaging the park position 173
Kickdown 176
Manual drive program 178
Manual drive program (AMG vehicles) 179
Manual drive program (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package) .. 179
Overview 173
Problem (malfunction) 182
Program selector button 177
Pulling away 170
Starting the engine 169
Steering wheel paddle shifters ..... 177
Trailer towing 176
Transmission position display ..... 173
Transmission positions 175
Automatic transmission
emergency mode 182
Axle load, permissible (trailer towing) 457
B
Bag hook 346
Ball coupling
Installing 265
Removing 269
Storing 269
BAS (Brake Assist System) 68
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
PLUS) 68
Battery (SmartKey)
Checking 83
Important safety notes 83
Replacing 83
Battery (vehicle)
Charging 394
Display message 307
Important safety notes 391
Jump starting 395
Overview 391
Belt
see Seat belts
Belt force limiter
Activation 59
Function 59
Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating 281
Display message 314
Notes/function 243
Trailer towing 245
see Active Blind Spot Assist
BlueTEC
Adding DEF 186
BlueTEC (DEF) 448
Brake Assist
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Display message 297
Notes 450
Brake lamps
Changing bulbs 140
Display message 304
Brakes
ABS 67
Adaptive Brake Assist 71
BAS 68
BAS PLUS 68
Brake fluid (notes) 450
Display message 291
High-performance brake system .... 195
Important safety notes 193
Maintenance 194
Parking brake 189
Riding tips 193
Warning lamp 326
Breakdown
see Flat tire
see Towing away
Bulbs
see Replacing bulbs
C
California
Important notice for retail
customers and lessees 25
Calling up a malfunction
see Display messages
Car
see Vehicle
Care
360° camera 380
Carpets 383
Car wash 376
Display 381
Exhaust pipe 381
Exterior lights 379
Gear or selector lever 382
Interior 381
Matte finish 378
Night View Assist Plus 381
Notes 376
Paint 378
Plastic trim 382
Power washer 377
Rear view camera 380
Roof lining 383
Seat belt 383
Seat cover 383
Sensors 380
Steering wheel 382
Trim pieces 382
Washing by hand 377
Wheels 379
Windows 379
Wiper blades 379
Wooden trim 382
Cargo compartment cover
Notes/how to use 346
Cargo compartment enlargement
Important safety notes 344
Cargo compartment floor
Opening/closing 347
Stowage well (under) 347
Cargo tie down rings 345
Car key
see SmartKey
Car wash (care) 376
CD player/CD changer (on-board
computer) 278
Center console
Lower section 37
Upper section 36
Central locking
Automatic locking (on-board computer) 284 Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) 80
Changing bulbs
Brake lamps 140 High-beam headlamps 139 Low-beam headlamps 138
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes 65 Rear doors 66
Children
In the vehicle 60 Restraint systems 60 Special seat belt retractor 63
Child seat
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors 63 Top Tether 64
Cigarette lighter 352
Cleaning
Mirror turn signal 380 Trailer tow hitch 381
Climate control
3-zone automatic climate control with additional rear-compartment climate control 152 Automatic climate control (3-zone) 150 Controlling automatically 156
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 15 Defrosting the windows ..... 160 Defrosting the windshield ..... 159
Dual-zone automatic climate control 147
Important safety notes 146 Indicator lamp 156
Information about using 3-zone automatic climate control .... 154
Maximum cooling 159
Notes on using dual-zone automatic climate control 149
Overview of systems 146
Problems with cooling with air dehumidification 156
Problem with the rear window defroster 161
Rear control panel 150
Rear control panel (3-zone automatic climate control with additional rear-compartment climate control) 152
Refrigerant 452
Refrigerant filling capacity 452
Setting the air distribution 158
Setting the airflow 158
Setting the air vents 162
Setting the climate mode (AIR FLOW) 157
Setting the temperature 157
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off 161
Switching on/off 154
Switching residual heat on/off ..... 161
Switching the rear window defroster on/off 160
Switching the ZONE function on/off 159
Coat hooks 347
Cockpit
Overview 32 see Instrument cluster
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
Operation/notes 69
COMAND
ON&OFFROAD menu 262 see separate operating instructions
\$COMAND display
Cleaning 381
Combination switch 131
Consumption statistics (on-board computer) 275
Convenience closing feature 95
Convenience opening feature 95
Coolant (engine)
Checking the level 373
Display message 306
Filling capacity 451
Important safety notes 450
Temperature (on-board computer) . 2 8 7
Temperature gauge 272
Warning lamp 334
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyright 30
Cornering light function
Display message 303
Function/notes 133
Crash-responsive emergency
lighting 137
Crosswind driving assistance
Cruise control
Activating 202
Activation conditions 202
Cruise control lever 201
Deactivating 203
Display message 317
Driving system 201
Function/notes 201
Important safety notes 201
Storing and maintaining current speed 20
Cup holder
Center console 349
Important safety notes 348
Rear compartment 349
Temperature controlled 349
Third row of seats 350
Customer Assistance Center (CAC)
Customer Relations Department ..... 28
D
Data
see Technical data
Daytime running lamps
Display message 305
Function/notes 128
Switching on/off (on-board computer) 283
Declarations of conformity 27
DEF
Adding 186
Display message 309
Filling capacity 449
Important safety notes 448
Delayed switch-off
Exterior lighting (on-board computer) 284
Interior lighting 284
Diagnostics connection 27
Diesel 4 4 7
Differential locks (display message) 311
Digital speedometer 276
DIRECT SELECT lever
see Automatic transmission
Display message
ASSYST PLUS 374
4Display messages
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 290
Driving systems 309
Engine 306
General notes 290
Hiding (on-board computer) 290
KEYLESS-GO 323
Lights 303
Safety systems 291
SmartKey 323
Tires 318
Vehicle 320
Distance recorder
see Odometer
see Trip odometer
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 336
Distance warning function
Activating/deactivating 281
Function/notes 69
Warning lamp 336
DISTRONIC PLUS
Activating 206
Activation conditions 206
Cruise control lever 205
Deactivating 209
Display message 315
Displays in the multifunction
display. 210
Driving tips 211
Function/notes 203
Important safety notes 204
Setting the specified minimum
distance 209
Warning lamp 336
Doors
Automatic locking (on-board
computer) 284
Automatic locking (switch) 8 8
Central locking/unlocking
(SmartKey) 80
Control panel 40
Display message 321
Emergency locking 88
Emergency unlocking 88
Important safety notes 86
Opening (from inside) 87
Overview 86
Power closing feature 88
Drinking and driving 192
Drive program
Automatic 178
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ..... 173
Manual 178
Manual (AMG vehicles) 179
Manual (vehicles with the
ON&OFFROAD package) 179
Off-road program (vehicles with
the ON&OFFROAD package) 258
SETUP (on-board computer) 287
see On-road programs
Driver's door
see Doors
Driver's seat
see Seats
Driving abroad
Mercedes-Benz Service 376
Symmetrical low beam 128
Driving in mountainous terrain
Approach/departure angle ..... 200
Driving lamps
see Daytime running lamps
Driving off-road
see Off-road driving
Driving safety systems
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ... 72
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ..... 67
ADAPTIVE BRAKE 75
Adaptive Brake Assist 71
BAS (Brake Assist System) 68
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
PLUS) 6 8
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 69
Distance warning function 69
Electronic brake force distribution ... 74
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 7 2
Important safety information 67
Overview 66
PRE-SAFE ^® Brake 75
STEER CONTROL 76
Driving systems
360°camera 235
Active Blind Spot Assist 247
Active Curve System 218
Active Driving Assistance package 247
Active Lane Keeping Assist 251
Active Parking Assist 226
ADS 217
AIRMATIC package 217
AMG adaptive sport suspension system 221
ATTENTION ASSIST 239
Blind Spot Assist 243
Cruise control 201
Display message 309
DISTRONIC PLUS 203
HOLD function 216
Lane Keeping Assist 245
Level control (vehicles with
AIRMATIC package) 218
Level control (vehicles with the
ON&OFFROAD package) 212
On-road programs 253
PARKTRONIC 222
Rear view camera 230
Driving tips
Automatic transmission 176
Brakes 193
Break-in period 166
DISTRONIC PLUS 211
Downhill gradient 193
Drinking and driving 192
Driving abroad 128
Driving in winter 196
Driving on flooded roads 195
Driving on sand 199
Driving on wet roads 195
Driving over obstacles 199
Exhaust check 192
Fuel 192
General 191
Hydroplaning 195
Icy road surfaces 196
Limited braking efficiency on
salted roads ..... 194
Off-road driving 197
Off-road fording 195
Snow chains 407
Symmetrical low beam 128
Tire ruts 199
Towing a trailer 264
Traveling uphill 200
Wet road surface 194
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
Display message 312
Function/notes 256
DVD audio
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 278
DVD video
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 279
E
EASY-ENTRY feature
Activating/deactivating 285
Function/notes 121
EASY-EXIT feature
Crash-responsive 122
Function/notes 121
Switching on/off 285
EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
Display message 293
Function/notes 74
ECO display
Function/notes 192
On-board computer 276
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency release
Driver's door 88
Vehicle 88
Emergency spare wheel
General notes 439
Important safety notes 439
Removing 440
Storage location 440
Technical data 441
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Function 59
Safety guidelines 43
Emergency unlocking
Tailgate 93
Emissions control
Service and warranty information .... 24
Engine
Check Engine warning lamp 333
Display message 306
Engine number 444, 445
Irregular running 172
Jump-starting 395
Starting problems 172
Starting the engine with the
SmartKey 169
Starting with KEYLESS-GO 170
Switching off 189
Tow-starting (vehicle) 400
Engine electronics
Problem (malfunction) 172
Engine jump starting
see Jump starting (engine)
Engine oil
Adding 372
Additives 450
Checking the oil level 371
Checking the oil level using the
dipstick 371
Display message 308
Filling capacity 449
Notes about oil grades 449
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 371
Temperature (on-board computer) . 2 8 7
Viscosity 450
ESP® (Electronic Stability
Program)
4ETS 72
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 287
Characteristics 73
Deactivating/activating 73
Display message 291
Function/notes 72
General notes 72
Important safety information 72
Trailer stabilization 74
Warning lamp 329
Exhaust check 192
Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) 381
Exterior lighting
see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting 122
Dipping (automatic) 123
Folding in/out (automatically) ..... 123
Folding in/out (electrically) ..... 123
Folding in when locking (on-board computer) 286
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 123
Setting 123
Storing settings (memory function) 125
Storing the parking position ..... 124
Eyeglasses compartment 342
F
Filler cap
see Fuel filler flap
Flat tire
MOExtended tires 387
Preparing the vehicle 387
TREFIT kit 388
see Emergency spare wheel
Floormats 367
Folding the rear bench seat
forwards/back 344
Fording
Off-road 195
On flooded roads 195
Front windshield
see Windshield
Fuel
Additives 447
Consumption statistics 275
Displaying the current consumption 276
Displaying the range 276
Driving tips 192
Fuel gauge 33
Grade (gasoline) 446
Important safety notes 446
Low outside temperatures 448
Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 4 4
Problem (malfunction) 185
Quality (diesel) 447
Refueling 182
Tank content/reserve fuel 446
Fuel filler flap
Opening 184
Fuel filter (display message) 30
Fuel level
Calling up the range (on-board computer) 276
Fuel tank
Capacity 446
Problem (malfunction) 185
Fuses
Allocation chart 400
Before changing 400
Dashboard fuse box 401
Fuse box in the engine compartment 401
Fuse box under rear bench seat .... 402
Important safety notes 400
G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory 367
General notes 364
Important safety notes 364
Opening/closing the garage door .. 367
Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) 364
Gear indicator (on-board computer) 287
Genuine parts 23
Glove box 341
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
(definition) 425
H
Handbrake
see Parking brake
Hazard warning lamps 132
Headlamps
Fogging up 135
see Automatic headlamp mode
Head restraints
Adjusting 108
Adjusting (electrically) 109
Adjusting (manually) 109
Adjusting (rear) 110
Installing/removing (rear) 110
Luxury 109
Heating
see Climate control
High-beam headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist 134
Changing bulbs 139
Display message 304
Switching on/off 132
Hill start assist 17
HOLD function
Deactivating 217
Display message 312
Function/notes 216
Hood
Closing 37
Display message 321
Important safety notes 370
Opening 370
Hydroplaning 195
|
Ignition lock
see Key positions
Immobilizer 77
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators
see Turn signals
Insect protection on the radiator ....
Inspection
see ASSYST PLUS
Instrument cluster
Overview 33
Warning and indicator lamps 34
Instrument cluster lighting 27
Interior lighting 135
Automatic control 136
Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) 284
Emergency lighting 137
Manual control 136
Overview 135
Reading lamp 135
Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting (on-board computer) 283
Setting the color of the ambient lighting (on-board computer) ...... 283
J
Jack
Storage location 386
Using 429
Jump starting (engine) 395
K
KEYLESS-GO
Convenience closing feature 96
Display message 323
1 Locking 81
Start/Stop button 167
Starting the engine 170
Unlocking 81
Key positions
KEYLESS-GO 167
SmartKey 167
Kickdown
Driving tips 176
Manual drive program 180
Knee bag 47
L
Lamps
371 see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating 282
Display message 313
Function/information ..... 245
see Active Lane Keeping Assist
2Lap time (RACETIMER) 287
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors 63
Level control (display message) ..... 310
Level control (vehicles with
AIRMATIC package)
Basic settings 219
Function/notes 218
Important safety notes 218
Level control (vehicles with the
ON&OFFROAD package)
Basic settings 213
Function/notes 212
Important safety notes 212
License plate lamp (display
message) 304
Light function, active
Display message 305
Lighting
Light switch 128
Lights
Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off . 2
Active light function 133
Adaptive Highbeam Assist 134
Automatic headlamp mode 128
Cornering light function 133
Driving abroad 128
Hazard warning lamps 132
High beam flasher 132
High-beam headlamps 132
Low-beam headlamps 129
Parking lamps 130
Rear fog lamp 130
Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting (on-board computer) 283
Setting the color of the ambient lighting (on-board computer) ...... 283
Standing lamps 131
Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board computer) 283
Switching the exterior lighting delayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) 284
Switching the surround lighting on/off (on-board computer) ...... 284
Turn signals 131
see Interior lighting see Replacing bulbs
Light sensor (display message) ..... 306
Loading guidelines 340
Locking
see Central locking
Locking (doors)
Automatic 88
Emergency locking 88
From inside (central locking button) 87
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Locking verification signal (on-
board computer) 285
Low-beam headlamps
Changing bulbs 138
Display message 303
Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) 128
Switching on/off 129
8LQW RANGE
Display message 312
Off-road gear 259
LOW RANGE off-road gear 259
Lumbar support
Adjusting (on the seat) 116
Luxury head restraints 109
M
M+S tires 406
Malfunction message
see Display messages
Matte finish (cleaning instructions) 378
mbrace
Call priority 359
Display message 297
Downloading destinations
(COMAND) 359
Downloading routes 363
Emergency call 356
General notes 355
Geo fencing 363
Locating a stolen vehicle 362
MB info call button 358
Remote vehicle locking 361
Roadside Assistance button 358
Search & Send 360
Self-test 356
Speed alert 363
System 356
Triggering the vehicle alarm 364
Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis 362
Vehicle remote unlocking 361
Mechanical key
Function/notes 82
Inserting 83
Locking vehicle 88
Removing 82
Unlocking the driver's door 88
Media Interface
see Separate operating instructions
Memory card (audio) 278
Memory function 125
Message memory (on-board
computer) 290
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
see Rear-view mirror
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Mobile phone
Menu (on-board computer) 279
Modifying the programming
(SmartKey) 81
MOExtended tires 387
Mounting wheels
Lowering the vehicle 432
Mounting a new wheel 431
Preparing the vehicle 428
Raising the vehicle 429
Removing a wheel 431
Securing the vehicle against rolling away 428
MP3
Operation 278
see separate operating instructions
Multifunction display
Function/notes 274
Permanent display 283
Multifunction steering wheel
Operating the on-board computer . 2
Overview 35
N
Navigation
Menu (on-board computer) 277
see separate operating instructions
Night View Assist Plus
Activating/deactivating 241
Cleaning 381
Problem (malfunction) 243
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
0
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Faults 53
Operation 49
System self-test 51
Occupant safety
Air bags 44
Important safety notes 42
PRE-SAFE ^® (anticipatory occupant protection) 54
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) 43
OCS
Faults 53
Operation 4 9
System self-test 51
Odometer 275
Off-road driving
Approach/departure angle ..... 455
Checklist after driving off-road ..... 198
Checklist before driving off-road .... 198
Fording depth 454
General information 197
Important safety notes 197
Maximum gradient climbing ability 455
Traveling uphill 200
Off-road programs (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package)
7 3Displays in the COMAND display... 262
Function/notes 258
Off-road program 1 258
Off-road program 2 259
Off-road system
4MATIC 256
DSR 256
LOW RANGE off-road gear 259
Off-road 4ETS 72
Off-road ABS 68
Off-road ESP ^® 74
Off-road programs (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package) ...... 258
Oil
see Engine oil
On and Offroad menu (on-board
computer) 286
On-board computer
AMG menu 28
Assistance menu 280
Audio menu 278
Convenience submenu 285
Displaying a service message ...... 375
Display messages 290
DISTRONIC PLUS 210
Factory settings submenu 286
Important safety notes 272
Instrument cluster submenu 282
Lighting submenu 283
Menu overview 275
Message memory 290
Navigation menu 277
On and Offroad menu 286
Operation 273
RACETIMER 287
Service menu 282
Settings menu 282
Standard display ..... 275
Telephone menu 279
Trip menu 275
Vehicle submenu 284
Video DVD operation 279
On-road programs
AUTO program 254
Function/notes 253
Snow program 255
SPORT program 254
Trailer program 255
Opening and closing the side trim panels 139
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity 27
Important safety notes 26
Operating system
see On-board computer
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment 24
Outside temperature display 273
Overhead control panel 39
Override feature
Rear side windows 66
P
Paint code number 444
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 378
Panic alarm 42
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Opening/closing 100
Opening/closing the roller sunblind 101
Problem (malfunction) 103
Resetting 101
Panorama sliding sunroof
Important safety notes 98
Parking 188
Important safety notes 188
Parking brake 189
Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side 124
Rear view camera 230
see PARKTRONIC
Parking aid
Active Parking Assist 226
see Exterior mirrors
see PARKTRONIC
Parking assistance
see PARKTRONIC
Parking brake
Display message 294
Electric parking brake 189
Warning lamp 332
Parking lamps
Switching on/off 130
PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating 224
Driving system 222
Function/notes 222
Important safety notes 222
Problem (malfunction) 226
Range of the sensors 223
Trailer towing 225
Warning display 224
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Problem (malfunction) 53
Problems (malfunction) 301
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp 49
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 3 8 2
Power closing feature 88Rear seats
Power washers 377 Adjusting 111
Power windows Display message 322
see Side windows Rear view camera
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant Cleaning instructions 380
protection) Function/notes 230 Display message 297 Switching on/off 231
Operation 5 4 Rear-view mirror
PRE-SAFE® Brake Anti-glare (man
Activating/deactivating 281 Dipping (automatic) 123
Display message 299 Rear window defroster
Function/notes 75 Problem (malfunction) 161
Warning lamp 336 Switching on/off 160
Program selector button 177Rear window wiper
Protection of the environment Replacing the wiper blade .... 142 General notes .... 23 Switching on/off .... 141
Pulling away Refrigerant (air-conditioning Trailer 170 system)
Pulling away (automatic Important safety notes 452
(transmission) 170 Refueling
Q
Qualified specialist workshop 28
R
RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 28
Radar sensor system
Activating/deactivating 285
Display message 312
Radiator cover 371
Radio
Selecting a station 278
see separate operating instructions
Radio-controlled devices (installing) 367
Radio-wave reception/
transmission in the vehicle
Declaration of conformity 27
Reading lamp 135
Rear compartment
Exit/entry position (3rd row of seats) 1 1 3
Setting the air vents 163
Rear fog lamp
Switching on/off 130
Remote control
Programming (garage door opener) 364
Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes 137
Overview of bulb types ..... 138
Removing/replacing the cover (front wheel arch) 138
Reporting safety defects 29
Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Display message 308
Warning lamp 333 see Fuel
Residual heat (climate control) ..... 161
Restraint system
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
Reversing feature
Panorama sliding sunroof ..... 99
Roller sunblinds 100
Side windows 94
Sliding sunroof 99
Tailgate 89
Reversing lamps (display message) 305
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 25
Roller sunblind
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 100
Rear side windows 351
Roof carrier 348
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning guidelines) 383
Roof load (maximum) 453
Route (navigation)
see Route guidance (navigation)
Route guidance (navigation) 277
Folding down/up (third row of seats) 1 1 1
Folding the 2nd row of seats forward electrically 115
Folding the 2nd row of seats forward manually .... 113
Folding the rear bench seat forwards/back 344
Important safety notes 107
Overview 107
Seat heating problem 118
Seat ventilation problem 119
Storing settings (memory function) 125
Switching seat heating on/off ..... 116
Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 118
\$
Safety
Child restraint systems 60
Occupant Classification System (OCS) 49
Safety system
see Driving safety systems
Seat belts
Adjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt 57
Adjusting the height 58
Belt force limiters 59
Cleaning 383
Correct usage 55
Emergency Tensioning Devices ..... 5 9
Fastening 57
Important safety guidelines 55
Releasing 58
Safety guidelines 43
Switching belt adjustment on/off (on-board computer) 285
Warning lamp 324
Warning lamp (function) 58
Seats
Adjusting (electrically) 108
Adjusting the head restraint 108
Cleaning the cover 383
Correct driver's seat position ..... 106
Entry position (3rd row of seats) .... 113
Exit position (3rd row of seats) ..... 114
Selector lever
Cleaning 382
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ..... 380
Service menu (on-board computer) . 2 8 2
Service products
Brake fluid 450
Coolant (engine) 450
DEF special additives 448
Engine oil 449
Fuel 446
Important safety notes 445
Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) 452
Washer fluid 4 5 1
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) 286
On-board computer 282
Setting the air distribution 158
Setting the airflow 158
SETUP (on-board computer) 287
Side impact air bag 47
Side marker lamp (display message) 305
Side windows
Cleaning 379
Convenience closing feature 95
Convenience opening feature 95
Hinged side windows 94
Important safety information 93
Opening/closing 94
Overview 93
Problem (malfunction) 98
Resetting 96
Sliding sunroof
Important safety notes 98
Opening/closing 99
Problem (malfunction) 103
Resetting 100
see Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
SmartKey
Changing the battery 83
Changing the programming 81
Checking the battery 83
Convenience closing feature 96
Convenience opening feature 95
Display message 323
Door central locking/unlocking ..... 80
Important safety notes 80
Loss 85
Mechanical key 82
Overview 80
Positions (ignition lock) 167
Problem (malfunction) 85
Starting the engine 169
Snow chains
Information 407
Snow drive program 255
Sockets
Center console 353
General notes 352
Luggage compartment 353
Rear compartment 353
Specialist workshop 28
Special seat belt retractor ....
Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
Speedometer
Digital 276
In the Instrument cluster 33
Segments 273
Selecting the unit of measurement 282
see Instrument cluster
SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System)
Display message 299
Introduction 43
Warning lamp 332
Warning lamp (function) 43
Standing lamps
Display message 305
Switching on/off 131
Starting (engine) 169
STEER CONTROL 76
Steering (display message) 322
Steering wheel
Adjusting (electrically) 120
Adjusting (manually) . 119
Button overview 35
Buttons (on-board computer) ...... 273
Cleaning 382
Important safety notes 119
Paddle shifters 177
Steering wheel heating 120
Storing settings (memory function) 125
Steering wheel heating
Problem (malfunction) 121
Switching on/off 120
Steering wheel paddle shifters ..... 177
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) 287
Stowage areas 340
Stowage compartments
Armrest (under) 342
Center console 342
Cup holders 348
Eyeglasses compartment 342
Glove box 341
Important safety information 341
Stowage net 343
Stowage net 343
Stowage space
Center console (rear) 342
Summer tires 406
Sun visor 350
Supplemental restraint system
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System)
Surround lighting (on-board
computer) 284
Suspension tuning
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system 221
SETUP (on-board computer) 287
SUV
(Sport Utility Vehicle) 26
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off 161
T
Tachometer 273
Tailgate
Display message 321
Emergency unlocking 93
Important safety notes 89
Limiting the opening angle 92
Opening/closing (automatically from inside) 92
Opening/closing (automatically from outside) 90
Opening/closing (from outside) ..... 90
Opening dimensions 453
Power closing 88
Tail lamps
Display message 304
Tank
see Fuel tank
Tank content
Fuel gauge 33
Technical data
Capacities 445
Emergency spare wheel 441
Information 444
Tires/wheels 432
Trailer loads 457
Vehicle data 453
TELEAID
Call priority 359
Downloading destinations (COMAND) 359
Downloading routes 363
Emergency call 356
Geo fencing 363
Locating a stolen vehicle 362
MB info call button 358
Remote vehicle locking 361
Roadside Assistance button 358
Search & Send 360
Self-test 356
Speed alert 363
System 356
Triggering the vehicle alarm 364
Vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis 362
Vehicle remote unlocking 361
Tele Aid
General notes 355
Telephone
Accepting a call 279
Display message 322
Menu (on-board computer) 279
Number from the phone book ..... 2 8 0
Redialing 280
Rejecting/ending a call 279
Temperature
Coolant 272
Coolant (on-board computer) ...... 287
Engine oil (on-board computer) ..... 287
Outside temperature 273
Setting (climate control) 157
Theft deterrent systems
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) 77
Immobilizer 77
Through-loading 343
Time
see separate operating instructions
Timing (RACETIMER) 287
TIREFIT kit 388
Tire pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 412
Checking manually 411
Display message 318
Important safety notes 412
Maximum 410
Notes 409
Not reached (TREFIT) 390
Reached (TREFIT) 390
Recommended 408
Tire pressure loss warning
system
General notes 411
Important safety notes 411
Restarting 412
Tire pressure monitoring system
Checking the tire pressure
electronically 414
Function/notes 412
General notes 412
Important safety notes 413
Restarting 415
Warning lamp 337
Warning message 414
Tires
Aspect ratio (definition) 426
Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) 425
Bar (definition) 424
Changing a wheel 427
Characteristics 424
Checking 405
Definition of terms 424
Direction of rotation ..... 428
Display message 318
Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) 427
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) 4 2 4
DOT (Department of Transportation) (definition) 425
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) 425
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (definition) 425
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) 425
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) 425
Important safety notes 404
Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ..... 425
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ..... 425 Labeling (overview) ..... 421
Load bearing index (definition) ..... 426
Load index 423
Load index (definition) 426
M+S tires 406
Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) 425
Maximum load on a tire (definition) 426
Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) 426
Maximum tire load 423
Maximum tire load (definition) ..... 426
MOExtended tires 406
Optional equipment weight (definition) 426
PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) 426
Replacing 427
Service life 406
Sidewall (definition) 426
Speed rating (definition) 425
Storing 428
Structure and characteristics (definition) 424
Temperature 420
TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) 426
Tire bead (definition) 426
Tire pressure (definition) 426
Tire pressures (recommended) ..... 425
Tire size (data) 432
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating 421
Tire tread 405
Tire tread (definition) 426
Total load limit (definition) 427
Traction 420
Traction (definition) 427
Tread wear 420
TWR (permissible trailer drawbar noseweight) (definition) 427
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 419
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) 425
Unladen weight (definition) 426
Wear indicator (definition) 427
Wheel and tire combination 435
Wheel rim (definition) 425 see Flat tire
Tool
see Vehicle tool kit
Top Tether 64
Towing
Important safety guidelines 397
Installing the towing eye 398
Removing the towing eye 399
Towing a trailer
Active Parking Assist 230
Axle load, permissible 457
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch 381
Coupling up a trailer 266
Decoupling a trailer 268
Driving tips 264
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 7 4
Important safety notes 263
Installing the ball coupling 265
Mounting dimensions 456
Power supply 270
Pulling away with a trailer 170
Removing the ball coupling 269
Storing the ball coupling 269
Trailer drive program 255
Trailer loads 457
Towing away
With both axles on the ground ..... 399
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting 400
Important safety notes 397
Trailer coupling
see Towing a trailer
Trailer loads and drawbar
noseweights 269
Trailer towing
Active Blind Spot Assist 250
Active Lane Keeping Assist 253
Blind Spot Assist 245
PARKTRONIC 225
Permissible trailer loads and drawbar noseweights 269
Transfer case 182
Transmission
see Automatic transmission
Transmission position display 173
Transmission position display
(DIRECT SELECT lever) 173
Transporting the vehicle 399
Traveling uphill
Brow of hill 200
Driving downhill 201
Maximum gradient-climbing capability 200
Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 3 8
Trip computer (on-board computer) 275
Trip meter
see Trip odometer
Trip odometer
Calling up 275
Resetting (on-board computer) ..... 276
Trunk
see Tailgate
Turn signals
Display message 303
Switching on/off 131
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)
finition) 427
Type identification plate
see Vehicle identification plate
U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking 88
From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) 87
V
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ...... 3 5
Vehicle
Correct use 28
Data acquisition 29
Display message 320
Equipment 24
Individual settings 282
Limited Warranty 29
Loading 415
Locking (in an emergency) 88
Locking (SmartKey) 80
Lowering 432
Maintenance 25
Parking for a long period 191
Pulling away 170
Raising 429
Reporting problems 28
Securing from rolling away 428
Towing away 397
Transporting 399
Unlocking (in an emergency) 88
Ωnlocking (SmartKey) 80
Vehicle data 453
Vehicle battery
see Battery (vehicle)
Vehicle data 453
Vehicle data (off-road driving)
Approach/departure angle ..... 455
Fording depth 454
Maximum gradient climbing ability 455
Vehicle dimensions 453
Vehicle emergency locking 88
Vehicle identification number see VIN
Vehicle identification plate 444
Vehicle level
AMG adaptive sport suspension system 221
Vehicle level (display message) ..... 310
Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS
Vehicle tool kit 386
Video
Operating the DVD 279
VIN 444
W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS 327
Brakes 326
Check Engine 333
Coolant 334
Distance warning 336
DISTRONIC PLUS 336
ESP ^® 329
ESP ^® OFF 330
Overview 34
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF 49
Reserve fuel 333
Seat belt 324
SRS 332
Tire pressure monitor 337
Warranty 24
Washer fluid
Display message 322
Wheel and tire combination see Tires
Wheel bolt tightening torque 432
Wheel chock 428
Wheels
Changing a wheel 427
Checking 405
Cleaning 379
Emergency spare wheel 439
Important safety notes 404
Interchanging/changing 427
Mounting a new wheel 431
Mounting a wheel 428
Overview 404
Removing a wheel 431
Storing 428
Tightening torque 432
Wheel size/tire size 432
Window curtain air bag
Display message 300
Operation 48
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting 159
Infrared reflective 367
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid 374
Notes 451
Windshield wipers
Problem (malfunction) 143
Rear window wiper 141
Replacing the wiper blades 141
Switching on/off 140
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces 196
Snow chains 407
Winter operation
General notes 406
Overview 406
Radiator cover 371
Snow drive program 255
Winter tires
M+S tires 406
Wiper blades
Cleaning 379
Important safety notes 141
Replacing 141
Replacing (rear window) 142
Replacing (windshield) . 141
Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) 382
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off 159
Protection of the environment
General notes
Environmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account.
You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, w transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors:
- operating conditions of your vehicle
- your personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
- avoid short trips as these increase fuel consumption.
- always make sure that the tire pressures are correct.
- do not carry any unnecessary weight.
- remove roof racks once you no longer need them.
- a regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals.
- always have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
- do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.
- do not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary.
- drive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front.
-
avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.
-
change gear in good time and use each gear only up to 23 of its maximum engine speed.
- switch off the engine in stationary traffic.
- keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption.
Environmental concerns and recommendations
Wherever the operating instructions require you to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-use them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Environmental note
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts.
Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle:
- doors
- door pillars
- door sills
- seats
- cockpit
- instrument cluster
- center console
Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems.
Have aftermarket accessories installed at The original purchase agreement lists all a qualified specialist workshop. systems installed in your vehicle.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. which have not been approved by Mercedes The Operator's Manual and Maintenance This could lead to malfunctions in safety- Booklet are important documents and should relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use kept in the vehicle.
only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Every part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should therefore be used.
More than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (▷ page 444).
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations.
Service and vehicle operation
Warranty
The implied warranty for your vehicle applies in accordance with the warranty terms and conditions in the Service and Warranty Information booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the following warranty terms and conditions:
- New Vehicle Limited Warranty
• Emission System Warranty - Emission Performance Warranty
- California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty
- State warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an to authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and my Warranty Information booklet will be posted to you.
Information for customers in California
Under California law you may be entitled replacement of your vehicle or a refund purchase price or lease price, if after a reasonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odomere of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to report two or more times, and you have directed notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason repair of the same or different substan defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days.
Please send your written notice to:
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Maintenance
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes to all the necessary maintenance work which should be done at regular intervals.
Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The fix service advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA)
For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in your vehicle literature portfolio.
Change of address or change of ownership
In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" that the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service Center (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner.
If you have purchased a used car, please s us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
and abrupt steering maneuver and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road /conditions. There is a risk of an accident.
Always adapt your speed and driving style to the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
- service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available.
- unleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic converter may not be available. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter.
- the fuel may have a considerably lower octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses.
In the USA
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
gn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
You and all vehicle occupants should always wear your seat belts.
Operating safety
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
Sports Utility Vehicle
WARNING
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicletwigs may ignite if they come into contact with may start to skid and roll over in the event of
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire.
When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid.
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle equipment."
- the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a curb or an unpaved road
- you drive too fast over an obstacle, e. a curb or a hole in the road
- a heavy object strikes the undercarriage or parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the undercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly or, in the case of an accident, no longerThe diagnostics connection is only intended withstand the strain they are designed tofor the connection of diagnostic equipment at If the underbody paneling is damaged, a qualified specialist workshop. combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If
these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Declarations of conformity
Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device."
Diagnostics connection
WARNING
If you connect equipment to the diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of the vehicle systems. As a result the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle.
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident; others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats or top of one another.
If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring if you should experience a problem with your information being reset, for example. This vehicle, particularly one that you believe may may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the affect its safe operation, we urge you to requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially case for work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.
Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
• work relevant to safety
• service and maintenance work
- repair work
• alterations, installation work and modifications
• work on electronic components
Correct use
If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when driving your vehicle:
• the safety notes in this manual
se the Technical Data section in this manual
• traffic rules and regulations
- laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one of the following addresses.
In the USA
Customer Assistance Center
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only:
The following text is published as required manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety of 1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has a defe which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may functions.
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
Limited Warranty
! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
Data stored in the vehicle
Data recording
of This vehicle is capable of recording diagnostic information relating to vehicle operation, the malfunctions, and user settings. This may Act include information about the performance or status of various systems, including but not limited to, engine, throttle, steering or brake systems, that is stored and can be read out with suitable devices, particularly when the vehicle is serviced. The data obtained is used to properly diagnose and service your vehicle or to further optimize and develop vehicle
COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID)
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace system.
For additional information please refer to the COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Conditions.
Event data recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as during air bag deployment or when hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• how various systems in your vehicle are operating
- whether or not the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened
- how far (if at all) the driver is depressing in the malfunction of the SRS Module and other accelerator and/or brake pedal and systems.
• how fast the vehicle is traveling
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data emptied. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws to crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by relating to EDRs.
the EDR under normal driving conditions and
no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, can combine the EDR data with the type of personal identification data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component of the Supplemental Restraint System ("SRS")
Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are preempted. This means that in the event of such a conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Dashboard 32
Instrument cluster 33
Multifunction steering wheel 3
Center console 36
Overhead control panel 39
Door control panel 40
Dashboard
text_image
Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car with numbered diagnostic or safety camera placement annotationsFunction Page
① Steering wheel paddle shifters 177
② Combination switch 131
③ Instrument cluster 33
④ Horn
⑤ DIRECT SELECT lever 173
⑥ PARKTRONIC warning display 222
⑦ Overhead control panel 39
⑧ Climate control systems 146
⑨ Ignition lock 167
Start/Stop button 167
Function Page
⑩ Adjusts the steering wheel manually 119
⑪ Adjusts the steering wheel
electrically 119
Steering wheel heating 120
⑫ Cruise control lever 201
⑬ Opens the hood 370
⑭ Diagnostics connection 27
⑮ Electric parking brake 189
⑯ Light switch 128
⑰ Night View Assist Plus 241
Instrument cluster
Displays and controls
text_image
1 2 10:30 70.5°F 123.0 miles 26753 R N P D S 6 5 4 3 2 1 80 40 P54| Function Page | ||
| 1 | Speedometer with segments 273 | |
| 2 | Fuel gauge | |
| 3 | Tachometer | 273 |
| Function Page | ||
| 4 | Coolant temperature 272 | |
| 5 | Multifunction display 274 | |
| 6 | Instrument cluster lighting 272 |
Warning and indicator lamps
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 10:30 70.5°F 123.0 miles 26753 R N P D S P54.32-9646-31| Function Page | |||
| 1 |  | Low-beamheadlamps 129 | |
| 2 |  | Parking lamps | 130 |
| 3 |  | ESP® | 329 |
| 4 |  | High-beamheadlamps | 132 |
| 5 |  | ric parking brake (red) (USA only) | 332 |
 | |||
 | (Canada only) | ||
| 6 |  | Electric parking brake (yellow) | 332 |
| 7 |  | Distance warning | 336 |
| 8 |  | Turn signals | 131 |
| 9 |  | Tire pressure monitor | 337 |
| Function Page | ||
| 10 | SRS | 332 |
| 11 | Seat belt | 324 |
| 12 | Diesel engine: preglow | 169 |
| 13 | Coolant | 334 |
| 14 | Rear fog lamp | 130 |
| 15 | Check Engine | 333 |
| 16 | Reserve fuel | |
| 17 | ESP® OFF | 329 |
| 18 | ABS | 327 |
| 19 | Brakes: 326BRAKE (USA only)(1) (Canada only) |
Multifunction steering wheel
text_image
Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car dashboard with numbered components and labeled parts| Function Page | ||
| 1 | Multifunction display 274 | |
| 2 | COMAND display; see the separate operating instructions | |
| 3 | Switches on the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions | |
| 4 | Rejects or ends a call 279 Exits phone book/redial memoryMakes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memoryAdjusts the volumeMute |
| Function Page | |
| 5 | ◀ ▶ Selects a menu 273▲ ▼ Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists 273OKTo confirm your selection 273Hiding display messages 290 |
| 6 | ←Back 273Switches off the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions |
Center console
Center console, upper section
text_image
1 RADIO DISC NAV1 TEL OK ON CLEAR 1 2 3 OFF ARC 307 4 5 6 ONI REL MINDU 7 8 9 PUBS PUE WMDD + 0 + ② ③ ⑦ ⑥ ⑤ OFF PUE WMDD ④ ③ ② P68.20-4552-31| Function Page | ||
| 1 | COMAND; see the separate operating instructions | |
| 2 | Seat heating | 116 |
| 3 | Seat ventilation | 118 |
| 4 | PARKTRONIC | 222 |
| Function Page | ||
| 5 |  Hazard warninglamps 132 | |
| 6 |  PASS AIR BAG OFF Indicator lamp | 49 |
| 7 |  ESP® | 72 |
Center console, lower section
text_image
Diagram of car interior with numbered components for driving or control systemi Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package
| Function Page | ||
| 10 | Cup holder 348Ashtray 351Cigarette lighter 352Socket 352 | |
| 11 | COMAND controller; see the separate operating instructions | |
| 12 | ON&OFFROAD menu button 262 | |
| 13 | LOW RANGE LOW RANGE off-road gear | 259 |
| e | Function Page | |
| 14 | Level control | 212 |
| 15 | DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) 256 | |
| 16 | Manual drive program | 178 |
| 17 | Selector wheel for on-road programs 253Selector wheel for off-road programs 258 | |
| 18 | Stowage compartment with Media Interface 342 | |
text_image
10 11 12 13 14 15 P48.20-4605-31i Vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD package and AMG vehicles
| Function Page | ||
| 10 | Cup holder 348Ashtray 351Cigarette lighter 352Socket 352 | |
| 11 | COMAND controller; see the separate operating instructions | |
| 12 | Level control | 218 |
| Function Page | |
| 13 | DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) 256 |
| 14 | Adaptive Damping System 217Adjusts the AMG adaptive damping system (AMG vehicles) 221 |
| 15 | Stowage compartment with Media Interface 342 |
Overhead control panel
text_image
Diagram of car interior air conditioner unit with numbered labels pointing to ports and a highlighted component| Function Page | ||
| 1 | Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off | 135 |
| 2 | Switches the front interior lighting on 136 | |
| 3 | Switches the rear interior lighting on/off | 136 |
| 4 | Switches the front interior lighting/automatic interior lighting control off | 136 |
| 5 | Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off | 135 |
| 6 | Opens/closes the sliding sunroof 99Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel with roller sunblinds | 100 |
| Function Page | |
| 7 | Eyeglasses compartment 342 |
| 8 | Roadside Assistance call button (mbrace system) 358 |
| 9 | SOS SOS button (mbrace system) 356 |
| 10 | MB Info call button (mbrace system) 358 |
| 11 | Rear-view mirror 122 |
| 12 | Buttons for the garage door opener 367 |
| 13 | Microphone for mbrace (emergency call system), telephone and the Voice Control System |
Door control panel
text_image
Diagram of a car interior with numbered parts for identification, including controls, dashboard, and steering wheel.Function Page
① Opens the door 87
② Unlocks/locks the vehicle 87
③ M 1 2 3
Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel (memory function) 125
④ Adjusts the seats 107
⑤
Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically
122
Function Page
⑥ Opens/closes the side windows 94
⑦ Opens/closes the tailgate 92
⑧ Opens/closes the hinged power side windows 94
⑨ Activates/
deactivates the override
feature for the side
windows in the rear
compartment 66
Useful information 42
Panic alarm 42
Occupant safety 42
Children in the vehicle 60
Driving safety systems 66
Theft deterrent locking system ..... 77
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 28).
Panic alarm
text_image
① PRAIG P80.00-2205-31▶ To activate: press ☐ PANIC button ① for least one second.
An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting Additional protection is provided by: flashes.
▶ To deactivate: press ☐ PANIC button ① again.
or
▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or
▶ Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehicle.
Occupant safety
Important safety notes
WARNING
Modifications to the restraint systems could result in them not functioning properly any more. The restraint systems could then no longer protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do and could fail in the event of an accident or activate unexpectedly, for example. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify parts of the restraint systems. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz center. USA only: for further information contact our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1800-367-6372).
In this section, you will learn the most important facts about the restraint system components of the vehicle.
The restraint system consists of:
- Seat belts
- Child restraint systems
at LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system
• SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
- PRE-SAFE®
• Air bag system components with:
- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
- Front-passenger seat with Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Although the systems are independent, their protective functions work in conjunction with each other. Not all air bags are always deployed in an accident.
For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle restraint systems for infants and children, see "Children in the vehicle" (▷ page 60).
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) There is a malfunction if:
Introduction
SRS consists of:
• SRS warning lamp
- Air bags
• The air bag control unit with crash sensor
- Emergency Tensioning Devices for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear
- Seat belt force limiters for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the real
SRS reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. It can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident.
SRS warning lamp
WARNING
If SRS is malfunctioning, child restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate vehicle deceleration. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Have SRS checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
SRS functions are checked regularly when you switch on the ignition and when the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time.
The SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started.
The SRS components are in operational readiness when the 📄 SRS warning lamp goes out while the engine is running.
- the SRS warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on
- the engine is running and the SRS warning lamp does not go out after a fe seconds
• the engine is running and the SRS warning lamp lights up again
Safety guidelines for seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) and air bags
WARNING
- Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced. Their anchoring points must also be checked. Only use seat belts installed or supplied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
• Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. Check your national disposal guidelines. California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
- Air bags and ETDs are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD that has deployed must be replaced. PRE-SAFE® has electrically operated reversible belt tensioners in addition to the pyrotechnic ETDs.
•Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. ed They could tear.
• Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the seat belts.
- Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection.
- No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS.
- Do not change or remove any component or part of the SRS.
- Do not install additional trim material, se covers, badges, etc. to the:
- padded steering wheel boss
- knee bag covers
- front-passenger air bag cover
- outer side of front seat bolsters
- outer side of rear bench seat backrest seat bolsters
- roof lining trim
- Do not install additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring.
- Keep area between air bags and occupants free of objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
- Do not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door. These items may be thrown around the vehicle and cause head and other injuries when the window curtain air bag deployed.
• Air bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them
- Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat.
- Improper repair work on the SRS creates risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
- For your protection and the protection of others, when scrapping the air bag unit or ETD, our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
- Given the considerable deployment speed, required inflation volume, and the material of the air bags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other, potentially more serious injuries resulting from air bag deployment.
If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz strongly recommends that you inform the subsequent owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the applicable section in the Operator's Manual.
Air bags
Important safety notes
WARNING
Using unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even prevent deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the function of the air bag deactivation system could be restricted. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz.
WARNING
The air bag parts are hot after the airbag has been deployed. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the air bag parts. Have the deployed air bags replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
WARNING
Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence of injuries and fatalities in certain situations:
- frontal impacts (driver's and front-passenger front air bags and driver's knee bag)
- side impacts (side impact air bags and window curtain air bags)
- rollover (window curtain air bags) However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. When the air bags are deployed, a small amount of powder is released. The powder generally does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the
vehicle. In order to prevent potential breathing difficulties, you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If y have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door.
WARNING
In order to reduce the potential danger of injuries caused during the deployment of the front air bags, the driver and front passenger must always be correctly seated and wear their seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a collision, you must always be in the normal seat position with your back against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make s that it is correctly positioned on your body.
As the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating position and correct positioning of the hands on the steering wheel will help to keep you at a s distance from the air bag. Occupants who are not wearing their seat belt, are not seated properly or are too close to the air bag can seriously injured or killed by an air bag, as inflates with great force instantaneously:
- sit with the seat belt fastened correctly a in a position that is as upright as possibl with your back against the backrest.
- move the driver's seat as far back as possible, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver's chest to the center the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 inches (25 cm). You should be able to accomplish this by adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If you have any difficulties, please contact a authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
- do not lean your head or chest close to steering wheel or dashboard.
- only hold the steering wheel on the outside. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of
hand/arm injury if the driver front air bag inflates.
- adjust the front-passenger seat as far back as possible from the dashboard when the seat is occupied.
- occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their head in the area of the door where the side impact air bag inflates. This could result in serious or fatal injuries should the side impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator's Manual.
If the air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can also open the window to allow fresh air to enter the vehicle interior. The SRS warning lamp lights up.
The air bag installation locations are identified by the AIR BAG symbol.
anThe air bags are deployed if the air bag control unit detects the need for deployment. Only in the event of such a situation will the air bags provide their supplemental protection.
If the driver and front passenger do not wear their seat belts, it is not possible for the air
bags to provide their supplemental protection.
In the event of other types of impacts and impacts below air bag deployment thresholds, the air bags will not deploy. The driver and passenger will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is needed to provide the best possible protection in a rollover.
Air bags provide additional protection; they are not, however, a substitute for seat belt. All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat belts regardless of whether your vehicle is equipped with air bags or not.
It is important for your safety and that of passenger to have deployed air bags replac and to have any malfunctioning air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the a bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.
After an air bag has been deployed, have the vehicle towed to the nearest qualified specialist workshop, even if your vehicle ready to drive.
Front air bags
text_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with labeled parts including the Mercedes-Benz logo and numbered annotations.Driver's air bag ① deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger front air bag ② deploys in front of and above the glove box.
The front air bags increase protection for the driver's and front passenger's head and chest.
They are deployed:
- at the start of an accident with a high rate of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a longitudinal direction - if the system determines that air bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt also - independently of other air bags in the vehicle
The release time of the front air bags is dependent upon the use of the seat belt. If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags are generally not deployed.
Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air bags. In the event of a collision, the air bag control unit evaluates the vehicle deceleration. In the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with enough propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed if a second deployment threshold is exceeded within a few milliseconds.
The deployment of front-passenger front air bag ② is also influenced by the weight category of the front passenger, which is determined by the Occupant Classification System (OCS) (▷ page 49).
The lighter the passenger-side occupant, the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required (predicted at the start of the impact) for second-stage inflation of the front-passenger front air bag. In the second stage, the front air bags are inflated with the maximum amount of propellant gas available.
The front air bags are not deployed in situations where a low impact severity is predicted. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt.
Front-passenger front air bag ② will only deploy if:
- the system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, has detected that the front-passenger seat is occupied
- the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp on the center console is not lit (▷ page 49)
- the air bag control unit predicts a high impact severity
Driver's knee bag
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel, dashboard, and control panel (no visible text or symbols)they are designed to do. In addition, the function of the air bag deactivation system could be restricted. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz.
WARNING
Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Driver's knee bag ① deploys under the steering column. The driver's knee bag is always deployed along with the driver's fro air bag. The driver's knee bag is designed operate together with the front air bags in frontal impacts if certain thresholds are exceeded. The driver's knee bag operates best in conjunction with correctly positione and fastened seat belts.
The driver's knee bag increases protection the driver against:
- knee injuries
- thigh injuries
- lower leg injuries
Side impact air bags
WARNING
Using unsuitable seat covers could restrict even prevent deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants a
You should only use seat covers that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. The seat covers must have a special tear seam for side impact air bags. Otherwise, the side impact air bags cannot deploy correctly and therefore cannot provide the intended protection in the event of an
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the seat, seatbelt, and door panel (no text or symbols visible)
natural_image
Interior view of a car seat with a numbered component (no visible text or symbols)Front side impact air bags ① and side impact air bags in the 2nd row of seats ② inflate ne: to the outer seat cushion.
When deployed, the side impact air bags of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied additional protection for the thorax and, on or not.
the front seats, the pelvis of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on the impact occurs. However, they do not protect the:
- head
- neck
- arms
The side impact air bags are deployed:
• on the side on which an impact occurs
- at the start of an accident with a high of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
- regardless of whether the seat belt on driver's seat and the outer seats of the row of seats is used
• independently of the front air bags
• independently of the ETDs
If the vehicle rolls over, the side impact air bags are generally not deployed. side impact air bags are deployed if the system detects
high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in lateral direction, or also if the vehicle rolls over, and the system determines that side impact air bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt.
Side impact air bags will not deploy in side impacts which do not exceed the system's preset deployment thresholds for lateral acceleration/deceleration. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt.
The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side is not deployed in the following situations:
- the OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is not occupied, and
- the front-passenger seat belt is not fastened.
The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side will deploy if the frontpassenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of
Window curtain air bags
text_image
① P91.60-4265-31Window curtain air bags ① enhance the level of protection for the head, but not chest or arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs.
The window curtain air bags are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deploy in the area extending from the front door (A-pillar) to the rear side window (D-pillar).
Window curtain air bags are deployed:
- at the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
• on the side on which an impact occurs
- on the driver's side and passenger side, in the event of a vehicle rollover and if the system determines that air bag deployment can offer the vehicle occupants additional protection to that provided by the seat belt
• independently of the use of the seat belt
- regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
• independently of the front air bags
Window curtain air bags ① will not deploy in the event of impacts which do not exceed the system's preset deployment thresholds for vehicle acceleration/deceleration. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt.
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Method of operation
WARNING
If the ☒2 PASS, OFF AIR BAD indicator lamp illuminates when an adult or someone larger than a small individual is in the front passenger seat, have the front passenger reposition himself or herself in the seat until the ☒2 PASS, OFF AIR BAD indicator lamp goes out.
In the event of a collision, the air bag contrunit will not allow front passenger front air I deployment when the OCS has classified the front passenger seat occupant as weighing a much as or less than a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or if the f passenger seat is classified as being empty.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being up to or less than the weight of a 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint, the PASS OFF AIR BAG indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated. This indicates that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat is classified as being empty, the 2 PASS AIR SAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain illuminated. This indicates that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being heavier than the weight of a typical 1 month-old child seated in a standard child restraint or as being a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small adult), the indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started. Depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the seat, it will then remain illuminated or go out. With the indicator lamp illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. With the ☒ PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp out, the front passenger front air bag is activated.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as an adult or someone larger than a small individual, the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately six seconds when the engine is started and then go out. This indicates that the front passenger from air bag is activated.
If the ☒ PASS, OFF AIR BAG indicator lamp is illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is deactivated and will not be deployed.
If the ☒2 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is activated and will be deployed
• in the event of certain frontal impacts
- if the impact exceeds a predetermined triggering threshold
• independent of the side impact air bag or
cal pelvis air bag
If the front passenger front air bag is deployed, the rate of inflation will be influenced by
- the rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit
- the front passenger's weight category as identified by the OCS
WARNING
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, 12 we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. h Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant s restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat belt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchors
and Top Tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front-passenger seat:
- Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to deactivate the front-passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front-passenger seat.
- A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to eliminate this risk completely is never to place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the front-passenger seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint on the rear seat.
- If you install a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat, make sure the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. Should the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the
PASS OFF AIR BAG indicator lamp while driving to make sure that the PASS OFF AIR BAG indicator lamp is illuminated. If the PASS OFF AIR BAG indicator lamp goes out or remains out,
not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates.
- If you place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat:
- move the seat as far back as possible
- use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child
- secure child restraint with the vehicle's seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions
- For children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front-passenger front air bag may or may not be activated.
WARNING
If the red SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the indicator lamp light up simultaneously, the OCS is malfunctioning. The front passenger front air bag will be deactivated in this case. Have the system checked by qualified technicians as soon as possible. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. In order to ensure proper operation of the air bag system and OCS:
- Sit with the seat belt properly fastened in a position that is as upright as possible with your back against the seat backrest.
- When seated, a passenger should not position him/herself in such a way as to cause the passenger's weight to be lifted from the seat cushion as this may result in the OCS being unable to correctly approximate the passenger's weight category.
- Read and observe all warnings in this chapter.
text_image
1 PASS AIR BAG OFF P68.10-4561-31If the key is removed from the ignition lock is in position 0, PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp ① does not light up.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the front-passenger seat using a weight sensor. The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated automatically for certain weight categories. PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp ① shows you the current status. If PASSENGB AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp ① is lit, the f passenger front air bag is disabled.
The system does not deactivate:
• the side impact air bag
• the window curtain air bag
- the ETDs
To be classified correctly, the front passeng must sit:
• with the seat belt fastened correctly
- in a position that is as upright as possib with their back against the seat backrest
• with their feet on the floor
The OCS weight sensor reading is affected the occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. by leaning on the armrest.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover the seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Both the driver and the front passenger should always observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp as an indication of whether or not the front passenger is positioned correctly. Observe also the air bag display messages that can be displayed in the instrument cluster (▷ page 301). If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy.
The OCS may have detected that the seat:
- is empty or occupied by the weight of a typical child up to twelve months old, seated in a child restraint system.
• is occupied by a small individual, such as a young teenager or a small adult. - is occupied by a child in a child restraint system whose weight is greater than that of a typical twelve month old child.
These are examples of when the OCS
deactivates the front-passenger front air bag.
Deactivation takes place although the collision fulfills the criteria for deploying the driver's air bag.
System self-test
WARNING
If the ☒ Pass AIR RAC OFF indicator lamp does not illuminate, the system is not functioning. You must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any child on the front passenger seat.
WARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect the function of the OCS. This could result in the front-passenger front air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. Make sure that the bottom and back of the child restraint system make full contact with the front-passenger seat cushion and backrest.
Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up:
- if you turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2
- if you press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button once or twice on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
- if an adult is seated properly on the front-passenger seat and the OCS classifies the occupant as an adult
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out again after approximately six seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the OCS detects that the front-passenger seat is empty, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will continue to light up. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will not go out.
For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (▷ page 53).
Problems with the occupant classification system
WARNING
If the 2 PASS INR BAG OFF indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do allow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
WARNING
If the ☐2 ☐MOS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passeng seat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lights up and remains on.The person on the front-passenger seat:has the weight of a typical adulthas been determined by the system not to be a child | The OCS is malfunctioning.Make sure that the front passenger is sitting in a correct position.Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display (▷ page 301). |
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up and/or stays on. The front-passenger seat is: · unoccupied · occupied with the weight of a child up to twelve months old in a child restraint system | The OCS is malfunctioning. ► Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child seat. ► Make sure that the backrest and base of the child restraint system are resting securely on the front-passenger seat. If necessary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat. ► When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt being pulled too tightly. ► Check the installation of the child restraint system. ► Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat. ► If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, have the OCS system checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the OCS has been repaired. ► Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display (▷ page 301). |
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection system)
Introduction
PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures to protect occupants in certain hazardous situations.
Important safety notes
! Make sure that there are no objects in footwell or behind the seats when resetting the seats. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
Despite your vehicle being equipped with the PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of personal injuries occurring as a result of an accident cannot be eliminated.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
Function
PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
- in emergency braking situations, e.g. when BAS is activated.
- in critical driving situations, e.g. when physical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely.
- on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: if BAS PLUS brakes hard or the radar sensor the system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations.
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected:
• the front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
- if the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof and the side windows are closed so that only a small gap remains. On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel, they are closed completely.
- vehicles with the memory function: the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in unfavorable position.
- vehicles with a multicontour seat: the air pressure in the side bolsters of the backrest is increased.
If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE hacks the belt pre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontour seats, the air pressure in the side bolsters is reduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE can then be reversed.
If the seat belts are not released:
▶ When the vehicle is stationary, move the backrest or seat back slightly.
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced a the locking mechanism is released.
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More information about seat-belt adjustment can be found under "Seat-belt adjustment" (▷ page 57).
Seat belts
Important safety notes
WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended of protection if the backrest is not in the upright position. When braking or in the end of an accident, you could slide underneath seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increase risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the is in the upright position.
WARNING
Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if:
• they are damaged, extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
- the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty
- the Emergency Tensioning Devices or the belt anchorage has been modified.
Damage caused to seat belts in an accident may not be visible, e.g. by splinters of glass. Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or fail, for example in the event of an accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices may be deployed unintentionally or fail to be deployed when required. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Never modify seat belts, Emergency
Tensioning Devices, seat belt anchorages and inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not damaged or worn and are clean.
Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in:
- all 50 states
• the U.S. territories
• the District of Columbia
level all Canadian provinces
Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey.
sea i See "Children in the vehicle"
(▷ page 60) for further information on infants and children traveling in the vehicle as well as on child restraint systems.
Correct use of the seat belts
WARNING
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
- Seat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section, as
that could result in serious injuries in the event of an accident.
- Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times, because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes SRS (driver front air bag, driver's side knee bag, front-passenger front air bag, side impact air bags, window curtain air bags for the side windows), Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt force limiters, and front seat knee bolsters.
The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front air bags, driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side (side impact air bags, window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds and in certain rollovers (window curtain air bags and ETDs).
- Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm, across your neck or off your shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The seat belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen.
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder section is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder. It should not touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder portion of the seat belt under your arm. this purpose, you can adjust the height of the seat belt outlet.
- Position the lap belt as low as possible your hips and not across the abdomen. the lap belt is positioned across your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries a crash.
- Never wear seat belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing,
such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these might cause injuries.
- Make sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly. Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing.
- Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects at the same time.
- Seat belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the seat belt to distribute impact forces. The twisted seat belt against your body could cause injuries.
- Pregnant women should also always use a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
- Place the seat backrest in a position that is as upright as possible.
- Check your seat belt during travel to make sure it is properly positioned.
- Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat.
- When using a seat belt to secure infant restraints, toddler restraints, or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They Fo could tear.
of Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
on This could damage the seat belt.
If Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of in the seat belts.
Fastening seat belts
WARNING
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seat whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized child restraint system or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see the "Children in the vehicle" section.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and or the child is not properly secured in the restraint.
▶ Engage belt tongue ② in buckle ③. Seat-belt adjustment: if necessary, the driver's and front-passenger seat belts automatically adjust to the upper body (▷ page 57).
▶ If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height (▷ page 58).
▶ If necessary, pull upwards on the should section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. Further information can be found under "Special seat belt retractor" (▷ page 63).
text_image
P91.40-3261-31▶ Adjust the seat and move the backrest an almost vertical position (▷ page 106).
▶ Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt sash guide ①.
▶ Without twisting it, guide the shoulder section of the seat belt across the middle of your shoulder and the lap section across your pelvis.
For more information about releasing the seat held with release button ④, see "Releasing seat belts" (▷ page 58).
Seat belt adjustment
The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants.
The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
- you engage the belt tongue in the belt buckle and you then turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
- the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock and you then engage the belt tongue in the buckle.
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a retraction force if any slack is detected between the occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off in the on-board computer (▷ page 285).
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More information about PRE-SAFE® can be found under "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant protection)" (▷ page 54).
Belt height adjustment
natural_image
Interior view of a car seatbelt with a blue directional arrow indicating movement (no text or symbols)You can adjust the seat belt height on the front seats. Adjust the belt to a height that allows the upper part of the seat belt to be routed across the center of your shoulder.
▶ To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards
The belt sash guide engages in various positions.
②
③
▶ To lower: press and hold belt sash guide release ①.
▶ P
▶ Slide the belt sash guide downwards.
▶ Release belt sash guide release ① and make sure that the belt sash guide has engaged.
Releasing seat belts
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully ro up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tong will be trapped in the door or in the se mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
text_image
Diagram of car seatbelt components with numbered labels and magnified views for assembly or repair reference.① Belt sash guide
② Seat belt tongue
③ Buckle
④ Release button
▶ Press release button ④ and guide belt tongue ② back towards belt sash guide ①.
Belt warning for the driver and front passenger
Every time the engine is started, the seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds. It lights up regardless of whether the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already been fastened. If the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already been fastened, the ☐ seat belt warning lamp then goes out.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. This warning tone stops after a maximum of six seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fastened.
If after six seconds, the driver or front passenger have not fastened their seat belts and the doors are closed:
- the ☐ seat belt warning lamp remains lit as long as the driver's or front-passenger's seat belt is not fastened
and
- if a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is occupied, do not engage the seat belt exceeded, the ☐ seat belt warning lamptongue in the buckle on the front-begins to flash. A warning tone also sounds passenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency with increasing intensity for a maximum of Tensioning Device could be triggered in the 60 seconds or until the driver or front event of an accident.
passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver/front passenger unfasten their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the seat belt warning lamp lights up and warning tone sounds again.
The warning tone ceases even if the driver front-passenger seat belt has still not been fastened after 60 seconds. The 🐘 seat warning lamp stops flashing but remains illuminated.
After the vehicle comes to a standstill, the • the seats in the third row warning tone is reactivated. The ☐ seat The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident, belt warning lamp flashes again if the vehicle falling them close against the body. speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h). The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat
The seat belt warning lamp only goes positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. out if: The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants ba
- both the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts.
or - the vehicle is stationary and a door is o
For more information on the seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belts" (▷ page 324).
Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt force limiters
WARNING
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices which have been triggered immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
! If the front-passenger seat is not
i Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: an electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE to trigger the ^e tightening of the seat belt in hazardous ^a situations. This procedure is reversible.
The seat belts on the following seats have for Emergency Tensioning Devices and seat belt force limiters:
belt
- driver's and front-passenger seat
• the outer seats in the second row
• the seats in the third row
The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident, telling them close against the body.
The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat
positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.
The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back towards the backrest.
If the seat belt is also equipped with a seat belt force limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle pen. occupant is reduced.
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are synchronized with the front air bags, which absorb part of the deceleration force.
This results in the force exerted on the occupant being distributed over a greater area.
The ETDs can only be activated when:
• the ignition is switched on
- the restraint systems are operational; see "SRS warning lamp" (▷ page 43)
- the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on each of the lap-shoulder belts in the front
The Emergency Tensioning Devices on the outside seats in the second row and on the seats in the third row are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts.
The ETDs are triggered depending on the type of seat recommended for the size and weight of and severity of an accident: the child.
- in the event of a head-on or rear-end collision if the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal direction during the initial stages of the impact.
- in the event of a side impact if the ve decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a lateral direction on the side opposite to impact.
- in certain situations where the vehicle rolls recommend for the size and weight of the over if the system determines that it can child.
provide additional protection. Children can be killed or seriously injured by
The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
@occupants, especially children, should always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
gecommended for the size and weight of the child.
If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bar and a small amount of powder may also be released. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. You can also open the window to allow fresh air to enter the vehicle interior. The SR warning lamp lights up.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by an, inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front passenger seat:
- Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to deactivate the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate 0-child restraint on the front passenger seat.
For children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front passenger front air bag may or may not be activated. Always make sure the PASS AIR RAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
- A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only means to completely eliminate this risk is to never place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. We therefore strongly recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
- If you must install a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat because circumstances require you to do
Children in the vehicle
Child restraint systems
Important safety notes
WARNING
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
so, make sure the 📋2 🐘 Pass AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the fro passenger front air bag is deactivated. Should the 📋2 🐘 Pass AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation.
Periodically check the 2 PASS AIR RAC OFF indicator lamp while driving to make sure the 2 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the 2 PASS AIR RAC OFF indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger chest front air bag inflates.
- If you have to place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child, and secure child restraint with the vehicle's seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions and the notes on use. Please ensure, that the base of the child restraint system is always resting completely on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers.
WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always install child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident as soon as possible. Have the securing systems on the child restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, before you install a child restraint
WARNING
Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint.
Children that are too large for a child restraint must travel in seats using normal seat belts. Position the shoulder belt across the chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt
positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) unless system is not exposed to direct sunlight. they reach a height where a lap-shoulder belt Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the fits properly without a booster. When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could:
- open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
• get out and disrupt traffic.
• operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:
- release the parking brake.
- shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
- Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.
WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot.
Children may burn themselves on these pa particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child w you, always ensure that the child restraint
If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:
- Secure the child with a child or infant seat restraint system appropriate to the age and e, weight of the child.
- Make sure that the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you always properly secure all infants and children with a child or infant seat restraint system for the trip.
The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in:
- all 50 states
• the U.S. territories
• the District of Columbia
• all Canadian provinces
Infants and children must always be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system recommended for the size and weight of the child. The infant or child restraint system must be properly secured in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
All infant or child restraint systems must meet the following standards:
• U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
• Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint
ssystem. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system.
Always read and follow the manufacturer's instructions when using an infant or child restraint system or booster seat.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior or on the infant or child restraint.
Special seat belt retractor
WARNING
If you release the seat belt when driving, the special seat belt retractor is deactivated. The released seat belt cannot be engaged again while driving, because the inertia reel pulls in the seat belt a small distance. The child restraint system is no longer properly secured. There is an increased risk of serious injury or even fatal injury.
Always keep the seat belt of the activated special seat belt retractor engaged when driving.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt will not slacken once the child restraint system has been secured.
Installing a child restraint system:
▶ Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
▶ Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt retractor.
▶ Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.
Activating the special seat belt retractor:
▶ Pull the seat belt out fully and let the belt retractor retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should respective outer seat in the second row must hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat be in the upright position.
belt retractor is activated.
▶ Push down on the child restraint system take up any slack.
Removing a child restraint system/ deactivating the special seat belt retractor:
▶ Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
▶ Press the seat belt release button and guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet. The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors in the rear
WARNING
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. In the are event of an accident, a child might not be restrained correctly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.
When installing a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system. To ensure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child cstraint system can perform its protective function as intended, the backrest of the respective outer seat in the second row must be in the upright position.
When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) to child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the center seat does not get trapped. Otherwise, the seat belt could be damaged.
text_image
① ② P01.20-2345-31Securing rings for the outer seats in the second
text_image
ISOFIX ② P91.12-3603-31Securing rings for the third row of seats Installation indicator ① shows the installation location of securing rings ②.
Securing rings ② for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are installed on the left and right:
- on the rear seat backrests of the outer seats in the second row
• on the backrests of the seats in the thir row of seats
Before installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system in the second row:
▶ Move the rear seat backrests in the sec row to an upright position (▷ page 111).
▶ Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings ②. Comply with the child restrain system manufacturer's instructions when installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system.
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also be used and can be installed using the
vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child seat according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Top Tether
Top Tether anchorages
WARNING
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of flow direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always lock rear seat backrests after installing a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjust the rear seat backrests so that they are positioned vertically.
Top Tether provides an additional connection between the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system secured with LATCH-type (ISOFIX) and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is equipped with Top Tether, this should always be used.
The Top Tether anchorages for the second row of seats are installed on the rear of the rear seat backrests. For the third row of seats, use the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment floor.
did the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster.
text_image
① ② ③ ④ P91.48-3.348-31
text_image
P91.20-2311-31▶ Move head restraint ③ upwards.
▶ Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.
Route Top Tether belt ⑥ under head restraint ③ between the two head restraint bars.
▶ Guide Top Tether belt ⑥ downwards between cargo compartment cover ① and rear seat backrest ②.
▶ Hook Top Tether hook ⑤ of Top Tether ⑥ into Top Tether anchorage ④.
Make sure that:
- Top Tether hook ⑤ is hooked into Top Tether anchorage ④ as shown.
- Top Tether belt ⑥ is not twisted.
- Top Tether belt ⑥ is routed between seat backrest ② and cargo
compartment cover ① if cargo compartment cover is installed.
- Top Tether belt ⑥ is routed between the rear seat backrest ② and the cargo net if the cargo net is installed.
▶ Tension Top Tether belt ⑥. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.
▶ Move head restraint ③ back down again slightly if necessary (▷ page 110). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt ⑥.
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could:
- open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
• get out and disrupt traffic.
• operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:
release the parking brake.
- shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
- Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
) reach of children.
WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could:
- open doors, thus endangering other people or road users
- exit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming traffic
• operate vehicle equipment and become trapped
There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always activate the child-proof locks and override feature if children are traveling in vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always the key with you and lock the vehicle. No leave children unattended in the vehicle.
You can activate the following child-proof locks:
- rear doors (▷ page 66)
- rear side windows (▷ page 66)
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
WARNING
Children could open a rear door from inside the vehicle. This could result in serious injuries or an accident. Therefore, when children ride in the rear always secure the doors with the child-proof locks.
text_image
① ② P68.00-6274-31You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside.
▶ To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow ①.
▶ Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly.
▶ To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ②.
Override feature for the rear side windows
WARNING
When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats, activate the override switch. Otherwise, the children could be injured, e.g. by trapping themselves in the rear side window.
text_image
Car interior control panel with labeled buttons and a magnified view showing a device with iconsrear
▶ To activate/deactivate: press button ①. If indicator lamp ② is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp ② is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment.
Driving safety systems
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems:
• ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (▷ page 67)
• BAS (Brake Assist System) (▷ page 68)
- BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus) (▷ page 68)
- COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (distance warning function and adaptive Brake Assist) (▷ page 69)
- ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (▷ page 72)
- EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) (▷ page 74)
• ADAPTIVE BRAKE (▷ page 75) - PRE-SAFE® Brake (▷ page 75)
• STEER CONTROL (▷ page 76)
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style or become distracted, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
The driving safety systems described on work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths, etc. (▶ page 404).
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
General information
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking.
The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 67).
WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.
in Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist to workshop.
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (▷ page 326) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (▷ page 291).
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph, (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently.
Braking
▶ If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over.
▶ To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving.
Off-road ABS
An ABS system specifically suited to off-road terrain is activated automatically once the road program is activated (▷ page 258). At speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), the wheels lock cyclically during braking. The digging-in effect achieved in the process reduces the stopping distance on off-road terrain. This limits steering capability.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
General information
BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 67).
WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
Braking
- Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed on the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS)
General information
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 67).
DAS PLUS is only available in vehicles off equipped with DISTRONIC PLUS.
For BAS PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor front system must be operational.
With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time.
If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BAS.
BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle or reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are assisted when braking.
Important safety notes
WARNING
BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, BAS PLUS may:
• intervene unnecessarily
- not intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
WARNING
BAS PLUS does not react:
• to people or animals
• to oncoming vehicles
• to crossing traffic
- when cornering
As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene critical situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
in within a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h).
At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also react to stationary objects. Examples of stationary objects are stopped or parked vehicles.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of:
- dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
- there is interference by other radar sourc
- there are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages
- a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike
- a vehicle traveling in front on a different relative to the center of your vehicle
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle.
If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously.
- Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. cesABS prevents the wheels from locking.
BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes function as usual again, if:
- you release the brake pedal.
• there is no longer a risk of collision. line - no obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle.
If you have activated DSR (▷ page 256), BAS PLUS is likewise deactivated.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
General notes
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists of the Adaptive Brake Assist and the distance warning function, which are described in the following.
Function
To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates brake force necessary if:
- you approach an obstacle, and
• BAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision
When driving at a speed under 20 mph Distance warning function
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake peda BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in bral pressure will be carried out at the last possible moment.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 67).
When driving at a speed above 20 mph! WARNING
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the brake pressure to a value adapted to the traffic situation.
BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations with vehicles in front
WARNING
The distance warning function does not react:
• to people or animals
• to oncoming vehicles
• to crossing traffic
- when cornering
Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
WARNING
The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, the distance warning function may:
• give an unnecessary warning
- not give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely solely on the dista warning function.
Function
▶ To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate the distance warning function the on-board computer (▷ page 281).
If the distance warning function is not activated, the OFF symbol appears in the assistance graphics display.
The distance warning function can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. The distance warning function cannot prevent a collision without your intervention.
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the ▲ distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster.
▶ Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front.
or
▶ Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time.
From a speed of around 40 mph (70 km/h), the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles.
If you approach an obstacle and the distance warning function detects a risk of a collision, the system will initially alert you both visually and acoustically.
in particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if:
- dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
• there is snow or heavy rain - there is interference by other radar sources
- there are strong radar reflections, for of example in parking garages
- a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike
- a vehicle traveling in front on a different line relative to the center of your vehicle
- new vehicles or after the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST system has been serviced
Observe the notes in the section on breaking-in (▷ page 166).
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle.
Adaptive Brake Assist
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 67).
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist may:
• intervene unnecessarily
- not intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate t intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
• to people or animals
• to oncoming vehicles
• to crossing traffic
• to stationary obstacles
- when cornering
As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
Due to the nature of the system, particular complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene.
Adaptive Brake Assist aids you in braking during hazardous situations at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h) and uses the radar sensor system to evaluate the traffic situation.
With the help of Adaptive Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time.
Should you approach an obstacle and Adaptive Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, Adaptive Brake Assist calculates the
braking force necessary to avoid a rear-end collision. Should you apply the brakes vigorously, Adaptive Brake Assist will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions.
▶ Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will work normally again if:
- you release the brake pedal.
- there is no longer any danger of a collision.
- no obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle.
the Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE if adaptive Brake Assist requires particularly high brake pressure, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are deployed simultaneously.
Up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph (250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been recognized as such at least once over the period of observation. Adaptive Brake Assist does not react to stationary obstacles.
If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is:
- dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
e• there is snow or heavy rain
r• there is interference by other radar sources -
there are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages
• a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike -
a vehicle traveling in front on a different relative to the center of your vehicle
- new vehicles or after the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST system has been serviced
Observe the notes in the section on breaking-in (▷ page 166).
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 67).
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tires a the road surface.
If ESP ^ detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within
physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize the vehicle during braking
4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
4ETS traction control is part of ESP
Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surface for example if the road surface is slippery
one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.
Traction control remains active, even if you deactivate ESP®.
In appropriate driving situations, activate the off-road program (▷ page 258).
Offeroad 4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
A 4ETS system specifically suited to off-road terrain is activated automatically once the off-road program is activated (▷ page 258).
Important safety notes
WARNING
If ESP ^ is malfunctioning, ESP ^ is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
! Only operate the vehicle for a maximum of ten seconds on a brake test dynamometer. Switch off the ignition. Application of the brakes by ESP may otherwise destroy the brake system.
A function or performance test should only be carried out on a two-axle dynamometer. Before you operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified workshop. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the birbrake system.
ESP® is deactivated if the OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running.
If the warning lamp and the warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP not available due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps (page 329) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (page 291).
i Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will E ^® function properly.
Characteristics of ESP
General information
If the ESP warning lamp goes out beginning the journey, ESPis automatically active.
If ESP® intervenes, the ESP warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
If ESP® intervenes:
▶ Do not deactivate ESPunder any circumstances.
▶ Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away.
▶ Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions.
ECO start/stop function
The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP ^ remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP ^ was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP ^ remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
Important safety notes
You can select between the following states of ESP®:
- ESP® is activated.
- ESP® is deactivated.
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP, ESP no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP in the situations described in the following.
It may be best to deactivate ESP the following situations:
- when using snow chains
• in deep snow
• on sand or gravel
i Activate ESP ^ as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP ^ otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESPdeactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
text_image
1 OFF P54.25-8558-31▶ To switch off: press button ①.
The ☐ ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
To switch on: press button ①.
The ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Characteristics when ESRs deactivated
If ESP ^ is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ESWarning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP ^ will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP.
- ESP® no longer improves driving stability.
- engine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a ESP ^ trailer stabilization does not work if cutting action for better traction on loose ESP ^ is deactivated or disabled because of a surfaces. malfunction.
- traction control is still activated.
- ESP® still provides support when you brake.
Off-road ESP®
An ESP® system specifically suited to off-road terrain is activated automatically once the road program is activated (▶ page 258).
Off-road ESP® intervenes with a delay if there is oversteering or understeering, thus improving traction.
ESP® trailer stabilization
General information
ESP ^® trailer stabilization is not available in AMG vehicles.
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to swerve, ESP® assists you in this situation.
ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking an limiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilized.
Crosswind driving assistance
General information
Strong crosswinds can cause your vehicle to deviate from a straight course. The crosswind driving assistance function integrated into eFSP^® significantly reduces these effects.
ESP® intervenes automatically according to the direction and intensity of the crosswinds affecting your vehicle.
ESP stabilities the vehicle with braking interventions to assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane.
Crosswind driving assistance is active at vehicle speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering gently.
Important safety notes
Grosswind driving assistance does not work if ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction.
Important safety notes
WARNING
If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent the vehicle/trailer combination from swerving. Trailers with a high center of gravity can tip over before ESP can detect this. There is a risk of an accident.
Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer combination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly.
Trailer stabilisation is active above speeds about 37 mph (60 km/h).
EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
General information
EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (▷ page 67).
WARNING
off EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can still lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style Important safety notes
to the different handling characteristics. Have
the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (▷ page 327) as well as display messages (▷ page 293).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (▷ page 216) and hill start assist (▷ page 171).
PRE-SAFE® Brake
General information
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 67).
PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS.
For PRE-SAFE ^® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system must be operational.
With the help of the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time.
PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead, reduce the effects of such a collision. If PR
SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE Brake cannot prevent a collision without you intervention.
WARNING
PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehicle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you also brake.
Automatic emergency braking cannot prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident.
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action.
WARNING
PRE-SAFE ^® Brake cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic conditions.
In these cases, PRE-SAPEBrake may:
- give an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle
• not give a warning or intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself.
WARNING
PRE-SAFE ^® Brake does not react:
• to people or animals
• to oncoming vehicles
and crossing traffic
- when cornering
'As a result, PRE-SAFEBrake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of:
- dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
- there is interference by other radar sourc i If there is an increased risk of collision,
- there are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages
- a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. alf the risk of collision with the vehicle in front motorbike remains and you do not brake, take evasive
- a vehicle traveling in front on a different action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle relative to the center of your vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking,
c i If there is an increased risk of collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated.
If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front remains and you do not brake, take evasive
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to
collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph (70 km/h) PRE-SAFE Brake can also detect stationary objects. Examples of stationary objects are stopped or parked vehicles.
action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking, up to the point of full brake application.
Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an imminent accident.
You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-SAFE® Brake at any time by:
Function
▶ To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (▷ page 281).
If the PRE-SAFEBrake is not activated, the OFF symbol appears in the multifunction display.
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound
the △ distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster.
▶ Brake immediately to defuse the situation.
or
▶ Take evasive action provided it is safe to STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a so. noticeable steering force to the steering
PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle automatically under the following conditions:
- the driver and front-passenger have their seat belts fastened and
• the vehicle speed is between approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)
• depressing the accelerator pedal further.
- activating kickdown.
• releasing the brake pedal.
The braking action of PRE-SAFBrake is ended automatically if:
• you maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
- there is no longer any danger of a collision.
- there is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle.
If you have activated DSR (▷ page 256), PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated.
STEER CONTROL
General information
POSTER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering
wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization.
This steering assistance is provided in particular if:
- both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake.
• the vehicle starts to skid.
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 67).
No steering support is provided from STEER CONTROL, if:
- ESP® is malfunctioning.
• the lighting is faulty.
Power steering will, however, continue to function.
Theft deterrent locking system
Immobilizer
▶ To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
▶ To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch ignition off and open the driver's door.
▶ To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle.
The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine.
In the event that the engine cannot be started when the starter battery is fully charged, the immobilizer may be faulty. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
text_image
P54.32-8944-31▶ To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp ① flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately 15 seconds.
The To deactivate using the SmartKey: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
or
▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
▶ To deactivate using KEYLESS-GO: unlock the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO.
or
▶ Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open:
- a door
• the vehicle with the mechanical key
• the tailgate - the hood
▶ To turn the alarm off with the
SmartKey: press the 📊 or 🔒 button on the SmartKey.
The alarm is switched off.
or
▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off.
▶ To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off.
or
▶ Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example.
If the alarm continues for more than 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system automatically notifies the Customer Assistance Center. This is done either by text message or data connection. The emergency call system sends the message or data provided that:
- you have subscribed to the mbrace service.
- the mbrace service has been activated properly.
- the necessary mobile phone network is available.
Useful information 80
SmartKey 80
Doors 86
Cargo compartment 89
Side windows 93
Sliding sunroof 98
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 28).
SmartKey
Important safety notes
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could:
- open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
• get out and disrupt traffic.
• operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle motion if, for example, they: - release the parking brake.
- shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
- Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.
WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
Do not keep the SmartKey:
- with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey
with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil
• inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey.
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the in temperature-controlled cup holder.
Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be recognized.
SmartKey functions
text_image
Diagram of a car key with labeled parts including the BMW logo, brand mark, and function buttonsP80.35-2451-31
① To lock the vehicle
② To open/close the tailgate
③ To unlock the vehicle
▶ To unlock centrally: press button ③. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking:
• the vehicle is locked again.
- the theft deterrent locking system is armed again.
▶ To lock centrally: press button ①.
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
- the doors
- the tailgate
- the fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking.
You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (▷ page 285).
When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer (▷ page 284).
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is closing feature (▷ page 95).
KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle.
Locking/unlocking centrally
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need can the SmartKey with you. You can combine functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the 🔒 button on the SmartKey. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO the distance between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).
KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle by periodically establishing a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey. This happens:
- when the external door handles are touched
- when starting the engine
• while the vehicle is in motion
text_image
① ② PBO-61-2509-31▶ To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle.
▶ To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface ①.
▶ Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ② for an extended period.
ed Further information on the convenience closing feature (▷ page 95).
If you pull on the handle of the tailgate, only the cargo compartment of the vehicle is unlocked.
Changing the settings of the locking system
You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own.
▶ To change the setting: press and hold down the ☐ and 🔒 buttons simultaneously for approximately six
seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (▷ page 83).
If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the ☐ or ⭕ button:
- locks or
- unlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
▶ To unlock the driver's door: press the button once.
▶ To unlock centrally: press the button twice.
▶ To lock centrally: press the 🔒 button
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows:
▶ To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the a driver's door.
▶ To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door.
▶ To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles (▷ page 81).
▶ To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the 📊 and 🔒 buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (▶ page 83).
Mechanical key
General notes
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock a open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (▷ page 77).
There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
▶ To deactivate the alarm with the SmartKey: press the 📊 or 🔒 button on the SmartKey.
▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or
▶ To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-
e GO: press the Start/Stop button in the ignition lock. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
or
▶ Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle.
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically.
▶ To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Removing the mechanical key
text_image
P80.20-3612-31 ① ② P80.20-3612-31▶ Push release catch ① in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key ② from the SmartKey.
For further information about:
• unlocking the driver's door (▷ page 88)
- unlocking the cargo compartment (▷ page 93)
- locking the vehicle (▷ page 88)
Inserting the mechanical key
▶ Push mechanical key ② completely into the SmartKey until it engages and release catch ① is back in its basic position.
SmartKey battery
Important safety notes
WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal.
In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Checking the battery
text_image
① P80.35-2454-31▶ Press the ☐ or ⓤ button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp ① lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check lamp ① does not light up briefly.
Change the battery (▷ page 83). If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the 🔒 or ⬇ button:
- locks or - unlocks the vehicle
You can get a battery at any qualified specialist workshop.
Replacing the battery
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
Take the mechanical key out of the on SmartKey (▷ page 82).
text_image
1 2 P80.35-2455-31▶ Press mechanical key ② into the opening in the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover ① opens. Do not hold battery compartment cover ① closed while doing so.
▶ Remove battery compartment cover ①.
natural_image
3D rendered image of a car body component with a numbered callout (no text or symbols on the object itself)▶ Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery ③ falls out.
▶ Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.
▶ Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
▶ Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover ① into the housing first and then press to close it.
▶ Insert mechanical key ② into the SmartKey.
▶ Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle.
| Problems with the SmartKey | |
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey. | The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. ▶ Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the □ or □ button.If this does not work: ▶ Check the SmartKey battery (▷ page 83) and replace it if necessary (▷ page 83). ▶ Lock (▷ page 88) or unlock (▷ page 88) the vehicle using the mechanical key. |
| The SmartKey is faulty. ▶ Lock (▷ page 88) or unlock (▷ page 88) the vehicle using the mechanical key. ▶ Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. | There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. ▶ Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the □ or □ button. |
| There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO. ▶ Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the □ or □ button. ▶ Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If this does not work: ▶ Check the SmartKey battery (▷ page 83) and replace it if necessary (▷ page 83). ▶ Lock (▷ page 88) or unlock (▷ page 88) the vehicle using the mechanical key. | |
| You have lost a SmartKey. | Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. ▶ Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. ▶ If necessary, have the locks changed as well. |
| You have lost the mechanical key. | Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. ▶ If necessary, have the locks changed as well. |
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The engine cannot be started using the SmartKey. | The on-board voltage is too low.▶ Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again.If this does not work:▶ Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (▷ page 394).or▶ Jump-start the vehicle (▷ page 395).or▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The engine cannot be started using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey is in the vehicle. | A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected as easily.▶ Close the door and try to start the vehicle again. |
| There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.▶ Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. | |
Doors
Important safety notes
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle they could:
- open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
• get out and disrupt traffic.
• operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:
- release the parking brake.
- shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
- Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Ne leave children or animals unattended in th vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.
WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.
You should preferably place luggage or loads ver the cargo compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (▷ page 340).
Unlocking and opening doors from the inside
You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (▷ page 66).
If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm ① (▷ page 77). ②
text_image
Car interior panel with numbered annotations and a blue directional arrow indicating rotation or movement▶ Front door: pull door handle ②. If the door is locked, locking knob ① up. The door is unlocked and can be opened.
▶ Rear door: pull up locking knob ① on relevant rear door. The rear door is unlocked and can be opened.
Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. The buttons are located on both front doors.
text_image
cle open ney 1 2 P54.25-8774-31① To unlock
② To lock
▶ To unlock: press button ①.
▶ To lock: press button ②. If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehicle locks.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
You can open a front door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked.
pops If the vehicle has been locked using the locking button for the central locking, or has been locked automatically, and a door is opened from the inside:
- the vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked
- only the door which has been opened form the inside is unlocked if only the driver's door had been previously unlocked
Automatic locking feature
text_image
① ② P54:25-8774-31▶ To disarm: press and hold button ① for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
▶ To arm: press and hold button ② for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting h already been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning.
You could therefore be locked out if:
• the vehicle is being pushed.
• the vehicle is being towed.
- the vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.
You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board computer (▷ page 284).
Unlocking the driver's door (mechanical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (▷ page 77).
▶ Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (▷ page 82).
▶ Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.
text_image
or about d has 1 - 1 P72-10-3865-31▶ Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise to position 1.
The door is unlocked.
▶ Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.
▶ Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.
Power closing
Power closing pulls the doors and trunk lid into their locks automatically even if they are only partly closed.
▶ To power close a door: push the door the lock up to the first detent position. Power closing will pull the door fully clos
▶ To power close the tailgate: lightly put the tailgate downwards.
Power closing will pull the tailgate fully closed.
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
▶ Open the driver's door.
▶ Close the front-passenger door, the rear
or into
doors and the tailgate.
▶Press the locking button (▷ page 87).
▶ Check whether the locking knobs on the front-passenger door and the rear doors are still visible. Press down the locking knobs by hand, if necessary.
▶ Close the driver's door.
▶ Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (▷ page 82).
▶ Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.
text_image
1 P72-10-3887-31Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.
▶ Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1.
▶ Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.
▶ Make sure that the doors and the tailgate are locked.
▶ Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.
If you lock the vehicle as described above the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above a behind the tailgate.
i Tailgate opening dimensions ( page 453).
You should preferably place luggage or loads in the cargo compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (▷ page 340).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo compartment. You could otherwise lock yourself out.
You can:
Cargo compartment
Important safety notes
WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
- close the tailgate manually from outside
- open and close the tailgate automatically from outside
- open and close the tailgate automatically from inside
- limit the opening angle of the tailgate
- unlock the tailgate from inside with the emergency release
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailg is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning.
Tailgate reversing feature
after vehicles with tailgate remote closing feature, the tailgate is equipped with automatic obstacle recognition with a reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate when automatically
opening or closing, this procedure is stopped. Press the 📋 button on the SmartKey.
If the tailgate is stopped during the closing procedure, it will open again automatically.
The automatic obstacle recognition with reversing function is only an aid. It is not substitute for your attentiveness when opening and closing the tailgate.
▶ Pull handle ① and release it. The tailgate opens automatically.
a Closing
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers
• over the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing movement
This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
- press the 📋 button on the SmartKey, or
- press the remote operating switch on the driver's door, or
- press the closing or locking button on the tailgate, or
- pull the handle on the tailgate
Opening/closing manually from outside
Opening
natural_image
Side view of a car's front bumper with a close-up inset showing a labeled sensor or sensor device (no text or symbols on the device itself)
natural_image
Interior view of a car trunk with open lid and labeled component (no text or symbols beyond labeling)▶ Pull the tailgate down using recess ①.
▶ Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock.
▶ Lock the vehicle if necessary with the 🔒 button on the SmartKey or with OR KEYLESS-GO.
If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the cargo compartment, the tailgate will not lock.
Opening/closing automatically from outside
Important safety notes
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:
- press the 📋 button on the SmartKey.
-
press the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
-
press the closing or locking button on the tailgate.
- pull the handle on the tailgate.
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate.
i Tailgate opening dimensions (▷ page 453).
Notes on the reversing feature for the tailgate (▷ page 89).
Opening the tailgate automatically
You can open the tailgate automatically with the SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate.
▶ Press and hold the 📋 button on the SmartKey until the tailgate opens.
or
▶ If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the handle and let it go again immediately.
Closing the tailgate automatically
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:
- press the 📋 button on the SmartKey.
- press the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
- press the closing or locking button on the tailgate.
- pull the handle on the tailgate.
text_image
STOP P72.20-3102-31Closing and locking button (example: vehicle with KEYLESS-GO)
▶ To close: press closing button ① on the tailgate.
or
Press and hold the 📋 button on the SmartKey until the tailgate closes.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: you can simultaneously close and lock the tailgate.
▶ Press locking button ② on the tailgate. e If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outside the vehicle, the tailgate closes and locks. All the doors must be shut and the SmartKey located in the vicinity of the tailgate.
The tailgate cannot be opened and closed with the SmartKey if there is a SmartKey in the ignition.
If the tailgate touches an object while closing, the closing procedure is interrupted and the tailgate reopens.
If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the cargo compartment, the tailgate will not lock.
Opening/closing automatically from inside
Important safety notes
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:
- press the 📋 button on the SmartKey.
- press the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
- press the closing or locking button on the tailgate.
- pull the handle on the tailgate.
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above a behind the tailgate.
i Tailgate opening dimensions (▷ page 453).
Notes on the reversing feature for the tailgate (▷ page 89).
Opening and closing
text_image
Car interior panel with touchscreen and control buttons, highlighting a device labeled '1' in a circular inset view.the You can open and close the tailgate from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked.
▶ To open: pull remote operating switch ① for the tailgate until the tailgate opens.
▶ To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Press remote operating switch for tailgate ① until the tailgate is closed.
Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate
Important safety notes
! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to open the tailgate fully when setting the opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle outside.
Activating
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate. This is possible in the top half of its opening range, up to approximately 4 in (10 cm) before the stop.
This could be useful, for example, if there is insufficient space above the tailgate.
▶ To open the tailgate: pull the handle on the tailgate.
▶ To stop the opening procedure at the desired position: press the closing button
(▷ page 90) in the tailgate or pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again.
▶ To store the position: press and hold the closing button in the tailgate until you hear a short tone.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The tailgate will now stop in the stored position when opening.
▶ Turn mechanical key ② 90° clockwise.
▶ Push mechanical key ② in the direction of the arrow and open the tailgate.
▶ Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.
When you lock the vehicle (▷ page 88), the cargo compartment is also locked.
Deactivating
▶ Press and hold the closing button (▶ page 90) in the tailgate until you hear two short tones.
Tailgate emergency release
Important safety notes
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate.
i Tailgate opening dimensions (▷ page 453).
If the tailgate can no longer be opened from outside the vehicle, use the emergency release on the inside of the tailgate.
Opening
text_image
① ② P72.26-3104-31▶ Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (▷ page 82).
▶ Insert mechanical key ② into the opening in paneling ①.
Side windows
Important safety notes
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again.
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again.
WARNING
If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Side window reversing feature
The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window during the closing process, the side window opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing a side window.
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers
• over the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing movement
- during resetting
- when closing the side window again manually immediately after automatic reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again.
Opening and closing the side windows
The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch of each door for the corresponding side window.
The switches on the driver's door take precedence.
text_image
① ② ③ ④ P54:25-8775-31① Front left
② Front right
③ Rear right
④ Rear left
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ To open: press the corresponding switch.
▶ To close: pull the corresponding switch.
If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by operating the switch again.
You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine or remove the SmartKey. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened.
The side windows cannot be operated from the rear when the override feature for the side windows is activated ( page 66).
Opening and closing the hinged side windows
Opening and closing
The hinged side windows are operated electrically from the from the driver's seat.
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted control panel and a numbered indicator (1), showing no readable text or symbols.Convenience opening
▶ Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the tip of the SmartKey at the door handle on the driver's door.
▶ Press and hold the 📋 button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are in the desired position. If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in positionroller sunblinds are opened first.
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Press and hold the 📤 button again until
▶ To open fully: press switch ① and release the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
▶ To close fully: pull switch ① and release. panel is in the desired position.
▶ To stop the closing procedure: press switch ① again.
▶ To interrupt convenience opening, release the button.
Both hinged side windows open fully.
If the hinged side windows are blocked when closing, the closing procedure is interrupted and the hinged side windows open again fully.
Convenience closing feature
Important safety notes
Convenience opening
General notes
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start injury. driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used carry out the following functions simultaneously:
- unlock the vehicle
- open the side windows
- open the hinged side windows
- open the sliding sunroof or the panoramasimultaneously:
roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds
- switch on the seat ventilation for the driver's seat
WARNING
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure.
When you lock the vehicle, you can
- close the side windows
- close the hinged side windows
- close the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
i The convenience opening feature can
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the Frotler sunblinds.
only be operated using the SmartKey. Theilt/sliding panel, you can then close the SmartKey must be close to the vehicle. Foller sunblinds.
vehicles without KEYLESS-GO, the
SmartKey must be near the driver's door handle.
Proceed as follows if someone is trapped: Using KEYLESS-GO
- Release the button to interrupt the The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the closing procedure. vehicle. All the doors must be closed.
- Press and hold the button to open.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
- Release the sensor surfaces on the exterior door handle to interrupt the closing procedure.
• To open, pull the same door handle immediately and hold it firmly. The door windows and the sliding sunroof will open for as long as the door handle is held but the door is not opened.
Notes on the automatic reversing feature for:
• the side window (▷ page 94)
• the sliding sunroof (▷ page 99)
Using the SmartKey
The SmartKey must be in the vicinity of the vehicle, on vehicles without KEYLESS-GO the SmartKey must be near the door handle.
text_image
Diagram of a car interior with numbered annotations highlighting a specific component, including a magnified inset showing the eye area.Touch recessed sensor surface ① on the door handle until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface ①.
▶ Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed.
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel:
▶ Touch recessed sensor surface ① on the door handle again until the roller sunblinds the of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close.
▶ To interrupt convenience closing: the release recessed sensor surface ① on the door handle.
▶ Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the tip of the SmartKey at the door handle of the driver's door.
▶ Press and hold the button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
▶ Make sure that all the side windows and sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed.
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel:
Resetting the side windows
▶ Press and hold the 🔒 button again until a side window can no longer be closed fully, the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofyou must reset it.
with power tilt/sliding panel close.
▶ To interrupt convenience closing:
release the button.
▶ Close all the doors.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed. (▷ page 94)
▶ Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:
▶ Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (▷ page 94).
▶ Hold the switch for an additional second.
▶ If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.
Problems with the side windows
WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releas the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. | ▸ Remove the objects.▸ Close the side window. |
| A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. | If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:▸ Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly:▸ Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. |
Sliding sunroof
Important safety notes
Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof.
WARNING
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, body parts in close proximity could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the opening and closing procedures.
If somebody becomes trapped:
- release the switch immediately, or
- during automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be stopped.
WARNING
If children operate the sliding sunroof they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free. The closing process is stopped.
of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged.
Operating the sliding sunroof
Opening and closing
i Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window. The noise will be reduced or eliminated.
text_image
① ② ③ P54.25-8450-31Sliding sunroof reversing feature
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof durin, the closing process, the sliding sunroof open again automatically. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing the sliding sunroof.
Overhead control panel
① To raise
② To open
③ To close/lower
neTurn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Press or pull the ☐ switch in the corresponding direction.
If you press the □ switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by operating the switch again.
When opening and raising the roof, automatic operation is only available if the sliding sunroof is in the closed position.
The sun protection cover automatically opens talong with the sliding sunroof. You can open or close the sun protection cover manually when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
- to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers
• over the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing movement - during resetting
- when closing the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped:
- release the switch immediately, or
- during automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction
You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened.
Resetting
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed fully after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by operating the switch again.
Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move only when the sliding sunroof is closed. smoothly.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
- Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear (▷ page 99).
▶ Keep the □ switch pressed for another second.
▶ Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully opened and closed again (▷ page 99)
▶ If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.
Operating the roller sunblinds for the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Important safety notes
Operating the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
text_image
① ② ③ P54.25-8450-31Overhead control panel
① To raise
② To open
③ To close/lower
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can only be operated when the roller sunblind is open (▷ page 101).
▶ To open and close: turn the SmartKey position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Press or pull the ☐ switch in the corresponding direction.
If you press the □ switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/
WARNING
When opening or closing the roller sunblind, parts of the body could be trapped between the roller sunblind and the frame or sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.
If somebody becomes trapped:
- release the switch immediately, or
- during automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be stopped.
The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior from sunlight. The roller sunblinds can only be opened and closed together when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.
Roller sunblind reversing feature
The roller sunblinds are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing the roller sunblinds.
WARNING
The reversing feature especially does not react to soft, light and thin objects such as small fingers. This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. If somebody becomes trapped:
- release the switch immediately, or
- during automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction
The closing process is stopped.
Opening and closing the roller sunblinds
text_image
① ② ③ P54.25-8450-31Overhead control panel
① To open
② To open
③ To close
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in ignition lock.
▶ Press or pull the □ switch in the corresponding direction.
If you press the □ switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by operating the switch again.
Resetting the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds
! If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds of cannot be fully opened or closed after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
text_image
① ② ③ P54.25-8450-31Overhead control panel
① To open
② To open
③ To close
Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds if the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller sunblinds do not move smoothly.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Pull the □ switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ③ until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.
the
▶ Keep the □ switch pulled for an additional second.
▶ Pull the □ switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ③
e until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.
Keep the □ switch pulled for an additional second.
▶ Make sure that the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel (▷ page 100) and
the roller sunblinds (▷ page 101) can be fully opened again.
▶ If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.
Problems with the sliding sunroof
Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/s panel. In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof.
WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Part of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
If somebody becomes trapped:
- release the switch immediately, or
- during automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction
The closing process is stopped.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, co a qualified specialist workshop.
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. | If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reope again slightly:▶ Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the □ switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and reopens slightly:▶ Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the □ switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. |
Note on the automatic reversing feature of the sliding sunroof (▷ page 99).
Useful information 106
Correct driver's seat position ..... 106
Seats 107
Steering wheel 119
Mirrors 122
Memory function 125
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 28).
Correct driver's seat position
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving:
- adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors
- fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.
text_image
① ② ③ P91/40-3202-31▶ Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (▷ page 107).
▶ Make sure that seat ③ is adjusted properly.
the Electrical seat adjustment (▷ page 108)
When adjusting the seat, make sure that:
may you are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible.
- you are sitting in a normal upright position.
- you can fasten the seat belt properly.
- you have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position.
- you have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported.
- you can depress the pedals properly.
▶ Check whether the head restraint is adjusted properly.
When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint. Also make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible. This will be the case if the head restraint is adjusted correctly (▷ page 109).
▶ Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (▷ page 119).
▶ Make sure that steering wheel ① is adjusted properly.
Adjusting the steering wheel manually (▷ page 119)
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically (▷ page 120)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that:
- you can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.
- you can move your legs freely.
- you can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly.
▶ Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (▷ page 55).
▶ Check whether you have fastened seat belt ② properly (▷ page 57).
The seat belt should:
- fit snugly across your body
- be routed across the middle of your shoulder
- be routed in your pelvic area across the joints
▶ Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a way that you have a good view of road traffic conditions (▷ page 122).
▶ Vehicles with a memory function: save the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings with the memory function (▷ page 125).
Seats
Important safety notes
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving:
- adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors
- fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.
WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you get other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could
accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. hip
WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the and seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no on has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
WARNING
If head restraints are not installed and adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.
WARNING
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
we strongly recommend that children be placed in the rear seat whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized child restraint system or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see the "Children in the vehicle" section.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint.
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information:
- keep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible.
- if the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry ^① He the seats.
- clean the seat covers as recommended, see "Interior care".
- do not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on t seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tool. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible.
- when the seat heating is in operation, not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seat
! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats when resetting
the seats. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
It is not possible to remove the head restraints from the front seats. The rear-compartment head restraints, however, can be removed (▷ page 110).
For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
i Further related subjects:
- Important safety notes on air bags (▷ page 44)
- Cargo compartment enlargement (folding down the rear bench seat) (▷ page 344)
• Securing children in the vehicle (▷ page 60)
Adjusting the seats electrically
text_image
child seat : If as o not ① ⑤ ③ ② ④ P91.10-3619-31① Head restraint height
② Seat cushion angle
③ Seat height
④ Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
⑤ Backrest angle
i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE-SAFE® has been triggered, the front-passenger seat will be moved to a better deposition if it was previously in an unfavorable position.
i You can store the seat settings using the memory function (▷ page 125).
Adjusting the head restraints
General notes
Pay attention to the important safety notes (▷ page 107).
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust
the height and angle of the head restraints tohere are several notches.
the correct position.
Adjusting the head restraints manually
Adjusting the head restraint height
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing a gear shift lever and directional arrow (no text or symbols)▶ To raise: pull the head restraint up to desired position.
▶ To lower: press release catch ① in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position.
Adjusting the fore/aft position of the head restraint
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing a door panel with blue directional arrows and a numbered label (1), no readable text or symbols beyond the label.With this function you can adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of the seat occupant's head.
▶ To adjust forwards: pull the head restra forwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages.
▶ To move backwards: press and hold release button ① and push the head ly restraint backwards.
▶ When the head restraint is in the desired position, release the button and make sure that the head restraint is engaged in position.
i Adjust the head restraint so that the of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible.
Adjusting the head restraints electrically
▶ To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for head restraint adjustment the (▶ page 108) up or down in the direction of the arrow.
Adjusting the luxury head restraints
natural_image
Interior view of a car seat with blue directional arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)▶ To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand side bolster ① into the desired position.
To adjust the fore/aft position of the head restraint: push or pull the head restraint in the direction of arrow ②.
Adjust the head restraint so that the back of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible.
Rear seat head restraints
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint height
text_image
1 P91.16-2910-31▶ Once the head restraint is fully lowered, press release catch ①.
▶ To raise: pull the head restraint up to desired position.
▶ To lower: press release catch ① and p the head restraint down until it is in the desired position.
Removing and installing the rear seat head restraints
text_image
1 P91.16-2911-31▶ To remove: pull the head restraint up the stop.
▶ Press release catch ① and pull the head injury. restraint out of the guides. Always
▶ To re-install: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the le when viewed in the direction of travel.
▶ Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position.
m = 311
ear
Rear seats (second and third row of seats)
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the seat and backrest are not engaged, they can fold forwards, e.g. in the event of sudden braking or an accident.
- This will cause the vehicle occupants to be forced into the seat belt by a seat or backrest which is not engaged. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries.
- A child restraint system would no longer be anchored or positioned correctly and would not be able to perform its required function.
the The seat backrests cannot restrain objects or loads in the cargo compartment.
u ^3 here is an increased risk of injury.
Always make sure that the seat and backrest are engaged as described:
- before traveling with a passenger on a seat with the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
• after you have adjusted the seat
• after the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature has been used
• after the cargo compartment enlargement has been folded forwards
WARNING
The seat does not engage in the entry/exit position. The seat could fold back suddenly, e.g. when accelerating, braking, changing direction suddenly or in the event of an
accident. Persons in the sweep of the seat could become trapped. There is a risk of
Always fold back a seat which has been folded
forwards before you pull away. Make sure that the seat and backrest engage fully.
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Adjusting the backrest angle (second row of seats)
text_image
Diagram showing car seat assembly with numbered instructions and a magnified inset highlighting the left side of the seat.You can adjust the angle of the backrests the second row of seats. There are ten de positions to choose from.
▶ Pull the left or right release lever ② upwards in the direction of the arrow until relevant backrest ① is fully released.
▶ Pull backrest ① forwards in the direction of the arrow and allow it to engage.
▶ To ensure that the backrest has engaged, lean firmly against backrest ①.
Folding the seats up/down (third row of seats)
General notes
! Make sure that there is nothing on the folded-down seats in the cargo compartment. The cargo compartment must be empty for the third row of seat be folded up. The seats or the objects in cargo compartment could otherwise be damaged.
Make sure that the seats in the third row are empty and not blocked before folding them down.
The 3rd row of seats consists of two electrically foldable individual seats, which can be lowered into the cargo compartment. If the seat is not correctly locked in position, the display message: 3rd Seat Row, Right Not Locked appears in the multifunction display.
If you fold the seat back until it engages, the display message disappears.
Pull the backrest firmly to ensure that it is full engaged.
The switches for folding the left or right-hand seats up and down are marked: L for the left-hand seat when viewed in the direction of
travel, R for the right-hand seat when viewed in the direction of travel.
Folding forwards/back in the rear compartment
text_image
P91.12-3678-31Example: R switch
▶ To fold down: fold the right-hand outer seat in the second row of seats forwards (▷ page 113).
▶ Briefly pull switch ①.
The seat folds up.
▶ To stop the automatic folding: briefly switch ① again.
▶ To fold down: briefly press switch ①.
The seat folds down.
▶ To stop the automatic folding: briefly press switch ① again.
Folding down/up in the cargo compartment
text_image
① P91.12-3579-31Example: L switch
▶ To fold down: fold the right-hand outer seat in the second row of seats forwards (▷ page 113).
▶ Briefly press switch ①.
The seat folds up.
▶ To stop the automatic folding: briefly press switch ① again.
▶ To fold down: briefly pull switch ①. The seat folds down.
▶ To stop the automatic folding: briefly pull switch ① again.
Detachable panel (third row of seats)
! If there are objects underneath the seat, the seat can no longer be folded up or down fully. The seat could be damaged. Only drive with the panel completely installed.
text_image
pull P91.22-2202-31If you drop objects underneath the seats in the 3rd row, you can remove the panel in order to reach beneath the seat.
▶ To open: fold the corresponding seat up or down (▷ page 111).
▶ Once the seat is folded halfway up or down, briefly press the button again to stop the automatic movement.
▶ Grasp the panel recess.
▶ Pull the panel in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
▶ To close: fold the corresponding seat up or down (▶ page 111).
▶ Once the seat is folded halfway up or down, briefly press the button again to stop the automatic movement.
▶ Attach the panel using the guide pins.
▶ Push the panel downwards until it engages.
▶ Fold the seat up and down fully to check that the panel is seated correctly.
Folding down the seats in the second row manually One of the outer seats of the 2nd row is in the entry/exit position: the multifunction display
shows, e.g. the 2nd Seat Row, Right Not LockedLocked display message.
If you fold the seat back until it engages, the display message disappears.
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the seat and backrest are not engaged, can fold forwards, e.g. in the event of such braking or an accident.
dePull the backrest firmly to ensure that it is full engaged.
- This will cause the vehicle occupants to be forced into the seat belt by a seat or backrest which is not engaged. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries.
- A child restraint system would no longer be anchored or positioned correctly and would not be able to perform its required function
- The seat backrests cannot restrain objects or loads in the cargo compartment.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Always make sure that the seat and backrest are engaged as described:
- before traveling with a passenger on a seat with the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
• after you have adjusted the seat
• after the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature has been used
• after the cargo compartment enlargement has been folded forwards
WARNING
The seat does not engage in the entry/exit position. The seat could fold back suddenly, e.g. when accelerating, braking, changing direction suddenly or in the event of an accident. Persons in the sweep of the seat could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Always fold back a seat which has been forwards before you pull away. Make sure the seat and backrest engage fully.
Further related subjects:
- Cargo compartment enlargement (folding the second row of seats forwards) (▷ page 344)
- Folding the seats in the third row forwards/back (▷ page 111)
Entry position
text_image
Diagram of a car interior showing labeled parts with arrows indicating movement or change, including numbered annotations.The release handle for the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is located on the entry side on the back of each outer seat in the second row of seats.
▶ Move the head restraint to the lowest position (▷ page 110).
▶ Pull release handle ② in the direction of the arrow to the pressure point and hold it in this position.
The backrest folds forwards.
You have two options for folding the seat down fully.
General notes
To enter or exit the third row of seats: the outer left and right seats of the second row can be folded down.
▶ Pull release handle ② again in the dire of the arrow to the pressure point and it in this position.
or
▶ Pull on release loop ① in the direction the arrow and hold in this position.
▶ Lift up the seat until it folds forwards.
i Vehicles with memory function: The front seats move forwards slightly.
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the side door, seatbelt, and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)Entry position
Exit position
WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
i Further related subjects:
- Important safety notes on air bags (▷ page 44)
• Securing children in the vehicle (▷ page 60)
text_image
① P91.12-3577-31If you wish to exit the third row of seats, fold down the outer seat on the right-hand side as follows.
The release loop for the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is located at the bottom on the back of each outer seat in the second row.
▶ Pull on release loop ① in the direction of the arrow and hold in this position.
The backrest folds forwards.
▶ Pull on release loop ① again in the direction of the arrow and hold in this position.
▶ Lift up the seat until it folds forwards.
i Vehicles with memory function:
The front seats move forwards slightly.
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seat area (no visible text or symbols)Exit position
i Vehicles with memory function:
In order to return the front seat to the saved position, call up the saved seat setting using the memory buttons.
Moving the outer seats back to the normal position (second row of seats)
WARNING
If the seat and backrest are not engaged, they can fold forwards, e.g. in the event of sudden braking or an accident.
- This will cause the vehicle occupants to be forced into the seat belt by a seat or backrest which is not engaged. The seat
belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries.
- A child restraint system would no longer be anchored or positioned correctly and would not be able to perform its required function.
- The seat backrests cannot restrain objects or loads in the cargo compartment.
There is an increased risk of injury. Always make sure that the seat and backrest are engaged as described:
- before traveling with a passenger on a seat with the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
• after you have adjusted the seat
• after the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature has been used
• after the cargo compartment enlargement has been folded forwards
backrest which is not engaged. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries.
- A child restraint system would no longer be anchored or positioned correctly and would not be able to perform its required function.
- The seat backrests cannot restrain objects or loads in the cargo compartment.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Always make sure that the seat and backres are engaged as described:
- before traveling with a passenger on a seat with the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
• after you have adjusted the seat
• after the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature has been used
• after the cargo compartment enlargement has been folded forwards
WARNING
The seat does not engage in the entry/exit position. The seat could fold back suddenly, e.g. when accelerating, braking, changing direction suddenly or in the event of an accident. Persons in the sweep of the seat could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Always fold back a seat which has been folded injury. forwards before you pull away. Make sure that always fold back a seat which has been folded the seat and backrest engage fully. forwards before you pull away. Make sure that
WARNING
The seat does not engage in the entry/exit position. The seat could fold back suddenly, e.g. when accelerating, braking, changing direction suddenly or in the event of an accident. Persons in the sweep of the seat could become trapped. There is a risk of
▶ To lock the seat: fold back the seat until it engages. Gen
▶ Fold back the backrest until it engages.
General notes
To enter or exit the third row of seats: the outer left and right seats of the second row can be folded down electrically.
Folding down the seats in the second row electrically
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the seat and backrest are not engaged, the can fold forwards, e.g. in the event of sudden braking or an accident.
- This will cause the vehicle occupants to be forced into the seat belt by a seat or
One of the outer seats of the second row is in the entry/exit position: the multifunction display shows, e.g. the 2nd Seat Row,
Right Not locked display message.
Hey you fold the seat back until it engages, the display message disappears.
Pull the backrest firmly to ensure that it is full engaged.
i Further related subjects:
- Cargo compartment enlargement (folding the second row of seats forwards) (▷ page 344)
- Folding the seats in the third row forwards/back (▷ page 111)
Folding down the seats
The seats can be folded down electrically if the vehicle is stationary and the respective rear door is open.
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt switch and seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)▶ Press button ①.
The head restraint retracts, the backrest A folds forwards and the seat folds forwards.
The seat can be manually returned to its initial position.(▷ page 113)
Adjusting the multicontour seat
You can set the multicontour seat using COMAND. See the separate COMAND Operating Instructions.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
text_image
1 2 3 4 P91.10-3566-31① To raise the backrest contour
② To soften the backrest contour
③ To lower the backrest contour
④ To harden the backrest contour
You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back.
Switching the seat heating on/off
Activating/deactivating
WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly.
text_image
P54.25-8452-31Driver's and front-passenger seat
text_image
P54.25-8453-31Rear seats
The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes.
The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes.
The system automatically switches off approximately 35 minutes after it is set to level 1.
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ To switch on: press button ① repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.
▶ To switch off: press button ① repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.
If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off.
Problems with the seat heating
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The seat heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. | The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on.▶Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will switch back on automatically. |
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
Activating/deactivating
text_image
P91.30-2504-31The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected.
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ To switch on: press button ① repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set.
▶ To switch off: press button ① repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.
If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off.
You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature (▷ page 95). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level.
Problems with the seat ventilation
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The seat ventilation has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on.
▶ Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation switch back on automatically.
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving:
R adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors
R fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.
WARNING
Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. I leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Adjusting the steering wheel manually
WARNING
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the vehicle is in motion, it could change position unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Before starting off, make sure the steering wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
text_image
Diagram illustrating car steering wheel and dashboard with numbered steps and directional arrows indicating motion① Release lever
② To adjust the steering wheel height
③ To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment)
▶ Push release lever ① down completely.
The steering column is unlocked.
▶ Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position.
▶ Push release lever ① up completely. The steering column is locked.
▶ Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction.
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
text_image
① ② ② ① P46.15-2506-31① To adjust the steering wheel height
② To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment)
The steering wheel can also be adjusted when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock.
i Further related subjects:
- EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (▷ page 121)
- Storing settings (▷ page 125)
Steering wheel heating
Activating/deactivating
text_image
① ③ ② P46.11-2138-31▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow ① or ②.
Indicator lamp ③ lights up or goes out.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the steering wheel heating is deactivated. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off the ignition and open the driver's door, the steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Problems with the steering wheel heating
Problem
The steering wheel heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on.
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on.
▶ Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Important safety notes
WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants - particularly children - could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel.
Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if there is a risk of entrapment by the steerin wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.
Press one of the memory function position buttons. This function is only available on vehicles with memory function.
Press one of the memory function position buttons.
WARNING
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, they can become trapped, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. I leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
WARNING
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier.
You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer (▷ page 285).
Position of the steering wheel when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
The steering wheel swings upwards when you:
• remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
- open the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO position 1
- open the driver's door and the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock
i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper end stop.
Position of the steering wheel for driving
The steering wheel is moved to the last selected position when:
verthe driver's door is closed
- you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock or
- you press the Start/Stop button once one vehicle with KEYLESS-GO
When you close the driver's door with the ignition switched on, the steering wheel is
also automatically moved to the previously set position.
The last position of the steering wheel is stored when you switch off the ignition or when you store the setting with the memo function (▷ page 125).
This means that you could misjudge the distance from road users traveling behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident.
For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder.
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened. This occurs irrespective of the position of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer (▷ page 285).
text_image
1 2 3Mirrors
Rear-view mirror
natural_image
Close-up of a car frontview mirror with a blue circular arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever forwards or back.
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
WARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear.
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Press button ① for the left-hand exterior mirror or button ② for the right-hand exterior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button ③ as long as the indicator lamp is lit.
▶ Press adjustment button ③ up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions.
①The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision.
The exterior mirrors are heated automatically if the rear window defroster is switched on and the outside temperature is low.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out the exterior mirrors fold in automatically as electrically soon as you lock the vehicle from the
text_image
① P88-70-2626-31▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Briefly press button ①. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate.
If you are driving faster than 30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors.
- the exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out position, proceed as follows:
▶ Vehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually.
▶ Vehicles with electrically folding
exterior mirrors: press and hold button for folding the mirrors ① (▷ page 123) until you hear a click and then the mirror engage in position.
The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (▷ page 122).
Setting the exterior mirrors
If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in on-board computer (▷ page 286).
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 in the ignition lock.
▶ Briefly press button ①.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer:
(▷ page 286)
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare mode if the following conditions are met simultaneously:
the ignition is switched on and
- incident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror.
i The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on.
Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking position
Using reverse gear
text_image
1 2 3 4 M 1 2 3 P54.25-8496-31① Button for the driver's side exterior mi
② Button for the front-passenger side exterior mirror
③ Adjustment button
④ Memory button M
You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position.
▶ Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Press button ② for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side.
▶ Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position.
▶ Use adjustment button ③ to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored.
If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving position.
Using the memory button
text_image
tion ① ② ④ M 1 2 3 P54-25-8496-31① Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
② Button for the front-passenger side exterior mirror
③ Adjustment button
Memory button M
You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M ④.
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position u 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ With the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side activated, use adjustment button ③ to adjust the exterior mirror. In the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the curb should be visible.
Press memory button M ④ and one of the arrows on adjustment button ③ within three seconds.
The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move.
▶ If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps.
Calling up a stored parking position setting
text_image
1 2 3 4 M 1 2 3 P54-25-8496-31① Button for the driver's side exterior mir
② Button for the front-passenger side exterior mirror
③ Adjustment button
④ Memory button M
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button ②.
▶ Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger The following settings are stored as a single side moves to the stored parking position memory preset:
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position:
WARNING
When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants - particularly children - could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steer wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped.
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. New leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
With the memory function, you can store to three different settings, e.g. for three different people.
ering
- as soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph driver's side: steering wheel position
- if you press button ① for the exterior mirror on the driver's side mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides
Memory function
Storing settings
WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.
text_image
M 1 2 3 P91.10-3620-3▶ Adjust the seat (▷ page 108).
▶ On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (▷ page 120) and the exterior mirrors (▷ page 122).
▶ Press the M memory button and then press one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed.
The memory function can still be used if the SmartKey has been removed.
Calling up a stored setting
▶ Press the button for storage position 1, 2 or 3. Keep pressing until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position.
The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position buttons.
Useful information 128
Exterior lighting 128
Interior lighting 135
Replacing bulbs 137
Windshield wipers 140
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 28).
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations.
Driving abroad
Conversion to symmetrical low beam
Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low beam in countries in which traffic drives the opposite side of the road from the country where the vehicle is registered. This prevents glare to oncoming traffic. When using symmetrical lights, the edge of the road is lit as widely and as far ahead as normal. Have the headlamps converted at a qualified standing lamps) switches off automatically if specialist workshop as close to the border you: possible before driving in these countries.
Conversion to asymmetrical low beam after returning
Have the headlamps converted back to asymmetrical low-beam headlamps at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible after crossing the border again.
Setting the exterior lighting
Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using:
• the light switch
• the combination switch (▷ page 131)
may the on-board computer (▷ page 283)
Light switch
Operation
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 AUTO 3xE P 6 P82.10-6723-311 ←P Left-hand standing lamps
2 P ≤slant Right-hand standing lamps
3 Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting
4 AUTO Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor
5 D Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
⑥ 0¢ Rear fog lamp
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
▶Turn the light switch to AUTO.
The exterior lighting (except the parking/ standing lamps) switches off automatically if you:
- remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
• open the driver's door with the SmartKey in position 0.
Automatic headlamp mode
WARNING
When the light switch is set to AUTO, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to ☐.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle lighting at all times.
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 AUTO P O1 P2 6 P82.10-6723-311 ←P ≈ Left-hand standing lamps
2 P←→ Right-hand standing lamps
3 Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting
4 AUTO Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor
5 Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
⑥ 0‡ Rear fog lamp
AUTO is the favored light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray):
- SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition loc the parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
- With the engine running: if you have activated the daytime running lamps function via the on-board computer, the daytime running lamps or the low-beam headlamps and parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
▶ To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to AUTO.
Only for Canada:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. The daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.
When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary: if you move the selector lever from a drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after three minutes.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the light switch to ≥00 , the daytime running lamps and parking lamps switch on. If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to D , the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps.
USA only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the daytime running lamps function must be switched on using the on-board computer (▶ page 283).
If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to 200 or 3D , the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running
lamps.
In the USA, the daytime running lamps are deactivated upon delivery from the factory.
Low-beam headlamps
WARNING
When the light switch is set to AUTO, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to D.
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 AUTO P82.10-6723-311 ←P Left-hand standing lamps
2 P←→ Right-hand standing lamps
3 ≥00≤ Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting
4 AUTO Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor
5 Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
⑥ ☐ Rear fog lamp
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps switch on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog.
▶ To switch on the low-beam headlamp turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine.
▶ Turn the light switch to 📄D.
The green 📄D indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
Rear fog lamp
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 AUTO 3xE P T P82.10-6723-311 ←P← Left-hand standing lamps 2 P←→ Right-hand standing lamps
3 Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting
4 AUTO Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor
5 Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
⑥ 0‡ Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear fog lamps.
▶ To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine.
▶ Turn the light switch to 📋 or AUTO.
▶ Press the 0\$ button.
The yellow 0\$ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the 0 button.
The yellow 0\$ indicator lamp in the thin instrument cluster goes out.
Parking lamps
If the battery has been excessively discharged, the parking lamps or standing lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid the continuous use of the 00≤slant parking lamps for several hours. If possible, switch on the P right or the P≤slant left standing lamp.
text_image
AUTO 1 2 3 4 5 6 P82.10-6723-311 ←P ≈ Left-hand standing lamps
2 P→ Right-hand standing lamps
3 ≥00≤ Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting
4 AUTO Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor
5 Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
⑥ 0‡ Rear fog lamp
▶ To switch on: turn the light switch to 2005 .
The green 300 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
Standing lamps
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 AUTO 6 P P82.10-6723-311 ←P Left-hand standing lamps
2 P←→ Right-hand standing lamps
3 Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting
4 AUTO Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor
5 D Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
⑥ 0‡ Rear fog lamp
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
▶ To switch on the standing lamps: the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in position 0.
▶ Turn the light switch to P ≤slant (left-hand side of the vehicle) or P (right-hand side of the vehicle).
Combination switch
Turn signal
text_image
P54.25-8455-31① High-beam headlamps
② Turn signal, right
③ High-beam flasher
④ Turn signal, left
▶ To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ② or ④.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three times.
▶ To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ② or ④.
High-beam headlamps
text_image
① ② ③ ④ P54.25-8455-31① High-beam headlamps
② Turn signal, right
③ High-beam flasher
④ Turn signal, left
▶ To switch on the high-beam headlam turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine.
▶ Turn the light switch to 📋 or AUTO.
▶ Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ①.
In the AUTO position, the high-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running.
The blue ☐ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on.
▶ To switch off the high-beam
headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position.
The blue ☐ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it controls activation of the high-beam headlamps (▷ page 134).
High-beam flasher
text_image
P54.25-8455-31① High-beam headlamps
② Turn signal, right
③ High-beam flasher
④ Turn signal, left
To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the engine.
▶ Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow ③.
Hazard warning lamps
text_image
Is h- P54.25-8561-31▶ To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button ①.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.
▶ To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button ①.
The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if:
- an air bag is deployed or - the vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a standstill
The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a f brake application.
i The hazard warning lamps still operate the ignition is switched off.
Active light function
natural_image
Illustration of a car driving on a curved road with traffic lights, surrounded by trees and a traffic sign (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the steering movements of the front wheels. I this way, relevant areas remain illuminated while driving. This allows you to recognize pedestrians, cyclists and animals.
Active: when the lights are switched on.
Cornering light function
natural_image
Black-and-white illustration of a pedestrian crossing a street with a car and a person walking, no visible text or symbolsThe cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on.
Active:
- if you are driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel - if you are driving at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel
Not active: if you are driving at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turn signal or turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position.
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
General notes
natural_image
Two grayscale illustrations of cars driving on a road, showing light trails and motion blur effects (no text or symbols)You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and high beam automatically. The system recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or traveling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from high beam to low beam.
The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.
The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.
have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this or similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is:
• poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow
- dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off
text_image
s, nd P54.25-8455-31Important safety notes
WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize④ Turn signal, left road users:
• who have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
• who have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
- whose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users that
① High-beam headlamps
② Turn signal, right
③ High-beam flasher
e④ Turn signal, left
▶ To switch on: turn the light switch to AUTO.
▶ Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ①.
The indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approximately 16 mph (25 km/h):
The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users.
If you are driving at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road users have been detected:
The high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users have been detected or the roads are adequately lit:
The high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit.
▶ To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position.
The □A indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 P54.25-8458-31Overhead control panel
① To switch the left-hand front reading lamp on/off
② To switch the front interior lighting on
③ To switch the on/off
④ To switch the front interior lighting/ automatic interior lighting control off
⑤ To switch the right-hand front ads reading lamp on/off
To switch the automatic interior lighting control on
text_image
P82.10-5737-31Headlamps fogged up on the inside Rear overhead control panel (second row of seats)
Certain climatic and physical conditions may ^① cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp.
To switch the reading lamp on/off
natural_image
3D rendered diagram of a rectangular object with a numbered label (1) pointing to its interior, no readable text or symbols present.Rear overhead control panel (third row of seats)
① Reading lamp
Interior lighting control
General notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except for when the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
The color and brightness of the ambient lighting can be adjusted using the on-board computer (▷ page 283).
Automatic interior lighting control
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 P54.25-8458-31Overhead control panel
① To switch the left-hand front reading lamp on/off
② To switch the front interior lighting on
③ To switch the rear interior lighting on/off
④ To switch the front interior lighting/automatic interior lighting control off
⑤ To switch the right-hand front reading lamp on/off
⑥ To switch the automatic interior lighting control on
▶ To switch on: set the switch to center position ⑥.
▶ To switch off: set the switch to the position.
The interior lighting automatically switches on if you:
- unlock the vehicle
- open a door
- remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
The interior light is activated for a short while when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off using the on-board computer (▷ page 284).
Manual interior lighting control
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 P54.25-8458-31Overhead control panel
① To switch the left-hand front reading lamp on/off
② To switch the front interior lighting on
③ To switch the rear interior lighting
g on/off
④ To switch the front interior lighting/ automatic interior lighting control off
⑤ To switch the right-hand front reading lamp on/off
⑥ To switch the automatic interior lighting control on
▶ To switch the front interior lighting set the switch to the ☑ position.
▶ To switch the interior lighting off: set the switch to the position or (if the door is closed) to the center position. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before changing a bulb.
▶ To switch the rear interior lighting off: press the 📄 button.
▶ To switch the reading lamps on/off: press the button.
observed, the lights must be switched on before starting the engine.
WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot onhen operating. If you change a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components.
There is a risk of injury.
doo Allow these components to cool down before changing a bulb.
Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if its glass tube has been scratched.
The bulb may explode if:
- you touch it
- it is hot
- you drop it
Crash-responsive emergency lighting
The interior lighting is activated automatic if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
▶ To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard warning lamp button.
or
▶ Lock and then unlock the vehicle using SmartKey.
Ily you scratch it
Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps designed for that purpose. Only install spare bulbs of the same type and the specified voltage.
Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth.
Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes
DANGER
Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can an electric shock if you remove the cover of the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury. Never touch the parts or the electrical contacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have been on the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Protect bulbs from moisture during operation. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids.
There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs that you cannot replace. Replace only the bulbs listed (▷ page 138). Have the bulbs that of you cannot replace yourself changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
If you require assistance changing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
work If the new bulb still does not light up, consult if a qualified specialist workshop.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs you can recognize this by the following: the cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves from the top to the bottom and back again when you start the engine. For this to be
Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types
You can change the following bulbs. The bulb type can be found in the legend.
text_image
① ② P82.10-6748-31Halogen headlamps
① Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
② High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
natural_image
Close-up of a car's side profile with a numbered annotation pointing to the nose area (no text or symbols on the object itself)Tail lamp
① Brake lamp: P 21 W-L
Changing the front bulbs
Removing and installing the cover in front wheel housing
You must remove the cover from the front wheel housing before you can change the front bulbs.
text_image
ulb ① ② P40.10-6115-31▶ To remove: switch off the lights.
▶ Turn the front wheels inwards.
▶ Remove securing pin ② using a suitable tool.
▶ Slide cover ① up and remove it.
▶ To install: insert cover ① again and slide it down until it engages.
▶ Insert securing pin ②.
Low-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps)
text_image
① ② P82.10-6749-31▶ themove the cover in the front wheel housing (▷ page 138).
▶ Turn housing cover ① counter-clockwise and pull it out.
▶ Turn bulb holder ② counter-clockwise and pull it out.
▶ Take the bulb out of bulb holder ②.
▶ Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ②.
▶ Insert bulb holder ② into the lamp and turn it clockwise.
▶ Align housing cover ① and turn it clockwise until it engages.
▶ Replace the cover in the front wheel housing (▷ page 138).
High-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps)
text_image
P82.10-6750-31▶ Switch off the lights.
▶ Open the hood.
▶ Turn housing cover ① counter-clockwise and pull it out.
▶ Pull lever ③ upwards and remove bulb holder ②.
▶ Take the bulb out of bulb holder ②.
▶ Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ②.
▶ Simultaneously press bulb holder ② and pull lever ③ downwards.
▶ Align housing cover ① and turn it clockwise until it engages.
Changing the rear bulbs
Opening and closing the service flap
text_image
① P68.00-6834-31Left-hand service flap
natural_image
Interior view of a car trunk with a highlighted vent or airflow component (no text or symbols)Right-hand service flap
You must open the service flap in the cargo compartment before you can change the bulbs in the brake lamp.
▶ To open: release service flap ① at the top, e.g. with a screwdriver, and swing it downward in the direction of the arrow.
▶ Right side: remove the first-aid kit beforehand and pull the parcel net down.
▶ To close: reinsert service flap ①.
Brake lamp
natural_image
Interior view of a mechanical device showing internal components and a numbered callout (no text or symbols on the main body)▶ Switch off the lights.
▶ Open the cargo compartment.
▶ Open the service flap (▷ page 139).
▶ Turn bulb holder ① counter-clockwise and remove it.
▶ Take bulb out of bulb holder ①.
▶ Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ①.
▶ Insert bulb holder ① into the lamp and it clockwise.
▶ Close the service flap (▷ page 139).
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers on/off
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place w
the windshield is dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the wind wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the windshield wipers.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windshield becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
text_image
d P54.25-8462-31Combination switch
turn 1 0 Windshield wiper off
2 ⋯ Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity)
3 .... Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity)
4 — Continuous wipe, slow
5 = Continuous wipe, fast
⑥ Single wipe
⑦ To wipe with washer fluid
▶ Switch on the ignition.
▶ Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position.
In the ⋯ or ⋯ position, the appropriate
wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. In the ⋯ position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the ⋯ position, causing
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the windshield wipers to wipe more the windshield after the vehicle has been frequently.
washed in an automatic car wash, wax off the wiper blades are worn, the windshield other residues may be the reason for this will no longer be wiped properly. This could Clean the windshield using washer fluid prevent you from observing the traffic after washing the vehicle in an automatic conditions.
car wash.
Switching the rear window wiper off
text_image
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ P54.25-8463-31Combination switch
① Rear window wiper switch
2 To wipe with washer fluid
3 I To switch on intermittent wiping
40 To switch off intermittent wiping
5 To wipe with washer fluid
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
▶ Turn switch ① on the combination switch to the corresponding position.
When the rear window wiper is switched on, the icon appears in the instrument cluster
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades.
! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield/rear window.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear window.
on/Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield/rear window, the windshield/rear window may be damaged by the force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wipe arm of the wiper.
Changing the windshield wiper blades
Removing the wiper blades
▶ Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
▶ Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.
text_image
① ② on, P82 30-3067-31▶ Firmly press release knob ① and pull wiper blade ② upwards from the wiper arm in the d direction of the arrow.
Installing the wiper blades
natural_image
Close-up of a car's side profile showing a blue arrow pointing to a black cable buckle, with no visible text or symbols.Installing a wiper blade
▶ Place new wiper blade ② onto wiper arm ①.
▶ Hold wiper arm ① and press wiper blade ② in the opposite direction to the arrow until it engages.
▶ Make sure that wiper blade ② is seated correctly.
▶ Position wiper blade ② parallel to wiper arm ①.
▶ Fold wiper arm ① back onto the rear
▶ Position new wiper blade ① in the retainer window. on the wiper arm and slide it into place in the direction of the arrow. The wiper blade audibly engages.
▶ Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly.
▶ Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
Removing a wiper blade
text_image
① ② P82.30-3019-31▶ Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
▶ Fold wiper arm ① away from the rear window until it engages.
▶ Position wiper blade ② at a right angle to wiper arm ①.
▶ Hold wiper arm ① and press wiper blade ② in the direction of the arrow until it releases.
▶ Remove wiper blade ②.
Problems with the windshield wipers
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The windshield wipers are jammed. | Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.▶ For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from ignition lock.or▶ Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open driver's door.▶ Remove the cause of the obstruction.▶ Switch the windshield wipers back on. |
| The windshield wipers fail completely. | The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.▶ Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.▶ Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified special workshop. |
Useful information 146
Overview of climate control systems 146
Operating the climate control systems 154
Setting the air vents 162
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 28).
Overview of climate control system
Important safety notes
Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
- switch off climate control only briefly
- switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly
- switch on the cooling with air dehumidification function
- switch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air.
Climate control can only be operated when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved with the side windows and roof closed.
The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (▷ page 161).
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (▷ page 95).
This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly.
i The integrated filter filters out most particles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet.
It is possible that the residual heat function may be activated automatically an hour after the SmartKey has been removed in order to dry the automatic climate control. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes.
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 MAX MAX COOL A/C REAR AUTO OFF 10 9 8 7 P68.10-4351-31USA only
Front control panel
① To set the temperature, left (▷ page 157)
② To defrost the windshield (▷ page 159)
③ To switch maximum cooling on/off (▷ page 159)
④ To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (▷ page 155)
⑤ To switch the rear window defroster on/off (▷ page 160)
⑥ To set the temperature, right (▷ page 157)
⑦ To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (▷ page 161)
⑧ To set the air distribution (▷ page 158)
⑨ To increase the airflow (▷ page 158)
⑩ To reduce the airflow (▷ page 158)
⑪ To switch climate control on/off (▷ page 154)
⑫ To set climate control to automatic (▷ page 156)
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 AUTO MAX ZONE A/C REST DEAR OFF 10 9 8 7 P83.30-4758-31Canada only
Front control panel
① To set the temperature, left (▷ page 157)
② To defrost the windshield (▷ page 159)
③ To switch the ZONE function on/off (▷ page 159)
④ To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (▷ page 155) or activate/deactivate the residual heating function (▷ page 161)
⑤ To switch the rear window defroster on/off (▷ page 160)
⑥ To set the temperature, right (▷ page 157)
⑦ To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (▷ page 161)
⑧ To set the air distribution (▷ page 158)
⑨ To increase the airflow (▷ page 158)
⑩ To reduce the airflow (▷ page 158)
⑪ To switch climate control on/off (▷ page 154)
⑫ To set climate control to automatic (▷ page 156)
text_image
1 2 3 AUTO OFF 4 P83.50-2187-31Rear control panel
① To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic
② To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off
③ To direct the airflow through the rear air vents
④ To direct the airflow through the footwell vents
Information about using 2-zone automatic climate control
The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of dual-zone automatic climate control.
- Activate climate control using the AUTO and A/C / A/C REST buttons. The indicator lamps in the AUTO and A/C / A/C REST buttons light up.
- Set the temperature to 72^ (22 °C).
- Only use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again.
- Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
- Use the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp above the ☐ button goes out.
- Vehicles with COMAND: if you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for approximately three seconds at the bottom of the screen in the COMAND display. See also the separate COMAND operating instructions. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions.
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 MAX MAX A/C BEAR AUTO MAX MAX A/C ZONE 64 68 72 76 64 60 9 80 OFF AIR FLOW AIR FLOW 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 84
text_image
16 17 18 19 AUTO OFF 2 22 21 20P83.40-4439-31
USA only
Front control panel
① To set the temperature, left (▷ page 157)
② To defrost the windshield (▷ page 159)
③ To switch maximum cooling on/off (▷ page 159)
④ To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (▷ page 155)
⑤ To switch the rear window defroster on/off (▷ page 160)
⑥ To set the temperature, right (▷ page 157)
⑦ To switch the ZONE function on/off (▷ page 159)
⑧ To switch climate control on/off (▷ page 154)
⑨ To set the air distribution (▷ page 158)
⑩ To increase the airflow (▷ page 158)
⑪ To reduce the airflow (▷ page 158)
⑫ Display
⑬ To adjust the climate mode settings (▷ page 157)
⑭ To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (▷ page 161)
⑮ To set climate control to automatic (▷ page 156)
Rear control panel
⑯ To increase the airflow (▷ page 158)
⑰ Setting the temperature (▷ page 157)
⑱ To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic (▷ page 156)
⑲ To direct the airflow through the rear air vents (▷ page 158)
⑳ To direct the airflow through the footwell vents (▷ page 158)
②1 To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off (▷ page 154)
②2 To reduce the airflow (▷ page 158)
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 AUTO 20 22 24 MAX REST A/C BEAR 18 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 OFF ZONE AIR FLOW 88
text_image
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 OFF 24 25 26 27 28 29 30P83.40-4438-31
Canada only
Front control panel
① To set the temperature, left (▷ page 157)
② To defrost the windshield (▷ page 159)
③ To switch the residual heat function on/off (▷ page 161)
④ To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (▷ page 155)
⑤ To switch the rear window defroster on/off (▷ page 160)
⑥ To set the temperature, right (▷ page 157)
⑦ To switch the ZONE function on/off (▷ page 159)
⑧ To switch climate control on/off (▷ page 154)
⑨ To set the air distribution (▷ page 158)
⑩ To increase the airflow (▷ page 158)
⑪ To reduce the airflow (▷ page 158)
⑫ Display
⑬ To adjust the climate mode settings (▷ page 157)
⑭ To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (▷ page 161)
⑮ To set climate control to automatic (▷ page 156)
Rear control panel
⑯ To increase the airflow (▷ page 158)
⑰ To set the temperature (▷ page 157)
⑱ To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic (▷ page 156)
⑲ To direct the airflow through the rear air vents (▷ page 158)
⑳ To direct the airflow through the footwell vents (▷ page 158)
②1 To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off (▷ page 154)
②2 To reduce the airflow (▷ page 158)
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control with additional rear-compartment climate control
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 MAX COOL A/C REST REAR AUTO 68 72 76 64 80 60 84 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 68 72 76 64 60 ZONE REAROFF AIR FLOW OFF
text_image
16 17 18 19 AUTO OFF 22 21 20P83.40-4676-31
USA only
Front control panel
① To set the temperature, left (▷ page 157)
② To defrost the windshield (▷ page 159)
③ To switch maximum cooling on/off (▷ page 159)
④ To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (▷ page 155) or activate/deactivate the residual heating function (▷ page 161)
⑤ To switch the rear window defroster on/off (▷ page 160)
⑥ To set the temperature, right (▷ page 157)
⑦ To switch the ZONE function on/off (▷ page 159)
⑧ To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off (▷ page 154)
⑨ To set the air distribution (▷ page 158)
⑩ To increase the airflow (▷ page 158)
⑪ To reduce the airflow (▷ page 158) or switch off climate control
⑫ Display
⑬ To adjust the climate mode settings (▷ page 157)
⑭ To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (▷ page 161)
⑮ To set climate control to automatic (▷ page 156)
Rear control panel
⑯ To increase the airflow (▷ page 158)
⑰ To set the temperature (▷ page 157)
⑱ To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic (▷ page 156)
⑲ To direct the airflow through the rear air vents (▷ page 158)
⑳ To direct the airflow through the footwell vents (▷ page 158)
②1 To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off (▷ page 154)
②2 To reduce the airflow (▷ page 158)
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 AUTO 20 22 24 MAX ZONE A/C REST BEAR 18 16 13 12 11 10 9 AIR FLOW OFF - 15 14 13 12 11 10 8 7
text_image
16 17 18 19 AUTO OFF 20 21 22 20P83.40-4675-31
Canada only
Front control panel
① To set the temperature, left (▷ page 157)
② To defrost the windshield (▷ page 159)
③ To switch the ZONE function on/off (▷ page 159)
④ To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (▷ page 155) or activate/deactivate the residual heating function (▷ page 161)
⑤ To switch the rear window defroster on/off (▷ page 160)
⑥ To set the temperature, right (▷ page 157)
⑦ To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off
⑧ To switch climate control on/off (▷ page 154)
⑨ To set the air distribution (▷ page 158)
⑩ To increase the airflow (▷ page 158)
⑪ To reduce the airflow (▷ page 158)
⑫ Display
⑬ To adjust the climate mode settings (▷ page 157)
⑭ To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (▷ page 161)
⑮ To set climate control to automatic (▷ page 156)
⑯ To increase the airflow (▷ page 158)
⑰ To set the temperature (▷ page 157)
⑱ To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic (▷ page 156)
⑲ To direct the airflow through the rear air vents (▷ page 158)
⑳ To direct the airflow through the footwell vents (▷ page 158)
②1 To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off (▷ page 154)
②2 To reduce the airflow (▷ page 158)
Information about using 3-zone automatic climate control
The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your automatic climate control.
- Activate climate control using the AUTO and functions.
A/C / A/C _REST buttons. The indicator lamps above the AUTO and A/C / A/C _REST buttons light up.
• In automatic mode, you can also use the
AIR FLOW button to set a climate mode (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is recommended.
- Set the temperature to 72^ (22 °C).
- Only use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again.
- Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.briefly
if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
- Use the ZONE function to adopt the temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment as well. The indicator lamp above the ☐ button goes out.
- Use the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off.
- Vehicles with COMAND: if you change the settings of the climate control system, the
climate status display appears for approximately three seconds at the bottom of the screen in the COMAND display. See also the separate COMAND operating instructions. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions.
Operating the climate control systems
Switching climate control on/off
General notes
When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off climate control only
Switch on climate control primarily using the AUTO button (▷ page 156).
In the rear compartment, you can also switch climate control on and off using the AUTO and OFF buttons.
Activating/deactivating
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
▶ To activate: press the AUTO button.
The indicator lamp in the AUTO button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode.
or
▶ Press the OFF button.
The indicator lamp in the OFF button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored.
▶ To deactivate: press the OFF button. The indicator lamp in the OFF button up.
Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification
General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function briefly.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction.
Activating/deactivating
text_image
x REST A/C REAR S M SE P83.4D-4621-31Example: A/C button
▶ To activate: press the A/C / A/C _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
ght the indicator lamp in the A/C / A/C _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
button lights up.
▶ To deactivate: press the A/C / A/C
button.
The indicator lamp in the A/C / A/C REST button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function has a delayed switch-off feature.
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The indicator lamp in the A/C / A/C _rest button flashes three times or remains off. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function cannot be switched on. | Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due malfunction. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
Setting climate control to automatic Activating/switching
General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function briefly.
In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level.
The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution.
Automatic mode will achieve optimal operation if cooling with air dehumidification is also activated. If necessary, cooling with dehumidification can be deactivated.
In the rear compartment, you can also switch climate control for the rear seats to automate mode using the AUTO button.
text_image
AUTO P83.40-4760-31▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the w ignition lock (▷ page 167).
▶ Set the desired temperature.
▶ To activate: press the AUTO button.
The indicator lamp in the AUTO button lights air up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated.
To switch to manual mode: press the
atic button.
or
▶ Press the 🎨 or 🎨 button.
The indicator lamp in the AUTO button goes out.
3-zone automatic climate control: when automatic mode is activated, you can select a climate mode (▷ page 157).
Adjusting the climate mode settings 3-zone automatic climate control
You can select the following climate mode settings in automatic mode:
FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly cooler
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
DIFFUSE I ow airflow that is set slightly warmer and with less draft
text_image
24 26 28 TO MAX ZONE FOCUS MEDIUM DIFFUSE AIR FLOW P83.40-4762-31▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
▶ Press the AUTO button.
▶ Press the AIR FLOW button repeatedly until the desired climate mode appears in the display.
Setting the temperature
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
▶ To increase/reduce: turn control ① or ⑥ clockwise or counter-clockwise (▷ page 147).
Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 °F (22 °C).
natural_image
Top-down architectural rendering of four cars in a row, showing front and side views with no visible text or symbols.Automatic climate control zones
You can select different temperature settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the rear compartment.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
▶ To increase/reduce the temperature in the front: turn control ① or ⑥ clockwise or counter-clockwise (▷ page 150). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 °F (22 °C).
To increase/reduce the temperature in the rear compartment using the front control panel: press the ☐zone button. The indicator lamp in the ☐zone button goes out.
▶ Turn control ① clockwise or counterclockwise (▷ page 150).
Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 °F (22 °C). The temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the rear compartment and the front-passenger side.
▶ To increase/decrease the rear compartment temperature using the rear control panel: turn control ⑰ clockwise or counter-clockwise on the rear control panel (▷ page 150).
Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 °F (22 °C).
Setting the air distribution
Air distribution settings
Front control panel
Directs the airflow through the center vents
Directs air through the footwell air vents
Directs the airflow through the center and footwell vents
Directs air through the defroster vents
Directs the airflow through the defroster and center vents (Canada only)
Directs air through the defroster and footwell vents
Directs the airflow through the defroster, center and footwell air vent (Canada only)
Rear control panel
Directs the airflow through the rear center and rear side air vents
Directs air through the footwell air vents
i Using the rear control panel, you can also activate both air distribution positions simultaneously. In order to do this, press both air distribution buttons. The air is then routed through all rear air vents.
Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side air vents. The side air vents can only be closed when the controls on the side air vents are turned downwards.
Adjusting
text_image
A/C REAR 20 18 16 P83.40-4624-3T▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
▶ Press the 📋 button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display.
tSetting the airflow
text_image
MAX REST A/C FOCUS MEDIUM DIFFUSE AIR FLOW Iso P83.40-4625-31▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
To increase: press the 🎩 button.
▶ To reduce: press the ☑ button.
You can use 3-zone automatic climate control to set the airflow in the rear compartment separately.
Switching the ZONE function on/off
text_image
20 22 24 ZONE 26 OFF 18 16 28 °C P83.40-4623-31▶ To switch on: press the ☐zone button. The indicator lamp above the ☐zone button lights up.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side.
3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side not adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment.
▶ To switch off: press the ☐zone button. The indicator lamp above the ☐zone button or goes out.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side.
3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
▶ To activate: press the MAX button.
The indicator lamp in the MAX button lights up.
The climate control system switches to the following functions:
- high airflow
- high temperature
• air distribution to the windshield and front side windows
• air-recirculation mode off
To deactivate: press the MAX button.
The indicator lamp in the MAX button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated.
or
Press the AUTO button.
The indicator lamp in the MAX button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode.
▶ Turn controls ① or ⑥ clockwise or counter-clockwise:
Dual-zone automatic climate control (▷ page 147)
3-zone automatic climate control (▷ page 150)
or
▶ Press the 🎨 or 🌘 button.
Defrosting the windshield
You can use this function to defrost the windshield or to defrost the inside of the windshield and the side windows.
Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function as soon as the windshield is clear again.
MAX COOL maximum cooling
The MAX COOL function is only available in vehicles for the USA.
text_image
MAX MAX COOL A/C FOCUS MEDIUM DIFFUSE AIR FLOW P23.40-4620-31MAX COOL is only operational when the engine is running.
▶ To activate: press the MAX COOL button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up the rear window defroster has a high current
▶ To activate: press off-road button ☐ MAX COOL again.
The indicator lamp goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate control switches to the following functions:
• maximum cooling
• maximum airflow
• air-recirculation mode on
text_image
Rear window defroster Activating/deactivating A/C REAR 20 18 16 P33.40-4622-31The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
▶ Press the REAR button.
The indicator lamp in the REAR button lights up or goes out.
Defrosting the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
▶ Activate the A/C / A/C REST cooling with air dehumidification function.
▶ Activate automatic mode AUTO.
▶ If the windows continue to fog up, activate the "windshield defrosting" function (▷ page 159).
You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outside
▶ Press the button repeatedly until the or symbol appears in the display.
You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again.
Problems with the rear window defroster
Problem
The rear window defroster has deactivated prematurely or cannot be activated.
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
▶ Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster can be activated again.
Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode
General notes
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated.
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can fog up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows from fogging up.
Activating/deactivating
text_image
AUTO 18 20 22 24 26 28 P83.40-4261-31 AIR FOCU MEDIUM DIFFUSThe operation of air-recirculation mode is the same for all control panels.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
▶ To activate: press the button. The indicator lamp in the button up.
i In the event of high pollution levels (3-zone automatic climate control only) or a
high outside temperatures, air-recirculation mode is automatically activated. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the button is not lit.
Outside air is added after about 30 minutes.
▶ To deactivate: press the 📄 button.
The indicator lamp in the 📄 button goes out.
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically:
• after approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 41 °F (5 °C)
• after approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated
• after approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 41 °F (5 °C) if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated
Activating/deactivating the residual heat function
General notes
The residual heat function is only available on vehicles for Canada.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating the
stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutesafter at
the engine has been switched off. The heating outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to time depends on the set interior temperature another area of the vehicle interior.
Switching on/off
text_image
MAX REST A/C FOCUS MEDIUM DIFFUSE AIR FLOW P39-40-4619-31▶ To activate: press the REST / A/C button. The indicator lamp in the REST / A/C button lights up.
i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting.
If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed.
▶ To deactivate: press the REST / A/C
button.
The indicator lamp in the REST / A/C
button goes out.
Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
• after approximately 30 minutes
- when the ignition is switched on
- if the battery voltage drops
Setting the air vents
Important safety notes
WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes:
- keep the air inlet grille on the hood and in the engine compartment on the front-passenger side free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves.
- never cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior.
For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust the sliders of the air vents to the center position.
Setting the center air vents
text_image
① ② ③ ④ P83.40-4441-31① Center air vent, left
② Center air vent, right
③ Center vent thumbwheel, right
④ Center vent thumbwheel, left
▶ To open/close: turn thumbwheels ③ and ④ to the right or left.
Setting the side air vents
text_image
Car interior diagram with numbered components and directional arrows indicating movement or control① Side window defroster vent
② Side air vent
③ Control for side air vent
▶ To open/close: turn thumbwheel ③ up down.
Setting the glove box air vent
! Close the air vent when heating the vehicle.
At high outside temperatures, open the vent and activate the "cooling with air dehumidification" function. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove box could be damaged.
▶ To open/close: turn thumbwheel ① clockwise or counter-clockwise.
Setting the rear-compartment air vents
Setting the center vents in the rear compartment
text_image
1 2 3 4 P83.40-4443-31Example: center vents with rear control panel ① Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
② Rear-compartment air vent, right
③ Rear control panel
④ Rear-compartment air vent, left
▶ To open/close: turn thumbwheel ① up or down.
text_image
1 2 P83.40-4383-31① Air vent thumbwheel
② Air vent
When automatic climate control is activated the glove box can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on the airflow and air distribution settings.
Setting the rear air vent
Second row of seats
text_image
① ② P83.00-2341-31① Rear air vent
② Thumbwheel for rear air vent
▶ To open/close: turn thumbwheel ② to the left or right.
text_image
① ② P83.00-2360-31B-pillar air vent in the headliner
① Rear air vent
② Thumbwheel for rear air vent
▶ To open/close: turn thumbwheel ② up or down.
Third row of seats
text_image
① ② P83.00:2356-31B-pillar air vent in the headliner
① Rear air vent
② Thumbwheel for rear air vent
▶ To open/close: turn thumbwheel ② up or down.
Useful information 166
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 166
Driving 166
Automatic transmission 173
Refueling 182
Parking 188
Driving tips 191
Driving systems 201
Towing a trailer 263
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 28).
Notes on breaking-in a new vehic
Important safety notes
The sensor system of some driving and driving safety systems adjusts automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving.
Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more you look after the engine when it new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future.
- You should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles (1500 km).
- Avoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this period.
-
Change gear in good time, before the tachometer needle is 23 of the way to the red area of the tachometer.
-
Do not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle.
- Try to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown).
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed.
Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehicles:
- Do not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).
- Only allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
- Change gear in good time.
- Ideally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), drive in program C.
ally i You should also observe these notes on after breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced.
i Always observe the respective speed limits.
Driving
important safety notes
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is ^IS jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.
WARNING
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.:
• shoes with thick soles
• shoes with high heels
- slippers
There is a risk of an accident.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals.
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
WARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake
• overheat and cause a fire
- lose its hold function.
There is a risk of fire and an accident. For the parking brake fully before driving off.
operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold.
SmartKey positions
SmartKey
text_image
0 1 2 3 P15-10-2403-31To remove the SmartKey
1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windshield wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position
3 To start the engine
The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started.
KEYLESS-GO
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature.
Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train.
! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temperatures below 68 °F (+20 °C), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect engine and maintain smooth engine
General notes
- Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:
- with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey
- with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil
- inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can impair the functionality of the KEYLESS-GO key.
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the temperature-controlled cup holder
the (▷ page 349). Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be recognized.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with a SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-
GO function and a detachable Start/Stop button.
If Start/Stop button ① has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey being removed from the ignition.
The Start/Stop button must be inserted in ignition lock and the SmartKey with the integrated KEYLESS-GO function must be in the vehicle.
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after
Pressing the Start/Stop button several timestarting the engine or lights up while driving, in succession corresponds to the different see (▷ page 326).
key positions in the ignition lock. This is only insert Start/Stop button ① into ignition the case if you are not depressing the brake lock ②. pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately.
The Start/Stop button can be removed from the ignition lock. Then, you can insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
When you insert Start/Stop button ① into ignition lock ②, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use Start/Stop button ①.
You do not have to remove the Start/S button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
• the vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop button and
• electrically powered equipment can be operated.
▶ To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button ① once.
The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example.
i The power supply is switched off again if:
• the driver's door is opened and
- you press Start/Stop button ① twice when in this position.
▶ To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button ① twice.
The ignition is switched on.
The engine can be turned off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and hold the Start/Stop button for approximately three seconds.
The power supply is switched off again if:
• the driver's door is opened and
- you press Start/Stop button ① once when in this position.
Key positions with KEYLESS-GO
text_image
Car dashboard interface with labeled control panel and indicator lights, showing a highlighted component in panel 1.
text_image
ENGINE START STOP ③ ④ P15-10-2406-31Start/Stop button
③ USA only
④ Canada only
Starting the engine
Important safety notes
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle they could:
- open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
• get out and disrupt traffic.
• operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:
- release the parking brake.
- shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
- Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. No leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
WARNING
Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system.
i Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the
catalytic converter is preheated for up 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound the engine may change during this time.
Automatic transmission
▶Shift the transmission to position P (▷ page 173).
The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P (▷ page 173).
You can also start the engine when the transmission is in position N.
Starting procedure with the SmartKey
▶ To start a gasoline engine: turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock (▶ page 167) and release it as soon as the engine is running.
▶ To start a diesel engine: turn the verSmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
The 700 preglow indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
▶ When the ☐ preglow indicator lamp goes out, turn the SmartKey to position 3 (▷ page 167) and release it as soon as the engine is running.
You can start the engine without preglow if the engine is warm.
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine
▶ Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
▶ To start a gasoline engine: press the Start/Stop button (▷ page 167) once. The engine starts.
▶ To start a diesel engine: press the Sta Stop button (▷ page 167) once.
Preglow is activated and the engine starts.
The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle without inserting the
SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
depress the brake pedal, you can move the DIRECT SELECT lever but the parking lock remains engaged.
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.
You can open the doors from the inside at any time.
You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature (▷ page 284).
i Upshifts take place at higher engine / speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly.
Pulling away with a trailer
Pulling away
Automatic transmission
WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.
▶ Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
▶ Shift the transmission to position D or (▷ page 173).
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶ Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. The electric parking brake (▷ page 189) is automatically released.
The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
text_image
1 P42.20-2600-31To ensure that you do not roll backwards when pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the electric parking brake.
▶ Press and hold handle ①.
R The electric parking brake continues to brake and prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards.
The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada is only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster remains on.
da ▶ Depress the accelerator pedal.
▶ As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination is held by the driving force of the engine, release lever ①.
The electric parking brake is released.
i It is only possible to shift the transmission
from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock released. If you do not
The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Hill start assist
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist.
▶ Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
The vehicle is then held for about a second.
▶ Pull away.
Hill start assist is not active if:
- you are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient.
- the transmission is in position N.
• the electric parking brake is applied. - ESP® is malfunctioning.
| Problems with the engine | |
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. | There is a malfunction in the engine electronics.There is a malfunction in the fuel supply.Try to start the engine again (▷ page 169). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery.If the engine does not start after several attempts:Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. | The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged.Jump-start the vehicle (▷ page 395).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes.Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:Consult a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. | There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system.Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. |
| The coolant temperature gauge shows a value above 248 °F (120 °C). | The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down.Check the coolant level (▷ page 373). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary. |
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. The is a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.
DIRECT SELECT lever
Overview of transmission positions
text_image
R N P N D P27.60-3465-31P Park position with parking lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column.
i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current
transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display (▷ page 173) in the multifunction display.
Transmission position and drive program display
The! If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you R, should pull away carefully to check whether do the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and, in AMG vehicles, drive program C or S.
text_image
R N P D M ① ② P54 32-9929-31Transmission position and drive program display
① Transmission position display
② Drive program display
The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display.
The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can change using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
Engaging park position P
! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle is moving, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. The automatic transmission could otherwise be damaged.
text_image
R N P N D P27.60-3465-31P Park position with parking lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive
▶ Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P.
i The automatic transmission shifts into park position P automatically:
- if you open the driver's door while the vehicle is stationary in transmission position D or R
- if you open the door while traveling at very low speeds in transmission position D or R
Engaging park position P automatically
Park position P is automatically engaged if:
- you switch off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey.
- you switch off the engine using the State Stop button and open one of the front doors.
-
the HOLD (▷ page 216) or DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 203) function brake your vehicle until it is stationary and at least of the following conditions is fulfilled:
-
there is a system malfunction.
- the vehicle is on a steep uphill or do gradient. The electric parking brake is then also applied.
Engaging reverse gear R
! Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary.
▶ When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal.
▶ Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance.
Shifting to neutral N
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could:
- open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
• get out and disrupt traffic.
• operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:
- release the parking brake.
- shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
- Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.
When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal.
▶ Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.
If the engine has been switched off, the one automatic transmission automatically shifts to N.
If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system, observe the following notes:
Using the SmartKey:
- Make sure that the ignition is switched
- When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
- Shift to neutral N.
- Release the brake pedal.
- If the electric parking brake is engaged, release it.
- Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Using KEYLESS-GO:
- Make sure that the ignition is switched on.
- When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
- Engage park position P.
- Release the brake pedal.
- Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.
- Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
- Switch on the ignition.
- Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
- Shift to neutral N.
- Release the brake pedal.
- If the electric parking brake is engaged, release it.
- Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Transmission positions
P
Park position
Do not shift the transmission into position P (▷ page 188) unless the vehicle is stationary. The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. Always apply the electronic parking brake in addition to the parking lock in order to secure the vehicle.
If the vehicle electronics are malfunctioning, the transmission may be locked in position P. Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
The automatic transmission shifts to P automatically if you:
- remove the SmartKey
- switch off the engine when in R or D and open one of the front doors
R
Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary.
Engaging drive position D
▶ When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal.
▶ Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.
N
Neutral
Do not shift the transmission to while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged.
No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it.
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: only shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in date of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
If you switch off the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the automatic transmission shifts to neutral N automatically.
! Rolling in neutral N can damage the drive train.
D
Drive
The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available.
Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This automatic gearshifting behavior is determined by:
• the position of the accelerator pedal
- the road speed
Driving tips
N Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
▶ Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed.
▶ Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Rocking the vehicle free
Shifting the transmission repeatedly between gears D and R may help to free the vehicle if it has become stuck in slush or snow. The vehicle's engine management system limits the speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) when shifting back and forth. To shift back and forth between transmission positions D and R, move the DIRECT SELECT selector lever up and down past the point of resistance.
Towing a trailer
▶ Drive in the middle of the engine speed range on uphill gradients.
▶ Depending on the uphill or downhill gradient, use left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (▷ page 177) to select a lower gear, even if cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS are activated.
Program selector button
General notes
text_image
1 M PS4.25-8595-31Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package
▶ Briefly press program selector button ①. The letter M appears in the multifunction display. The manual drive program M is activated.
text_image
1 M C S P54.26-8762-31AMG vehicles
▶ Press program selector button ① repeatedly until the letter for the desired gearshift program appears in the multifunction display.
The program selector button allows you to choose between different driving characteristics.
The permanent drive program M is available on the following vehicles:
- Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package - AMG vehicles
Further information about permanent drive program M (▷ page 179).
As well as this permanent drive program M, you can also activate temporary drive program M (▷ page 178).
i AMG vehicles: the automatic transmission switches to automatic drive program C each time the engine is started. i Drive program M is not saved after the engine has been switched off. If required you must select the drive program again after starting the engine.
Drive program on vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package
M Manual Permanent manual gearshifting
Drive programs on AMG vehicles
C Controlled Comfortable, economical Efficiency driving
S Sport Sporty driving style
M Manual Permanent manual gearshifting
For further information on the automatic drive program, see (▷ page 178).
Steering wheel paddle shifters
text_image
Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car dashboard with labeled parts and timeometer readingsIn the manual drive program, you can change gears manually using steering wheel paddle shifters ① and ②.
Further information about permanent drive program M (▷ page 179).
Further information about temporary drive program M (▷ page 178).
You can only change gear with the steering wheel paddle shifters when the transmission is in position D.
Automatic drive program (AMG vehicles)
Automatic drive programs C and S
Drive program C is characterized by the following:
• comfort-oriented engine and transmission settings
- optimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner
- the vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully
- increased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example
- the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin
Drive program S is characterized by the following:
• sporty engine and transmission settings
- the automatic transmission shifting up later
- the fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points
Manual drive program M
General notes
In this drive program, you can briefly change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be in position D.
All vehicles (except AMG vehicles and vehicles with the
ON&OFFROAD package): you can activate manual drive program M using the steering wheel paddle shifters.
AMG vehicles: you can activate manual drive program M in automatic drive programs C and S.
Vehicles with the
ON&OFFROAD package: if manual drive program M is deactivated using the program selector button, you can activate manual drive program M using the steering wheel paddle shifters.
i As well as temporary drive program M, you can also activate permanent drive program M (▷ page 177).
Further information about permanent drive program M (▷ page 179).
Activating
▶ Shift the transmission to position D.
▶ Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle shifter (▷ page 177).
Manual drive program M is temporarily activated. The selected gear and M appear in the multifunction display.
Shifting gears
If you pull on the left or right steering wheel paddle shifter, the automatic transmission switches to manual drive program M for a limited amount of time. Depending on which paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear down or up, if permitted.
▶ To shift up: pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (▷ page 177).
The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear.
i If the maximum engine speed on the
ge currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic
transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage.
▶ To shift down: pull on the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (▷ page 177).
The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear.
If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down.
i Automatic down shifting occurs when coasting.
Shift recommendation
text_image
R N P 1 ↑2 ① ② P54.33-26.32-31The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display.
▶ Shift to recommended gear ② according to gearshift recommendation ① when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster.
Deactivating
If you have activated manual drive program M, it will remain active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain.
If manual drive program M has been deactivated, the automatic transmission shifts into the automatic drive program that was last selected. You can also deactivate manual drive program M yourself:
▶ Pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter and hold it in place (▷ page 177).
toor
▶ Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch transmission position.
or
▶ AMG vehicles: use the program selector button to change the drive program (▷ page 177).
Manual drive program M is deactivated. The automatic transmission switches into the automatic drive program that was last selected, i.e. E or S.
or
▶ Vehicles with the
ON&OFFROAD package: use the selector wheel to switch to the on-road program (▷ page 253) or the off-road program (▷ page 258).
Manual drive program
General information
In this drive program, you can permanently change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be in position D.
i As well as this permanent drive program int M, you can also activate temporary drive program M (▷ page 178).
Switching on the manual drive program
In manual drive program M, you can change gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters if the transmission is in position D. You can see the currently selected drive program and which gear is engaged in the multifunction display.
▶ AMG vehicles: press the program selector button (▷ page 177) until M appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package: press the program selector button (▷ page 177).
The letter M appears in the multifunction display.
Shifting up (all vehicles except AMG vehicles)
text_image
R N P ① ② ① ↑2 P54.33-2632-31▶ If corresponding gearshift recommendation ① appears in the multifunction display on the instrument cluster, pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (▷ page 177). The automatic transmission shifts to recommended gear ②.
Shifting up (AMG vehicles)
! In manual drive program M, the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not read the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage.
text_image
or the 75 mph UP 183°F 208°F 179°F mph 200= 3 954.33-2766-31① Gear indicator
② Upshift indicator
Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the multifunction display.
▶ If the color in the speedometer multifunction display changes to red and the UP display message is shown, shift up a gear.
Downshifting
▶ Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (▷ page 177).
The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear.
Maximum acceleration
▶ Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until the transmission selects the optimum gear according to the speed.
If you slow down or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission automatically shifts down.
Kickdown
You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual drive program M.
▶ Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed.
▶ Shift back up once the desired speed is reached.
All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): if you apply full throttle, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is
reached. This prevents the engine from overrevving.
i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to use kickdown in manual drive program M.
Switching off the manual drive program
▶ Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD
package: press the program selector button (▷ page 177).
The M message in the multifunction display goes out.
▶ AMG vehicles: press the program selector button (▷ page 177) repeatedly until C or S appears in the multifunction display.
Problems with the transmission
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The transmission has problems shifting gear. | The transmission is losing oil.▶ Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
| The acceleration ability is deteriorating.The transmission no longer changes gear. | The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift intosecondgear and reverse gearStop the vehicle.Shift the transmission to positionP.Switch off the engine.Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.Shift the transmission to positionDorR.IfDis selected, the transmission shifts intosecondgear; ifRis selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
Transfer case
! Performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system or transfer case could otherwise damaged. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a performance test.
! Because ESP® is an automatic system, the engine and ignition must be switched off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start Stop button in position 0 or 1) when the electric parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer (maximum 10 seconds).
Braking triggered automatically by ESP may seriously damage the brake system.
Refueling
Important safety notes
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling.
WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing with either the front or the rear axle raised and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel as doing so will damage the transmission.vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
This section is only valid for vehicles with 4-wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always transmitted to both axles.
If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following:
- Wash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water.
- If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.
- If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting.
- Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel.
WARNING
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged.
WARNING
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flas point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, exhaust system components could overheat without being noticed. There is a risk of fire.
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.
! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection system could be blocked by particles from the fuel can.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. For further information on fuel and fuel quality (▷ page 446).
You will find further information on fuel and fuel quality in the printed Operator's Manual under "Technical data".
Refueling
General information
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with
a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not ( page 182).
switch on the ignition if you accidentally The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the automatically when you open or close the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-amounts of the wrong fuel could result in GO.
damage to the fuel system and the engine. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed. The repair costs are high. Notify a qualified in the instrument cluster. The arrow specialist workshop and have the fuel tank next to the filling pump indicates the side of and fuel lines drained completely. the vehicle.
Opening the fuel filler flap
text_image
Diagram showing car door panel and close-up of internal components with numbered annotations① To open the fuel filler flap
② To insert the fuel filler cap
③ Fuel type to be used
④ Tire pressure table
▶ Switch the engine off.
▶ Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
▶ KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
This corresponds to key position 0: "key removed".
The driver's door can be closed again.
▶ Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow ①.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
▶ Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise and remove it.
▶ Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of filler flap ②.
▶ Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel.
▶ Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
i Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck is designed for refueling at diesel filling pumps.
Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out.
Closing the fuel filler flap
▶ Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.
▶ Close the fuel filler flap.
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle.
If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the reserve fuel warning lamp flashes.
In addition, the ☐ Check Engine warning lamp may light up (▷ page 333).
A message appears in the multifunction display (▷ page 308).
For further information on warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, see (▷ page 333).
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank
This section provides descriptions of and solutions to safety-relevant problems.
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. | The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.⚠ WARNINGRisk of explosion or fire.Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it immediately (▷ page 167).Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The engine does not start. | The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely dry.Refuel the vehicle with at least 5.3 US qt (5 liters) of diesel.Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (▷ page 167).Start the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs smoothly.If the engine does not start:Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds (▷ page 167).Start the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs smoothly.If the engine does not start after three attempts:Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. | The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey battery is discharged.Unlock the vehicle (▷ page 80).orUnlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (▷ page 82). |
| The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only)
Important notes on use
To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment must be operated with the reducing agent DEF. Adding DEF is one of tasks performed during maintenance. Under normal operating conditions, a tank of DEF lasts until the next service due date.
When the supply of DEF is almost used up the Check Additive See Operator's Manual Manual message is shown in the multifunction display.
If you drive the vehicle faster than 10 mph (16 km/h), the Check Additive See Operator's Manual message goes out after approximately one minute.
When the supply of DEF is down to a reserve of approximately 1 gal (3.8 l) the RefillRefi
AdBlue/DEF See Operator's Manual message is shown in the multifunction display.
When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, Remaining Starts: 16 message is shown in the multifunction display.
If the Refill AdBlue/DEF No Start in XXXX km message is shown in the multifunction display, you can still drive the vehicle over the distance shown. If DEF is
refilled, you will subsequently be unable to start the engine. If the Refill AdBlue/DEF Eng. Start Not Poss message appears in the multifunction display and the engine does not start, you must add DEF.
▶ Add at least 1 gal (3.8 l) of DEF.
▶ Switch on the ignition for at least 60 seconds.
▶ Start the engine.
i Have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified specialist workshop.
Use the special DEF refill bottle when adding without delay.
DEF between maintenance intervals. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center with any questions or, if necessary, contact Roadside Assistance (▷ page 25).
If the outside temperature is below 12 °F (-11 °C) it may be difficult to top up. If DEF is frozen and there is an active warning indicator, it may not be possible to add DEF. Park the vehicle in a warmer place, e.g. in a garage, until DEF has become fluid again. It will then be possible to add DEF again. Alternatively, have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified specialist workshop.
Further information about BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment and DEF is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Important safety notes on the refilling procedure
DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:
• not poisonous
• colorless and odorless
- not flammable
When you open the DEF container, small amounts of ammonia vapor may be released.
Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous membranes and to the eyes. You may experience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are possible.
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank only in well-ventilated areas.
DEF must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and must not be swallowed. Keep DEF away from children.
If you or other persons come into contact with DEF, observe the following:
- Rinse DEF from your skin immediately with soap and water.
- If DEF comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance
If DEF has been swallowed, rinse your mouth out immediately. Drink plenty of
water. Seek medical assistance without delay.
- Change out of clothing contaminated with DEF immediately.
! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO 22241. Do not mix any additives with DEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. This may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system.
! The vehicle must be parked on level ground to fill the DEF tank. The DEF tank can only be filled as intended with the vehicle parked on a level surface. This avoids false level readings. Filling the tank is not permitted if the vehicle is not park on a level surface. There is a danger of overfilling, which could result in damage to components of the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment.
! Rinse surfaces that have come into contact with DEF immediately with water remove DEF using a damp cloth and cold water. If the DEF has already crystallized, use a sponge and cold water to clean it. residues crystallize after time and contaminate the affected surfaces.
! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the fuel tank. If DEF is added to the fuel tank, this can lead to engine damage.
For further information on DEF, see (▷ page 448).
You will find further information on DEF in printed Operator's Manual under "Technical data".
Opening the DEF filler cap
text_image
ch This ① ② P47.10-2612-31The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you open or close the vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLES
▶ Switch the ignition off.
▶ Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow ①. The fuel filler flap swings up.
▶Turn blue DEF filler cap ② counter-clockwise and remove it.
DEF filler cap ② is secured with a plastic strip. DEF
DEF refill bottle
!beOnly screw on the DEF refill bottle hand-totight. It could otherwise be damaged.
text_image
the ① P47.10-2613-31▶ Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refill bottle ①.
▶ Place DEF refill bottle ① on the filler neck as shown and screw it on clockwise until hand-tight.
▶ Press DEF refill bottle ① towards the fillerto be shown in the multifunction display, neck. you must add more DEF. The DEF tank is filled. This may take up to one minute.
When DEF refill bottle ① is no longer pressed, filling stops and the bottle may taken off again after being only partially emptied.
▶ Release DEF refill bottle ①.
▶ Turn DEF refill bottle ① counter-clockwise and remove it.
▶ Screw the protective cap onto DEF refill bottle ① again.
DEF refill bottles can be obtained at many stations or at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Refill bottles without a threaded cap do not provide overfill protection. DEF may leak if overfilled. Mercedes Benz offers special refill bottles with a threaded seal. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Closing the DEF filler cap
text_image
Diagram showing two car door panel installation steps with numbered arrows and a close-up of the internal component.▶ Mount DEF filler cap ② on the filler neck and turn it clockwise.
▶ To close the fuel filler flap, press it in the direction of arrow ①.
▶ Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h). The Check Additive See Operator's Manual Manual message goes out after approximately one minute.
i If the Check Additive See Operator's Manual message continues
Parking
be Important safety notes
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields.
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
- release the parking brake.
- shift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P.
- start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against automatic transmission remains in N even rolling away unintentionally: if a door is opened.
- the electric parking brake must be applied.
- the transmission must be in position P and the SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock.
- the front wheels must be turned towards the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.
- the empty vehicle must be secured at the front axle with a wheel chock or similar, example, on uphill or downhill gradients.
- a laden vehicle must also be secured at rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, example, on uphill or downhill gradients.
Switching off the engine
Important safety notes
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.
Using the SmartKey
▶ Apply the electric parking brake.
▶ Shift the transmission to position P.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
If you turn off the engine with the SmartKey and then remove it from the ignition lock or open a front door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically.
If you shift the automatic transmission to N before switching off the engine, the
Using KEYLESS-GO
▶ Apply the electric parking brake.
▶ Shift the transmission to position P.
▶ Press the Start/Stop button (▷ page 16 The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
For If you turn off the engine with the Start/Stop button, the automatic transmission shifts to N. If you then open one of the from doors, the automatic transmission shifts to P.
In the event of an emergency, the engine can be turned off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds.
Electric parking brake
General notes
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
- release the parking brake.
- shift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P.
- start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The function of the electric parking brake is • if the SmartKey is in position 1 in the dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on- ignition lock or board voltage is low or there is a malfunction• if the ignition was switched on using the in the system, it may not be possible to apply Start/Stop button.
the released parking brake.
To ensure that you do not roll backwards
▶ If this is the case, only park the vehicle level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling away.
when pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the electric parking brake (▷ page 170).
▶ Shift the automatic transmission to position P.
Applying automatically
It may not be possible to release an applied automatically:
parking brake, if the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
• if DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a standstill or
- if the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary
The electric parking brake performs a
function test at regular intervals while the in addition, at least one of the following engine is switched off. The sounds that can conditions must be fulfilled: be heard while this is occurring are normal.
Applying/releasing manually
text_image
1 P42.20-2600-31▶ To engage: push handle ①.
When the electric parking brake is engaged, the PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) red indicator lamp lights in the instrument cluster.
The electric parking brake can also be applied when the SmartKey is removed.
▶ To release: pull handle ①.
The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
i The electric parking brake can only be released:
- the engine is switched off. - the driver's door is open and the seat belt is not fastened. - the vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
Releasing automatically
The electric parking brake is released automatically when all of the following conditions are fulfilled:
- the engine is running. - the transmission is in position D or R. - the seat belt has been fastened.
- you depress the accelerator pedal.
If the transmission is in position R, the trunk lid must be closed.
If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake:
- the driver's door is closed. - you have shifted out of transmission position P or you have previously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).
i Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to
Emergency braking
text_image
① P42.20-2600-31▶ While driving, push handle ① of the electric parking brake.
The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake.
The vehicle is braked for as long as the handle of the electric parking brake is pressed. The longer the electric parking brake handle is depressed, the greater the braking force.
During braking:
• a warning tone sounds
- the Release Parking Brake message appears
- the red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes
When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is engaged.
Parking the vehicle for a long period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer four weeks, the battery may be damaged exhaustive discharging.
- Connecting a trickle charger. - You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist ve workshop.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage a result of lack of use.
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice.
Driving tips
General notes
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equipment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
If you make a call while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop by before operating the telephone.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h) the vehicle covers
a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) second.
Drive sensibly - save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
▶ The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure.
▶ Remove unnecessary loads.
▶ Remove roof carriers when they are not needed.
▶ Warm up the engine at low engine speed
- Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
▶ Have all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or by the service interval display.
Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain.
Drinking and driving
WARNING
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or a anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.
Emission control
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never lead the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
pCertain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits.
These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. For this reason, all work on the engine must be carried out by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.
The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at regular intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
ECO display
text_image
ECO DISPLAY 62 % From Start Acceleration Constant Coasting P54.33-2599-31Example: ECO display
can The ECO display provides feedback on how economical your driving characteristics are. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Your driving style can significantly influence the vehicle's consumption.
The ECO display consists of three bars:
• AccelerationAcceleration
- ConstantConstant
- CoastingCoasting
The percent value is the average value of the three bars. The three bars and the mean value begin at the value of 50%. A higher percentage indicates a more economical driving style.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count
in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed consumption.
Apart from driving style, consumption is dependent on many factors such as, e.g.:
- Load
- Tire pressure
- Cold start
- Choice of route
• Electrical consumers switched on
These factors are not included in the ECO display.
The evaluation of your driving style is carried out using the following three categories:
- AccelerationAcceleration (evaluation of acceleration processes):
- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds
- The bar empties: sporty acceleration
- ConstantConstant (assessment of driving at all times):
- The bar fills up: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration
- The bar empties: fluctuations in speed
- CoastingCoasting (assessment of all dece processes):
- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes.
- The bar empties: frequent braking
An economical driving style specially requires driving at moderate engine speeds.
To achieve a higher value in the categori Acceleration and Constant, observe the gearshift recommendations.
On long journeys at a constant speed, on the highway, only the bar for Constant will change.
The ECO display summarizes the driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its completion. For this reason, the ba
I change dynamically at the beginning of the journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For more dynamic changes, carry out a manual reset.
For further information on the ECO display, see (▷ page 276).
Braking
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.
behavior
Downhill gradients
! On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting early to a lower gear. This allows you to take advantage of the engine braking effect and help avoid overheating and excessive wear of the brakes.
When you take advantage of the engine braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface. This could cause damage to the drive train. This type of damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
Do not depress the brake pedal continuously while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing the brakes to rub by constantly applying light pressure to the pedal. This results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads.
Heavy and light loads
WARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while they driving, the braking system can overheat. This
increases the stopping distance and can eve cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Ne depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a head load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.
Wet roads
If you have driven for a long time in heavy without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water.
You then have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion.
Limited braking performance on salt-treated roads
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance.
- Brake occasionally to remove any possible salt residue. Make sure that you do not endanger other road users when doing so
- Carefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey.
- Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead.
Servicing the brakes
! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and you hear a ver warning tone while the engine is running, the brake fluid level may be too low. Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display.
The brake fluid level may be too low due to to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. Have the brake system checked avv immediately. This work should be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
A function or performance test should only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you are planning to have the vehicle tested on such a dynamometer, / rain contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to obtain further information first. Otherwise, you could damage the drive train or the brake system.
Because ESP ^® is an automatic system, the engine and ignition must be switched off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) when the electric parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer (maximum 10 seconds).
Braking triggered automatically by ESP may seriously damage the brake system.
All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to arrange this.
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the
functionality of your brakes at regular intervals. To do so, press firmly on the brake pedal when driving at a high speed. This improves the grip of the brake pads.
You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS) on (▷ page 68) or of BAS PLUS on e (▷ page 68).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings installed on your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or which corresponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake fluid which has not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety.
High-performance brake system for AMG vehicles
The high-performance brake system is designed for heavy loads. This may lead noise when braking. This will depend on:
- Speed
- Braking force
• Environmental conditions, such as temperature and humidity
The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/lin or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions.
For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain furt information about this from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
New and replaced brake pads and discs of reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving.
Compensate for this by applying greater fo to the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and braking accordingly during this break-in period.
Excessive heavy braking results in correspondingly high brake wear. Observe the ☐ brake wear warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note any brake status messages in the multifunction display. Especially for high performance driving, it is important to maintain and have the brake system checked regularly.
Driving on wet roads
Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain dept on the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if:
- you drive at low speeds.
-
the tires have adequate tread depth.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following -
lower your speed.
- avoid ruts.
- brake carefully.
Driving on flooded roads
Do not drive through flooded areas. Check the depth of any water before driving through it. Drive slowly through standing water. Otherwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or the engine compartment. This can damage the electronic components in the engine or the automatic transmission. Water can also be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles and this can cause engine damage.
① Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: set the raised level before driving through standing water.
Off-road fording
! Under no circumstances should you accelerate before entering the water. The
bow wave could cause water to enter and damage the engine and other assemblies.
! Do not open any of the vehicle's doors while fording. Otherwise, water could get into the vehicle interior and damage the vehicle's electronics and interior equipment.
- Establish how deep the water is and the characteristics of the body of water before fording.
• Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: select the highest possible vehicle level. - Shift to a lower gear using the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.
- Avoid high engine speeds.
- Enter and exit the water at a flat place at a steady walking pace.
- Drive slowly and at an even speed through the water.
- Do not stop.
• Water offers a high degree of resistance, and the ground is slippery and in some cases unstable. Therefore, it is difficult and dangerous to pull away in the water. - Ensure that a bow wave does not form you drive.
- Clean any mud from the tire tread after fording.
- Apply the brakes to dry them after fording Always observe the fording depth values (▷ page 454).
Winter driving
WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface, an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind.
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed:
▶ Shift the transmission to position N.
Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD
package: if driving in snow or with snow chains, select the snow program (▷ page 255) with the off-road program selector wheel in the center console.
i Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not cover the radiator, e.g. with a protective cover. The measuring function of the onboard diagnosis system may otherwise provide inaccurate values. Some of these values are required by law and must therefore always be accurate.
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You should pay special attention to road
conditions when temperatures are around the freezing point.
For more information on driving with snow chains, see (▷ page 407).
For more information on driving with summ tires, see (▷ page 406).
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation section (▷ page 406).
systems. Adapt your driving style to suit the terrain conditions. Drive carefully. Have damage to the vehicle rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not switch to transmission position N when driving off-road. You could lose control of the vehicle if you attempt to brake using the service brake. If the gradient is too steep, drive backwards in reverse gear.
Off-road driving
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There a risk of an accident.
Always drive on a steep incline in the line fall (straight up or down) and do not turn vehicle.
WARNING
If the vehicle level is high, the vehicle center of gravity is raised. This could cause the vehicle to tip over more easily on uphill or downhill gradients. There is a risk of an accident.
Select the lowest possible vehicle level.
General notes
Read this section carefully before driving your vehicle off-road. Practice by driving over more gentle off-road terrain first.
familiarize yourself with the characteristics of your vehicle and the gear shift operation before driving through difficult terrain.
The following driving systems are specially adapted to off-road driving:
^e Off-road program 1 and 2 (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package) (▷ page 258)
- LOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package)
r (▷ page 259)
- Differential lock (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package) (▷ page 259)
- Off-road ABS (▷ page 68)
- AIRMATIC package (vehicle level) (▷ page 217)
When driving off-road, sand, mud and water; DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) possibly mixed with oil, for example, could get page 256)
into the brakes. This could result in a reduced reserve the following notes: braking effect or in total brake failure and also
in increased wear and tear. The braking characteristics change depending on the material ingressing the brakes. Clean the brakes after driving off-road. If you detect a reduced braking effect or grinding noises, have the brake system checked in a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Adapt your driving style to the different braking characteristics.
Driving off-road increases the likelihood of damage to the vehicle, which, in turn, can lead to failure of the mechanical assembly or
- Stop the vehicle before starting to drive along an off-road route.
- For vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: select a vehicle level that is suitable for the off-road terrain. To avoid damaging the vehicle, make sure there is always sufficient ground clearance.
-
Check that items of luggage and loads are stowed safely and are well secured (▷ page 345).
-
Always keep the engine running and in g when driving on a downhill gradient. Activate DSR (▷ page 256).
• Always keep the doors, tailgate, windows and sliding sunroof closed while driving. - Adapt your speed to the terrain. The rougher, steeper or more ruts on the terrain, the slower your speed should be.
- Drive slowly and at an even speed through the water. Ensure that a bow wave does form as you drive.
- Drive with extreme care on unfamiliar off-road routes where visibility is poor. For safety reasons, get out of the vehicle first and survey the off-road route.
- Look out for obstacles, such as rocks, holes, tree stumps and furrows.
- Check the depth of water before fording rivers and streams.
- When fording, do not stop and do not switch off the engine.
- On sand, drive quickly to overcome the rolling resistance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels could become stuck in loose ground.
- Do not jump with the vehicle as this will interrupt the vehicle's propulsion.
• Always keep the engine running and in g when driving on a slope. - Do not shift the automatic transmission to transmission position N.
Do not use the HOLD function when driving off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle on such surfaces.
Checklist before driving off-road
! If the engine oil warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion, stop the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Check the engine oil level. The engine oil warning lamp warning must not be ignored. Continuing the journey while the symbol displayed could lead to engine damage.
▶Engine oil level: check the engine oil level and add oil if necessary.
When driving on steep gradients, the engine oil level must be sufficiently high to ensure a correct oil supply in the vehicle.
▶ DEF tank (BlueTEC vehicles): check the level and top up if necessary (▶ page 186).
▶ Tire-changing tool kit: check that the jack ghis working and make sure you have the lug nrench, a robust tow cable and a folding spade in the vehicle.
▶ Wheels and tires: check the tire tread depth and tire pressure.
Check for damage and remove any foreign objects, e.g. small stones, from the wheels/tires.
▶ Replace any missing valve caps.
▶ Replace dented or damaged wheels.
▶ Rims: dented or bent rims can result in a loss of tire pressure and damage the tire bead. Therefore, check your rims before driving off-road and replace them as required.
Checklist after driving off-road
! If you detect damage to the vehicle after driving off-road, have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package: activate the on-road program (▷ page 258).
Deactivate the LOW RANGE off-road gear (▷ page 259).
Deactivate DSR (▷ page 256).
▶ Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: lower the vehicle to a ride height suitable for the road conditions, e.g. to the highway/high-speed level.
▶ Clean the headlamps and rear lights and pole check for damage.
Clean the front and rear license plates.
Clean the wheels/tires with a water jet and remove any foreign objects.
▶ If you detect strong vibrations after off-rolose gravel:
▶ Clean the wheels, wheel housings and the vehicle underside with a water jet; check for any foreign objects and damage.
▶ Check whether twigs or other parts of plants have become trapped. These increase the risk of fire and can damage fuel pipes, brake hoses or the rubber bellows of the axle joints and propeller shafts.
▶ After the trip, examine without fail the entire undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes bodywork structure, steering, chassis and exhaust system for damage.
▶ After driving for extended periods across sand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly conditions, have the brake discs, wheels, brake pads/linings and axle joints checked and cleaned.
travel, check for foreign objects in the wheels and drive train and remove them necessary. Foreign objects can disturb the balance and cause vibrations.
Driving over rough terrain places greater demands on your vehicle than driving on normal roads. After driving off-road, check the vehicle. This allows you to detect damage promptly and reduce the risk of an accident to yourself and other road users.
- Drive quickly to overcome the rolling resistance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels could become stuck in loose ground.
- Drive in the tracks of other vehicles if possible. Make sure that:
- the tire ruts are not too deep.
- the sand is sufficiently firm.
- the ground clearance of the vehicle is sufficient.
Tire ruts and gravel roads
! Check that the ruts are not too deep and that your vehicle has sufficient clearance. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or bottom out and get stuck.
Observe the following rules when driving along ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with
- Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: if select a raised vehicle level.
• Avoid high engine speeds.
- Shift to a lower gear using the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.
- Drive slowly.
- Where ruts are too deep, drive with the age wheels of one side on the center grassy area, if possible.
Driving on sand
Observe the following rules when driving on sand:
- Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package: select off-road program 1 (▷ page 258).
- Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: select a raised vehicle level.
- Avoid high engine speeds.
- Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter to shift to a lower gear appropriate to the terrain.
Driving over obstacles
! Obstacles could damage the floor of the vehicle or components of the chassis. Ask passengers for guidance when driving over large obstacles. The passenger should always keep a safe distance from the vehicle when doing so in order to avoid injury as a result of unexpected vehicle movements. After driving off-road or over obstacles, check the vehicle for possible damage, especially to the underbody and the components of the chassis.
natural_image
Exterior view of a Mercedes-Benz SUV on a beach (no signage or text)Observe the following rules when driving over tree stumps, large stones and other obstacles:
- Select the LOW RANGE (▷ page 259) off-road gear.
- Raise the vehicle level.
- Avoid high engine speeds.
- Shift to a lower gear using the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.
- Drive very slowly.
- Drive straight over the center of obstacle
Traveling uphill
Approach/departure angle
WARNING
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There a risk of an accident.
Always drive on a steep incline in the line of fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the vehicle.
- Observe the rules on off-road driving.
- Do not drive at an angle on slopes, inclin or gradients, but instead follow the direct line of fall. The maximum gradient-climbing
capability of your vehicle is 100%, which
corresponds to an approach/departure angle of 45^ . Note that the climbing
of your vehicle depends on the terrain conditions.
- When driving down an incline, make use of the engine's braking effect. Observe the engine speed; do not overrev the engine.
- Before driving on extreme uphill and downhill gradients, select the LOW RANGE off-road gear (▷ page 259).
- Drive slowly.
- Avoid high engine speeds. Drive at appropriate engine speeds (maximum 3,000 rpm).
• Use the left-hand paddle shifter to shift into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients.
- Check the brakes after prolonged off-road driving.
i Hill start assist will aid you when pulling away on a hill.
For further information about hill start assist, see (▷ page 171).
Do not switch to transmission position N
when driving off-road. If you try to brake the vehicle using the service brake, you could lose control of the vehicle. If the gradient is too steep for your vehicle, drive back down in reverse gear.
Always observe the approach/departure angle values (▷ page 455).
Maximum gradient-climbing capability
^S Always observe the maximum gradient climbing ability values ( page 455).
Hilltops
When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly reduce pressure on the accelerator
immediately before reaching the brow of the hill. Use the vehicle's own impetus to drive over the top of the hill.
This style of driving prevents:
- the vehicle from lifting off the ground on the citybrow of a hill
- the vehicle from traveling too quickly down the other side
Driving downhill
- Drive slowly.
- Do not drive at an angle down steep inclines. Steer into the line of fall and with the front wheels aligned straight. Otherwise, the vehicle could slip sidew tip and rollover.
- Shift to a lower gear using the left-hand paddle shifter before tackling steep downhill gradients.
- Activate DSR. If this is not sufficient, bra gently. When doing so, make sure that the vehicle is facing in the direction of the I of fall.
- Check that the brakes are working norm after a long downhill stretch.
i The special off-road ABS setting enables a precise, brief and repeated locking of the front wheels. This causes them to dig into loose earth. Be aware that the front where easily skid across the ground surface if completely braked and therefore lose their ability to steer.
Cruise control should not be activated when driving off-road.
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
Do not use cruise control:
aHyin road and traffic conditions which do allow you to maintain a constant speed in heavy traffic or on winding roads
• on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid
in• when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.
Driving systems
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. You must select a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain steady speed for a prolonged period. You store any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
Cruise control lever
text_image
order st and ng t of brake ① ③ ② ④ P54.25-8744-31① To activate or increase speed
② To activate or reduce speed
To deactivate cruise control
To activate at the current speed/last stored speed
When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds.
stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes.
Activation conditions
To activate cruise control, all of the following activation conditions must be fulfilled:
- the electric parking brake must be released.
- you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
- ESP ^ must be active, but not intervening.
• the transmission must be in position D. - DSR must be deactivated.
- off-road program 2 must be deactivated (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).
Storing or calling up a speed
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.
Storing, maintaining and calling up speed
Storing and maintaining a speed
text_image
① ② P54.25-8871-31▶ Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
▶ Briefly press the cruise control lever up ① or down ②.
▶ Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed.
You can accept the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a close-up of the right-hand connector (no visible text or symbols)▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ①.
▶ Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed.
Setting a speed
text_image
① ② P54.25-8871-31Deactivating cruise control
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a close-up of the right-hand connector (no visible text or symbols)Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment. There are several ways to deactivate cruise until the vehicle has accelerated or braked control: the speed set.
▶ Press the cruise control lever up ① for a forwards ①. higher speed or down ② for a lower speed.
▶ To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up ① or down ② to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up ① or down ② the last speed stored is increased or reduced.
▶ To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up ① or down ② to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up ① or down ② the last speed stored is increased or reduced.
Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
- you engage the electric parking brake
- you are driving at less than 20 mph d (30 km/h)
- ESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP
- you activate DSR
- you activate off-road program 2 on vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package
- you shift the transmission to position N while driving
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the CruiseCruise Control Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.
When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared.
DISTRONIC PLUS
General notes
DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded.
You must select a lower gear in good time of FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in long and steep downhill gradients, especially any non-approved way.
if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By Any unauthorized modification to this doing so, you will make use of the braking device could void the user's authority to effect of the engine. This relieves the load on operate the equipment.
the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-moving vehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in order to maintain the preset distance to the vehicle in front.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision without your intervention.
An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in
order to increase the distance to the vehicle in front or take evasive action provided it is safe to do so.
For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor system must be operational. Im
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control in the speed range between 20 mph (Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada: 200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front of you, it operates in the speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada: 200 km/h).
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving roads with steep gradients.
As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the responsible authorities. You can refer to the relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions are asked about this.
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCSituations.
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
sensor is intended for use in an automo radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the
Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: order 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Important safety notes
WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:
- people or animals
• stationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
• oncoming and crossing traffic
As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give on warnings nor intervene in such situations.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic
Situations.
In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
• give an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle
• neither give a warning nor intervene
• accelerate unexpectedly
There is a risk of an accident.
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, in particular when warned to do so DISTRONIC PLUS.
WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up, to 40% of the maximum braking force. If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk of an accident.
In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if:
- dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
- snow or heavy rain
• interference by other radar sources
• strong radar reflections, for example, in parking garages
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a risk vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the stored speed.
This speed may:
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function be too high if you are driving in a filter lane is activated, the vehicle brakes or an exit lane
automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function the following or other similar situations:
- when towing the vehicle
-
in the car wash
-
be so high when driving in the right-hand lane that you overtake vehicles in the left-inhand lane
- be so high when driving in the left-hand lane that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand lane
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics.
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions.
DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
- in road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads
- on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could the skid
- when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to heavy rain or snow
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line.
Cruise control lever
text_image
in d ot e.g. 1 5 3 4 2 P54.25-8745-31① To activate or increase speed
② To activate or reduce speed
③ To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
④ To activate at the current speed/last stored speed
⑤ To set the specified minimum distance
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS
Activation conditions
In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
- the engine must be started. It may take up to two minutes after pulling away before ▶DISTRONIC PLUS is operational.
- the electric parking brake must be released.
- ESP ^ must be active, but not intervening.
• the transmission must be in position D. - the driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must fastened.
- the front-passenger door and rear doors must be closed.
- off-road program 2 must be deactivated (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package),
- DSR must be deactivated.
• the vehicle must not skid.
Activating
text_image
① ② ③ P54.25-8874-31pressure point for a higher speed or down ③ for a lower speed.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.
▶ To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments):
briefly press the cruise control lever up ① past the pressure point for a higher speed or down ③ for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.
▶ Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed.
When driving at speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle in front has been detected and is shown in the multifunction display. If the vehicle in front is no longer detected and displayed, for example because it has changed lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. You will hear a warning tone if this is the case.
If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed
▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you determine by the position of the you ② or press it up ① or down ③ . accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Activating at the current speed/las
▶ To adjust the set speed in 1 mph stored speed increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up ① to the WARNING
Activating at the current speed/last stored speed
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate
or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store desired speed again.
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and attached fuel plug (no visible text or symbols)▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever toward you ①.
▶ Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value.
Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
Pulling away and driving
text_image
① ② ③ P54.25-8874-31If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal.
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards they you ② or press it up ① or down ③ . or
▶ Accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored.
If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.
Changing lanes
If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC PLUS supports you when:
- you are driving faster than 40 mph (60 km/h)
• DISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front - you switch on the appropriate turn signal
• DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small.
When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS monitors the left lane on left-hand drive vehicles and the right lane on right-hand drive vehicles.
Stopping
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away i
- there is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply.
- DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle.
- the electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with.
• the battery is disconnected. - the accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle it is stationary.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress brake.
After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake.
Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standst at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever.
The electric parking brake automatically secures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and:
- the driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened.
- the engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
• a system malfunction occurs.
• the power supply is not sufficient.
On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there is: a malfunction, the transmission may also automatically be shifted into position P.
Setting a speed
text_image
P54.25-8746-31 ① ②keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set.
▶ Press the cruise control lever up ① for a higher speed or down ② for a lower speed.
▶ To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up ① or down ② to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up ① or down ② the last speed stored is increased or reduced.
▶ To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments):
briefly press the cruise control lever up ① or down ② to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up ① or down ②, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.
If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.
Setting the specified minimum distance deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
text_image
P54.25-8747-31
text_image
Car interior diagram with a close-up of the steering wheel and a close-up of the brake caliper, showing a numbered component.You can set the specified minimum distance. There are several ways to deactivate for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time sp. DISTRONIC PLUS:
between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can ^or see this distance in the multifunction display Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. (▷ page 210).
▶ Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards ①.
▶ To increase: turn control ② in direction ③.
Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you
▶ To decrease: turn control ② in direction ①.
will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.
i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine.
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished
i Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently overtaking. safe distance from the vehicle in front. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front.
necessary.
- you engage the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake
- you are driving slower than 15 mph (25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehicle in front is no longer detected
- ESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP
• the transmission is in the P, R or N position - you pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the front-
passenger door or one of the rear doors open
- you activate DSR
- you activate off-road program 2 on vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package
• the vehicle has skidded
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Displays in the speedometer
text_image
① ② ③ 80 100 70 120 60 140 50 160 40 30 20 10 0 1/2 0 P54.32-9583-31Example: DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speedometer
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or two segments ② in the set speed range light up.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments ② between speed of the vehicle in front ① and stored speed ③ light up.
For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
text_image
les 100 ft 50 ft 0 ft 2 3 4 P54.33-26385-1① Vehicle in front, if detected
② Distance indicator, current distance to the vehicle in front
③ Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable
④ Own vehicle
In the Assistance menu of the on-board computer, you can select the assistance display.
▶ Select the Distance Display function using the on-board computer (▷ page 280).
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated
text_image
DISTRONIC PLUS 50 mph 100 ft 50 ft 2 3 4 P54.33-2637-81① Vehicle in front, if detected
② Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable
③ Own vehicle
④ DISTRONIC PLUS activated
In the Assistance menu of the on-board computer, you can select the assistance display.
▶ Select the Distance Display function using the on-board computer (▷ page 280).
You will see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations:
• cornering, going into and coming out of bend
- vehicles traveling on a different line
- other vehicles changing lanes
- narrow vehicles
• obstructions and stationary vehicles
- crossing vehicles
In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.
Cornering, going into and coming out bend
natural_image
Top-down diagram of a multi-lane road intersection with vehicles, showing a vehicle approaching a truck (no text or symbols)The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.
Vehicles traveling on a different line
text_image
ve S. P54.70-2425-31DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles traveling on a different line. The distance the vehicle in front will be too short.
Other vehicles changing lanes
natural_image
Top-down diagram of a multi-lane road with vehicles and a truck, no text or symbols presentDISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short.
Narrow vehicles
natural_image
Top-down diagram of a road with vehicles and a shaded lane, no text or symbols presentDISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the road,
because of its narrow width. The distance the vehicle in front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
natural_image
Top-down diagram of a road intersection with cars and a parking lot, no text or symbols presentDISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle. DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.
Crossing vehicles
natural_image
Top-down diagram of a road intersection with cars and a vehicle, no text or symbols presentDISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.
Level control (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package)
Important safety notes
Level control adapts the vehicle level automatically to the current operating and driving situation. This results in reduced fuel consumption and improved handling. Make changes to the vehicle level while the vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle to adjust to the new level as quickly as possible.
The vehicle level may change visibly if you park the vehicle and the outside temperature changes. If the temperature drops, the vehicle level is lower; with an increase in temperature, the vehicle level rises.
If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the vehicle begins to compensate for load discrepancies while still parked. However, for significant level changes, such as after the vehicle has been stationary for a long period, the engine must be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle is only lowered when the doors are closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door is opened, and it continues once the door has been closed.
For information about driving off-road, see (▷ page 197).
WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.
WARNING
When you drive with the vehicle raised, the driving characteristics could be impaired by the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The vehicle could rollover more easily, for example on a bend. There is a risk of an accident.
Always select as low a vehicle level as possible and adjust your driving style.
WARNING
When you drive with the chassis lowered or raised, the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics can be significantly impaired. You could also exceed the permissible vehicle
height if the chassis is raised. There is a of an accident.
Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.
The individual vehicle levels differ from highway level as follows:
WARNING
Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle may start to skid and roll over in the event an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions. There is a risk of an accident.
Always adapt your speed and driving style the vehicle's driving characteristics and to prevailing road and weather conditions.
• highway level: +/-0 in (+/-0 mm)
• high-speed level: -0.6 in (-15 mm)
- off-road level 1: + 1.2 in (+ 30 mm)
• off-road level 2: + 2.3 in (+ 60 mm)
• off-road level 3: + 3.6 in (+ 90 mm)
Highway/high-speed level
to! Make sure that there is enough ground the clearance when the vehicle is being lowered. It could otherwise hit the ground damaging the underbody.
When driving on extremely rough terrain select a high vehicle level in good time. Make sure there is always sufficient grou clearance. You will otherwise damage the vehicle.
- Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury.
• In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
You and all vehicle occupants should always wear your seat belts.
text_image
nd 1 2 3 4 cle,Basic settings
The extent to which the vehicle is raised lowered depends on the basic setting selected.
Select:
• highway/high-speed level for driving on normal roads
- off-road level 1 for driving on easily negotiable off-road terrain
- off-road level 2 for driving on normal off-road terrain
- off-road level 3 for freeing the vehicle in particularly rough terrain at low speeds only
① Selector wheel
② To raise the level
③ Indicator lamps
④ To lower the level
▶ Start the engine.
▶ Selector wheel ① engaged: briefly press or selector wheel ①.
Selector wheel ① extends.
If one or more indicator lamps ③ are on:
▶ Turn selector wheel ① counter-clockwise ④ until all indicator lamps ③ that are lit start to flash.
The vehicle is lowered to highway level. As soon as the next lowest level is reached, the indicator lamp stops flashing and goes out.
text_image
Lowering Max. Speed 12 mphDuring the adjustment, the LoweringLoweringThe vehicle is raised. message, for example, appears in the multifunction display.
If you press the ← or OK button of multifunction steering wheel, the message will disappear. Once highway level has been reached, all indicator lamps ③ go out.
The vehicle automatically selects highway level if you are driving at a speed above 70 mph (115 km/h) or if you drive at a 6 between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 70 mph (115 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds.
The vehicle is lowered to high-speed level you are traveling at higher speeds.
Off-road levels
General notes
- Only select off-road level 3 for driving off-road in particularly rough terrain.
- Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.
- Do not drive at speeds above 12 mph (20 km/h).
text_image
1 2 3 4 P54.25-8477-31Only select an off-road level when this is appropriate for road conditions. Otherwise, fuel consumption increases and handling may be affected.
▶ Start the engine.
▶ Selector wheel ① engaged: briefly press selector wheel ①.
Selector wheel ① extends.
▶ To raise: turn selector wheel ① clockwise ②.
ngThe vehicle is raised. or
▶ To lower: turn selector wheel ① counter-on the clockwise ④.
The vehicle is lowered.
Indicator lamps ③ for the desired off-road level flash:
- Off-road level 1: the lower indicator lamp per flashes
- Off-road level 2: the lower and center indicator lamps flash
^17 Off-road level 3: all three indicator lamps flash
The vehicle adjusts to the off-road level selected. As soon as an off-road level is reached, the corresponding indicator lamp stops flashing and lights up constantly.
Raising the vehicle
During the adjustment, the VehicleVehicle RisingRising message, for example, appears in the multifunction display.
The vehicle rises from highway level to off-road level 1.
If you press the ← or OK button on the multifunction steering wheel, the message will disappear.
i Up to off-road level 2, you can hide the messages using the ← or OK button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Once off-road level 2 has been reached, the lower and center indicator lamps of the selector wheel are on.
text_image
2 Raising Max. Speed 12 mph P54.32-9803-87While the adjustment from off-road level off-road level 3 is taking place, you will message such as the following in the multifunction display: Vehicle Rising Max. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h).
The Max. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h) message draws your attention to the maximum speed permitted for off-road level 3.
Once off-road level 3 has been reached, y will see a message shown in white in the multifunction display, for example: Max.Max Speed 12 mph (20 km/h).
If you drive above 20 km/h at off-road level, you will see the following message shown in the multifunction display: Vehicle & Lowering Max. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h).
i You cannot clear these messages.
You also hear a warning. The vehicle is lowered and off-road level 3 is canceled. If you continue to increase your speed, the red message continues to be shown in the multifunction display. The newly set level is not displayed until the vehicle has been set to a level suitable for the current speed. see a If you maintain or reduce your speed, you will see a message in white in the display while the vehicle is being lowered, such as the following: Lowering Max. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h).
Lowering the vehicle
text_image
Lowering Max. Speed 12 mphThe vehicle is lowered to off-road level 2. If you select an off-road level when driving at too high a speed, the Drive More Slowly message appears in the multifunction display.
You can select from the following:
- Off-road level 1 at speeds up to 60 mph (100 km/h)
Off-road level 2 at speeds up to 40 mph (65 km/h) - Off-road level 3 at speeds up to 12 mph (20 km/h)
If you are driving above 50 mph (80 km/h) or drive between 40 mph (65 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for longer than
20 seconds, off-road level 2 will be canceled. The vehicle is lowered to off-road level 1. You will see a message in the multifunction display, for example: Lowering.
If you are driving above 70 mph (115 km/h) or drive between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 70 mph (115 km/h) for longer than 20 seconds, off-road level 1 will be canceled. Depending on the vehicle's speed and the ADS mode selected (▶ page 217), the vehicle is automatically lowered to highway or high-speed level.
You will see a message in the multifunction display, for example: Lowering.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations:
HOLD function
General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in following situations:
- when pulling away, especially on steep slopes
- when maneuvering on steep slopes
- when waiting in traffic
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOL function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
Do not use the HOLD function when
driving off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle on such surfaces.
The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle on such surfaces.
- when towing the vehicle - in the car wash
Deactivating the HOLD function (▷ page 217).
Activation conditions
You can activate the HOLD function if:
• the vehicle is stationary
the engine is running
- the driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened
• the electric parking brake is released
the transmission is in position D, R or N
• DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
Important safety notes
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
- there is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply.
- the HOLD function has been deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
- the electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with.
• the battery is disconnected
There is a risk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Activating the HOLD function
text_image
85°F HOLD 20:30 1 P54.38-3138-31▶ Make sure that the activation conditions by are met.
▶ Depress the brake pedal.
▶ Quickly depress the brake pedal further until ① appears in the multifunction display.
The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal.
If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again.
Deactivating the HOLD function
The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if:
- you accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R.
- you shift the transmission to position P.
- you depress the brake pedal again with certain amount of pressure until ① disappears from the multifunction display.
- you secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake.
- you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake.
The electric parking brake automatically secures the vehicle if the HOLD function is activated and:
• the driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened.
• the engine is switched off.
• a system malfunction occurs.
• the power supply is not sufficient.
On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if th is a malfunction, the transmission may also be automatically shifted into position P.
AIRMATIC package
General notes
AIRMATIC regulates the level of your vehicle. As well as level control (▷ page 218), your vehicle can be equipped with ADS (Adaptive
Damping System) (▷ page 217) and ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM (▷ page 218).
Observe the notes on driving with a trailer (▷ page 264).
ADS (Adaptive Damping System)
General notes
ADS adapts the damping characteristics to the current operating and driving situation.
This depends on:
- your driving style
• the road surface conditions - the ADS setting
• the vehicle level setting
Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
Sports tuning
text_image
1 2 SPORT COMF 3 P54.25-8764-31Example: vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD package
① Suspension tuning button
② Indicator lamp for sports tuning
③ Indicator lamp for comfort tuning
▶ Start the engine.
▶ Press button ①.
Indicator lamp ② lights up. Sports suspension tuning is selected. The vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm).
The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.
Comfort tuning
text_image
1 2 SPORT COMF 3 P54.25-8764-31Example: vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD package
① Suspension tuning button
② Indicator lamp for sports tuning
③ Indicator lamp for comfort tuning
▶ Press button ①.
Indicator lamp ③ lights up. Comfort tuning is selected. The vehicle is raised by 0.6 i (15 mm).
In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable.
Therefore, select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style. Select comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of highway.
Active Curve System
The Active Curve System uses active stabilizers to optimize both driving comfort and vehicle agility. Depending on the ADS mode selected (▷ page 217), the Active Curve System also changes the setting.
If you select ADS comfort mode:
- rolling movement is reduced in the event changing surface undulations
• the roll angle when cornering is reduced
• the driving style is agile
If you select ADS sport mode:
• the roll angle is reduced significantly
• the driving style is even more agile
Level control
Important safety notes
WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.
WARNING
When you drive with the vehicle raised, the driving characteristics could be impaired by the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The vehicle could rollover more easily, for example on a bend. There is a risk of an accident.
Always select as low a vehicle level as possible and adjust your driving style.
WARNING
When you drive with the chassis lowered or raised, the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics can be significantly impaired. You could also exceed the permissible vehicle height if the chassis is raised. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.
WARNING
Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle may start to skid and roll over in the event of an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions. There is a risk of an accident.
Always adapt your speed and driving style to the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
! When driving on extremely rough terrain, select a high vehicle level in good time. Make sure there is always sufficient ground
clearance. You will otherwise damage the vehicle.
! When you raise the vehicle in such a w that not all wheels have contact with the ground, remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
- Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury.
- In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. You and all vehicle occupants should always wear your seat belts.
General notes
Further information about "Driving off-road" (▷ page 197).
Level control adapts the vehicle level automatically to the current operating and driving situation. This results in reduced fu consumption and improved handling.
If you select ADS comfort mode
(▷ page 217), the vehicle is lowered to high. The raised level corresponds to a vehicle level speed level as the speed increases. As thereaised by 50 mm when compared with vehicle speed decreases, the vehicle is raised highway level in comfort mode.
back up to highway level.
If you select ADS sport mode (▷ page 217), the vehicle skips highway level and lowers directly to high-speed level depending on the basic setting (▷ page 219).
Make changes to the vehicle level while the vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle to adjust to the new level as quickly as possible.
The vehicle level may change visibly if you park the vehicle and the outside temperature changes. If the temperature drops, the vehicle level is lower; with an increase in temperature, the vehicle level rises.
If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, vehicle begins to compensate for load discrepancies while still parked. However,
significant level changes, such as after the vehicle has been stationary for a long period, the engine must be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle is only lowered when the doors are closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door is opened, and it continues once the door has been closed.
Basic settings (excluding AMG vehicles)
The extent to which the vehicle is raised o lowered depends on the basic setting selected. Select raised level for off-road driving or highway/high-speed level for normal roads.
The individual vehicle levels differ from highway level as follows:
• highway level: +/-0 in (+/-0 mm)
• high-speed level: -0.6 in (-15 mm)
- raised level: +2.3 in (+60 mm)
Basic settings for AMG vehicles
The extent to which the vehicle is raised or lowered depends on the AMG adaptive sport suspension setting selected. Select the raised level for off-road driving or highway/high-speed level for normal roads.
Raised level
text_image
Car interior control panel with labeled buttons and a highlighted component, showing vehicle status indicatorsOnly select raised level if this is appropriate for the road conditions. Otherwise, fuel the consumption may increase and handling may be affected.
▶ Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ② is not lit:
▶ Press button ①.
Indicator lamp ② flashes. The vehicle rises to raised level.
text_image
Raising P54.32-9927-31
text_image
① ② P54.25-8607-31① Level control button
② Level control indicator lamp
▶ Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ② is lit:
During the adjustment, the VehicleVehicle▶ Press button ①.
RisingRising message, for example, appears in the multifunction display. Indicator lamp ② flashes. The vehicle is adjusting to highway/high-speed level.
If you press the ← or OK button multifunction steering wheel, the message will disappear.
Once the vehicle has reached raised level, indicator lamp ② remains lit. The Vehicle
RisingRising message disappears from the multifunction display.
If you try to select raised level at a speed above 40 mph (64 km/h), the Drive More
SlowlySlowly message appears in the multifunction display.
text_image
on the Lowering R NRA P54.32-9925-S17Highway/high-speed level
! Make sure that there is enough ground clearance when the vehicle is being lowered. It could otherwise hit the ground damaging the underbody.
During the adjustment, the LoweringLowering message, for example, appears in the multifunction display.
If you press the or button on the d. multifunction steering wheel, the message will disappear.
Once highway level has been reached, indicator lamp ② goes out. The Lowering message disappears from the multifunction display.
The vehicle automatically adjusts to highway level when you:
- drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
- drive between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds.
Depending on the ADS mode selected (▷ page 217), the vehicle is lowered to speed level at high speeds.
AMG adaptive sport suspension system
Important safety notes
WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.
WARNING
The vehicle is lowered if:
- you have selected the Comfort or Sport suspension tuning and
- lock the vehicle after switching off the engine
Persons in the vicinity of the wheel arch or underbody may thus become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the underbody when you switch off the engine.
When parking, position your vehicle so that it does not make contact with the curb as the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
Vehicle level
Level control adapts the vehicle level automatically to the current operating and driving situation. Level control ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehic This improves driving safety and fuel consumption.
The AIRMATIC package and ACTIVE CURVE SYSTEM are always components of AMG adaptive suspension system (▷ page 217). Due to the sportier suspension settings compared to standard vehicles, the levels and speed thresholds for sinking and raising the vehicle are different.
In Comfort and Sport driving modes, after locking the vehicle it lowers to the Sport+ level. When locking the vehicle at the raised level, the vehicle does not lower.
The settings will remain stored after you switch off the engine. When starting the engine, the selected setting, e.g. AMG adaptive suspension system Comfort, is restored.
i The vehicle level may change visibly if you park the vehicle and the outside temperature changes. If the temperature drops, the vehicle level lowers; with an increase in temperature, the vehicle level rises.
Suspension tuning
General notes
The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving
! The vehicle is lowered by approximately 10 mm if:
- you switch off the engine and then
- lock the vehicle
- you have selected the Sport or Comfort safety and ride comfort. suspension tuning and
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on:
- your driving style
• the road surface conditions - your individual selection of Sport, Sport + or Comfort
Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Sport mode
text_image
1 2 3 P54.25-8763-31The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.
▶ Press button ① once. Indicator lamp ② lights up. You have selected Sport mode.
The AMG Suspension System SPORT message appears in the multifunction display.
Sport + mode
The very firm setting of the suspension tun in Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact with the road. Select this mode preferably when driving on race circuits. If indicator lamps ③ and ② are off:
▶ Press button ① twice. Indicator lamps ③ and ② light up. You have selected Sport + mode. The vehicle lowered by 10 mm.
The AMG Suspension System SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display.
If indicator lamp ② lights up:
▶ Press button ① once. Second indicator lamp ③ lights up. You have selected Sport + mode. The vehicle is lowered by 10 mm.
The AMG Suspension System SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display.
Comfort mode
In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a comfortable driving style. Select comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of freeway.
▶ Press button ① repeatedly until indicator lamps ③ and ② go out. You have selected Comfort mode. The vehicle is raised by 10 mm compared with Sport + suspension tuning.
The AMG Suspension System COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display.
PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object.
PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.
! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars.
PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectRange of the sensors
when they are in the immediate vicinity of
the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle ^G or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you:
- switch on the ignition
- shift the transmission to position D, R or N
- Release the electric parking brake
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
General notes
PARKTRONIC does not take objects into consideration that are:
- below the detection range, e.g. people, animals or objects
a• above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.
text_image
on n r N 100 50 0 (cm) 40 20 0 (in) 0 60 120 (cm) 0 24 48 (in) e ver P54.65-4614-31PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your Side view vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper.
text_image
P54.65-4616-31① Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example)
text_image
per 100 50 0 (cm) 40 20 0 (in) 0 60 120 (cm) 0 24 48 (in) P54.65-4615-31Top view
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (▷ page 380).
Front sensors
| Center Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) |
| Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) |
Rear sensors
| Center Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) |
| Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) |
Minimum distance
| Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm) |
| Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm) |
If there is an obstacle within this range, relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown.
Warning displays
text_image
Car interior diagram with labeled dashboard and three circular insets showing vehicle positions and connection pointsWarning display for the front area
① Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle
② Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle
③ Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the center air vent. The warning display for the rear area is in roof lamp in the rear compartment.
The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red
segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness ③ light up.
The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running.
| Transmission position | Warning display |
| D | Front area activated |
| R, N or the vehicle is rolling backwards | Rear and front areas activated |
| P | No areas activated |
One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
- sixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds.
- seventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
text_image
OFF P P54.25-8481-31① Indicator lamp the
② To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
If indicator lamp ① is on then PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also deactivated.
i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
Towing a trailer
! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measures the minimum detection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling.
PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer.
Problems with PARKTRONIC
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Only the red segments in the PARKTRONIC warning displays are lit. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds.PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately five seconds, and the indicator lamp in the PARKTRONIC button lights up. | PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.▶ If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Only the red segments in the PARKTRONIC warning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately five seconds. | The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.▶ Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (▷ page 380).▶ Switch the ignition back on. |
| The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves.▶ See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. |
Active Parking Assist
General notes
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention can assist you during parking.
You may also use PARKTRONIC (▷ page 222).
Important safety notes
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.
When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable.
WARNING
While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could result in a collision with another road user. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure.
is not
! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires.
Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate parking spaces which are not suitable for parking, for example:
- where parking or stopping is prohibited
- in front of driveways or entrances and
• on unsuitable surfaces
Parking tips:
- On narrow roads, drive as close to the parking space as possible.
- Parking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly.
- Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly.
- Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately.
- Pay attention to the PARKTRONIC (▷ page 224) warning messages during the parking procedure.
- At any time, you can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it. Active Parking Assist will then be canceled.
- When transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist.
- Never use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed.
- Make sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle.
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces
- that are parallel to the direction of travel
- that are on straight roads, not bends
- that are on the same level as the road, not on the pavement
Detecting parking spaces
Objects located above the height range of ^of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles.
WARNING
If there are objects above the detection range, Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely. You may cause a collision as a result. There is a risk of an accident. If there are objects above the detection range, stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.
^d or further information on the detection range ( page 223).
Active Parking Assist does not support you with parking spaces parallel to the direction of travel if:
• the parking space is on a curb
- the system reads the parking space as being blocked, for example by foliage or grass paving blocks
- the area is too small for the vehicle to maneuver into
- the parking space is bordered by an obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
text_image
85°F P 20:30 ① ② ③ P54.36-3139-31① Detected parking space on the left
② Parking symbol
③ Detected parking space on the right
Active Parking Assist is switched on automatically when driving forwards. The e.g. system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces:
• that are parallel to the direction of travel
• that are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
- that are at least 51 in (1.3 m) longer than your vehicle
or
When driving at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), you will see parking symbol as a status indicator in the instrument cluster.
When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. By default, Active Parking Assist ▶ only displays parking spaces on the front-▶ passenger side. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the tu signal on the driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain
switched on until you acknowledge the use Active Parking Assist by pressing the OK button on the multifunction steering wheel.
A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.
Parking
WARNING
Active Parking Assist merely aids you by intervening actively in the steering. If you not brake there is a risk of an accident.
Always apply the brakes yourself when maneuvering and parking.
▶ Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster.
▶ Shift the transmission to position R.
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
display.
multifur
To cancel the procedure: press the
button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away.
To park using Active Parking Assist:
press the OK button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings
message appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
▶ Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When backing up, drive at a turn speed below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Otherwise Active Parking Assistain will be canceled.
In tight parking spaces, you will achieve the best parking results by backing up as far as possible. When doing so, also observe the PARKTRONIC messages.
▶ Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces.
The Park Assist active Select D Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Shift the transmission to position D while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction.
The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
i. You will achieve the best results by action waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away.
▶ Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times.
▶ Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before.
The Park Assist active Select R Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist switched off message appears and a warning tone sounds. Active Parking Assist no longer supports you display. with steering interventions. When Active Parking Assist is finished, you must steer again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available. Parking tips:
▶ Start the engine.
▶ Switch on the turn signal in the direction you are pulling away.
▶ Shift the transmission to position D or R_0.0 The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: .S
ds. message appears in the multifunction
▶ To cancel the procedure: press the button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away.
or
- The way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions the location. It may be the case that Act Parking Assist guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. some cases, it may also lead you across onto the curb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.
- You can also select preselect transmission position D. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should the gear change occur too soon to achieve a sensible parking position, the parking procedure will be aborted.
Exiting a parking space
In order that Active Parking Assist can support you when you exit the parking
- you need to have parked using Active Parking Assist.
- the border of the parking space must be high enough at the front and the rear. A curb stone is too small, for example.
- the border of the parking space must not be too wide, as the position of the vehicle must not exceed an angle of 45^ to the starting position as it is maneuvered into the parking space.
- a maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft (1.0 m) must be available.
To exit a parking space using Active
Parking Assist: press the OK button the multifunction steering wheel.
The Park Assist active Accelerate of and brake Observe surroundings
message appears in the multifunction display.
In Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
▶ Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking space. Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled.
▶ Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before.
▶ Shift the transmission to position D or R as required while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction.
You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away.
If you back up after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position.
▶ Drive forwards or back up the vehicle, being not ready to brake at all times.
Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warning tone, if not before.
▶ Drive forwards and back up as prompted by the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary.
Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the Park Assist Finished message appears in the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic of your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over the steering, before the vehicle has exited the parking space completely. This is useful, for example when you recognize that it is already possible to pull out of the parking space.
Canceling Active Parking Assist
▶ Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be canceled a once. The Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.
or
▶ Press the PARKTRONIC button on the center console (▷ page 224). PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Parking Assist is immediately canceled. The Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.
Active Parking Assist is canceled automatically if:
• the electric parking brake is engaged
- transmission position P is selected
- parking using Active Parking Assist is no longer possible
- you are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
- a wheel spins, ESPintervenes or fails. The warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol goes out and the Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.
If Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must steer again yourself.
Towing a trailer
For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the minimum length for parking spaces is slightly increased.
If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist.
Once the electrical connection is established between your vehicle and the trailer, Active Parking Assist is no longer available.
e PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area.
Rear view camera
General notes
natural_image
Front view of a Mercedes-Benz car with a close-up inset showing the dashboard wheel (no text or symbols on the car itself)Rear view camera ① is in the handle on the tailgate.
Rear view camera ① is an optical parking and maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle with guide lines in the COMAND display.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
The text of messages shown in the COMAND display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of rear view camera messages in the COMAND display.
Important safety notes
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your just immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and
parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.
Under the following circumstances, the rear view camera will not function, or will functio in a limited manner:
- the tailgate is open
• in heavy rain, snow or fog
• at night or in very dark places - if the camera is exposed to very bright light
- if the area is lit by fluorescent light or L lighting (the display may flicker)
- if there is a sudden change in temperature e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter
- if the camera lens is dirty or obstructed
- if the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop
Activating/deactivating the rear view camera
text_image
① ② P54.65-4706-31To change the function mode for vehicles with trailer tow hitch: using the
COMAND controller, select symbol ① for the "Reverse parking" function or symbol ② for "Coupling up a trailer" (see the separate COMAND operating instructions).
The symbol of the selected function is highlighted.
To deactivate: the rear view camera is deactivated if you: light
• shift the transmission to position P
• drive 33 ft (10 m) forwards
e; shift the transmission from R to another position after 15 seconds
- drive forwards at a speed of over 5 mpl (10 km/h)
Displays in the COMAND display
The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera does not show objects in the following positions:
• very close to the rear bumper
• under the rear bumper
- in the area immediately above the tailgate handle
! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
• the bumper of a parked vehicle
• the drawbar of a trailer
• the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
• the rear section of an HGV
▶ To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Make sure that the function "show rear view camera display" is selected in COMAND.
▶ Engage reverse gear.
The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND display with guide lines.
/ • a slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.
text_image
① ② ③ ④ P54.65-4727-31① White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static)
② Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
③ Red guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
④ Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
text_image
5 6 8 7 P54.65-4728-31⑤ Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
⑥ Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
⑦ Bumper
⑧ Red guide line at a distance of approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the vehicle
The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R.
The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level.
text_image
Georges Umfield beehandel ① ② ③ P54.65-4729-31Additional messages for vehicles with PARKTRONIC
① Front warning display
② Additional PARKTRONIC measurement operational readiness indicator
③ Rear warning display
Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: if
PARKTRONIC is operational (▷ page 224), an additional operational readiness indicator will appear in COMAND display ②. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays ① and ③ are also active or light up correspondingly in the COMAND display.
"Reverse parking" function
Backing up straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel
text_image
1 2 3 4 P54.65-4730-31① White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static)
② Red guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
③ Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
④ Red guide line at a distance of approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the vehicle
▶ Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (▷ page 231).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
▶ With the help of white guide line ①, whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space.
▶ Using white guide line ① as a guide, carefully back up until you reach the end position.
Red guide line ④ is then at the end of parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space.
parking space until red guide line ① reaches parking space marking ②.
- Keep the steering wheel in that position and back up carefully.
text_image
Diagram of a parking lot with labeled lanes and numbered annotation '1', showing vehicle positions and parking areas.P54.65-4732-31
Backing up with the steering wheel turned the ① Red guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle
text_image
P54.65-4731-31Turning the steering wheel
① Red guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
② Parking space marking
▶ Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (▷ page 231).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
▶ Drive past the parking space and bring the position while the vehicle is stationary. vehicle to a standstill.
▶ While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the
▶ Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible.
text_image
Diagram showing a parking lot with numbered lanes, including lane 1 and lane 2, alongside a car and a vehicle.P54.65-4733-31
Driving to the final position
① White guide line at current steering wheel angle
② Parking space marking
▶ Turn the steering wheel to the center
heposition while the vehicle is stationary.
the
① Red guide line at a distance of approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the vehicle
② White guide line without turning the steering wheel
③ End of parking space
▶ Back up carefully until you have reached the final position.
Red guide line ① is then at end of parking space ③. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space.
text_image
Geosmres Limfeld beachhead ① ② ③ P54.65-4708-31① Vehicle center point on the yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
② Trailer drawbar
③ Ball coupling
This function is only available on vehicles with a trailer tow hitch.
▶ Set the height of trailer drawbar ② so that
ing it is slightly higher than ball coupling ③.
▶ Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer drawbar ②.
"Coupling up a trailer" function
! The following distance specifications refer to trailer tow hitches with ball coupling that have been approved for this vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Distances may differ if you use other ball couplings. In the case, take into account that actual distances will not match the following distance specifications. Otherwise you could damage the trailer and vehicle.
text_image
4 3 2 1 5 this P54.65-4707-31① Ball coupling
② Red guide line at a distance of approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the ball coupling
③ Trailer drawbar marker assistant
④ Trailer drawbar
⑤ Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" function
▶ Use the COMAND controller to select symbol ⑤, see the separate operating instructions for COMAND.
The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selected. The distance specifications now only apply to objects that are at the same level as the ball coupling.
▶ Back up carefully, making sure that trailer drawbar marker assistant ③ points approximately in the direction of trailer drawbar ④.
▶ Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar ④ reaches red guide line ②.
▶ Couple up the trailer (▷ page 264).
360° camera (surround view)
General notes
The 360° camera is a system consisting of four cameras.
The system analyzes images from the following cameras:
- Rear view camera
- Front camera
- Two cameras in the exterior rear view mirrors
The cameras capture the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The system supports you, e.g. when parking or if visio restricted at an exit.
The 360° camera images can be shown in screen mode or in seven different split-scre views on the COMAND display. A split-scre view also includes a top view of the vehicle
This view is calculated from the data sup by the installed cameras (virtual camera).
The seven split-screen views are:
- top view and picture from the rear view camera (130° viewing angle)
- top view and picture from the front cam (without displaying the maximum steering wheel angle)
- top view and enlarged rear view
- top view and enlarged front view
- top view and trailer view (vehicles with trailer tow hitch)
- top view and pictures from the rearward facing mirror cameras (rear wheel view)
• top view and pictures from the forward facing mirror cameras (front wheel view)
The top view and trailer view are available for vehicles equipped with a trailer tow hitch.
When the function is active and you shift transmission from position D or R to N, y see the previous view in the COMAND display. The dynamic guidelines are hidden.
When you change between transmission positions D and R, you see the previously selected front or rear view.
Important safety notes
The 360° camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.
The 360^ camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at ralls It cannot show objects in the following areas:
fulhder the front bumper
• very close to the front bumper • very close to the rear bumper
under the rear bumper
- in close range above the handle on the trunk lid
- very close to the exterior mirrors You are always responsible for safety, and must always pay attention to your era surroundings when parking and maneuvering. This applies to the areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. You
could otherwise endanger yourself and others.
The 360^ camera will not function or will function in a limited manner:
- if the doors are open
- if the exterior mirrors are folded in
- if the trunk lid is open
• in heavy rain, snow or fog
• at night or in very dark places - if the cameras are exposed to very bright light
- if the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED lighting (the display may flicker)
- if you exit a heated garage in winter, resulting in a rapid change in temperature
- if the camera lenses are dirty or covered For further information about the COMAND
- if the vehicle components in which the controller, see the separate COMAND cameras are installed are damaged. In this operating instructions.
event, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not use the 360^ camera in this case. can otherwise injure others or cause dama to objects or the vehicle.
Activation conditions
The 360^ camera image can be displayed
- your vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera
- COMAND is switched on, see the separate COMAND operating instructions
• the 360° Camera function is activated
Activating the 360° camera using the SYS button
▶ Press and hold the SYS button for longer than 2 seconds, see the separate COMAND operating instructions.
Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown:
• full screen display with the image from the front camera
• full screen display with the image from the rear camera
Activating the 360° camera with COMAND
▶ Press the sys button, see the separate COMAND operating instructions.
▶ Select System by turning (◎) the COMAND controller and press 🔒 to confirm.
▶ Select 360° Camera and press 🔒 to confirm.
Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown:
a split screen with top view and the image from the front camera or
- a split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera
For further information about the COMAND controller, see the separate COMAND operating instructions.
Activating the 360° camera using reverse gear
the 360° camera images can be automatically displayed by engaging reverse gear.
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position if: 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Make sure that the Activation by R geargear setting is active in COMAND, see the separate COMAND operating instructions.
▶ To show the 360^ camera image: engage reverse gear.
The COMAND display shows the area behind the vehicle in split screen:
- vehicle with guide lines
• top view of the vehicle
Selecting the split-screen and full screen displays
▶ To switch between split screen views: switch to the line with the vehicle icons by sliding ↑ ⊙ the COMAND controller.
▶ Turn [◎] the COMAND controller and select one of the vehicle symbols.
▶ To switch to full screen mode: select
Full Screen by turning (○) the COMAND controller and press 🔒 to confirm.
Displays in the COMAND display
Important safety notes
! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
• the bumper of a parked vehicle
• the drawbar of a trailer
• the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
• the rear section of an HGV
- a slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.
Top view with picture from the rear camera
text_image
① ② ③ ④ P54.65-4722-31① Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image
② Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
③ Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
④ Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
text_image
t to .g.: P54.65-4723-31⑤ Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle
⑥ Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
⑦ Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
⑧ Bumper
The guide lines are shown when the view transmission is in position R.
The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level.
Top view with picture from the front camera
text_image
Diagram showing a car on the left and a parking lot with numbered lanes (1-6) and a camera interface, likely illustrating vehicle lane navigation or parking layout.① Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and front camera image
② Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the vehicle
③ Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
④ Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
⑤ Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the fr of the vehicle
⑥ Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle
Top view and enlarged rear view
text_image
Desirables Untold below ① ② P54.65-4738-31① Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image enlarged
② Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
This view assists you in estimating the distance to the vehicle behind you.
This setting can also be selected as an enlarged front view.
Top view with picture from the mirror camera
text_image
Street scene with a car and three numbered locations marked ①, ②, ③, showing road markings and a camera interface.① Symbol for the top view and forward-facing mirror camera setting
② Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (right side of vehicle)
③ Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (left side of vehicle)
Top view with trailer view
text_image
① ② ③ P54.65-4724-31① Symbol for the trailer view setting
② Trailer drawbar marker assistant
③ Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the ball coupling
Display with the PARKTRONIC display ATTENTION ASSIST
text_image
Security camera screenshot showing outdoor scene with numbered annotations and date stampExample: full screen mode with PARKTRONIC display
① Symbol for the full screen setting with view camera image
If the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONIC and the function is active (▷ page 224), warning displays ② in the COMAND display
are also active or light up accordingly. PARKTRONIC appears:
- in split screen view as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle icon in the view, or
- in the full screen view, on the right-hand side at the bottom as red or yellow brac around the vehicle icon
The full screen display can also be selected as front view.
Exiting 360° camera display mode
As soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed 19 mph (30 km/h) with the function activated, the function switches off. The COMAND display switches back to the previously selected view. You can also switch the display by selecting the □ symbol display and pressing ⚙ the COMAND controller to confirm.
Important safety notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is active in the range between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests you take a break.
ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking the following criteria into account: rear
- your personal driving style, e.g. steering, characteristics
- journey details, e.g. time of day and length of journey
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It might not always recognize fatigue or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all:
- if the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes
- if there is a strong side wind
- if you have adopted a sporty driving style of with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration
- if you are predominantly driving slower than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than
tch112 mph (180 km/h)
• in the
if you are currently using COMAND or
making a telephone call with it
- if the time has been set incorrectly
- in active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed
Warning and display messages in multifunction display
▶ Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (▷ page 281).
If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, it will not warn you until at least 20 minutes after your journey has begun. You then hear a intermittent warning tone twice and the Attention Assist: Take a Break! message appears in the multifunction display.
If necessary, take a break.
▶ Press the OK or ← button to co the message.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detects increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest.
ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue your journey and starts assessing your tiredness again if:
- you switch off the engine.
- you take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers to take a break.
Night View Assist Plus
General notes
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a gear shift and a numbered component (no visible text or symbols)In addition to the illumination provided by the normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus
theuses infrared light to illuminate the road.
Night View Assist Plus camera ① picks up the infrared light and displays a monochrome image in COMAND. The image displayed in COMAND corresponds to a road lit up by high-beam headlamps. This enables you to see the road's course and any obstacles in good time. If pedestrian recognition is activated, pedestrians recognized by the system are highlighted in the Night View Assist Plus display.
Light from the headlamps of oncoming vehicles does not affect the Night View Assist plus display in the multifunction display. This is also the case if you cannot switch on the high-beam headlamps due to oncoming traffic.
Infrared light is not visible to the human eye and therefore does not glare. Nighter View Assist Plus can therefore remain switched on even if there is oncoming traffic.
Important safety notes
Night View Assist Plus is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. Do not rely on the Night View Assist Plus display. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Drive carefully and always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and traffic conditions.
The system may be impaired or may not function if:
- there is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog or spray
- the windshield is dirty, fogged up or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera
• on bends, on uphill gradients or downhill gradients
Pedestrian recognition may be impaired or inoperative if:
• pedestrians are partially or entirely obscured by objects, e.g. parked vehicles
- the silhouette of the pedestrian in the Ni View Assist Plus display is incomplete or interrupted, e.g. by powerful light reflections
• pedestrians do not contrast adequately from the background
• pedestrians are not in an upright position e.g. sitting, squatting or lying
Activating Night View Assist Plus
Activation conditions
You can only activate Night View Assist Plus if:
- the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. ①
- it is dark.
- the light switch is in the AUTO or D position.
• reverse gear has not been engaged.
Activating Night View Assist Plus
text_image
① P54.25-8741-31▶ Make sure that COMAND is switched on.
▶ Press button ①.
The Night View Assist Plus display appear in the COMAND display.
You can read about how to adjust the brightness of the COMAND display in the COMAND operating instructions.
i The infrared headlamps only switch on when the vehicle is being driven at speeds of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). This means that you do not have the full visual range while the vehicle is stationary and cannot check whether Night View Assist Plus is working.
Pedestrian recognition
text_image
Car dashboard display showing a road scene with numbered annotations pointing to key areas and status indicators.① Night View Assist Plus display
② Pedestrian recognized
③ Framing
④ Symbol for active pedestrian recognition
Animals are not recognized by pedestrian recognition.
Night View Assist Plus is able to recognize pedestrians by typical characteristics, e.g. a silhouette in the shape of a person.
Pedestrian recognition is then switched on automatically if:
• Night View Assist Plus is activated.
- you are driving faster than approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
• the surroundings are dark, e.g. when driving outside built-up areas without street lighting.
If pedestrian recognition is active, symbol ④ appears. If pedestrians are detected, they are highlighted with framing ③. If the pedestrian recognition system has brought a pedestrian to your attention, look through the windshield to evaluate the situation. The actual distance to objects and
pedestrians cannot be gaged accurately by looking at a screen.
It may be the case that objects are highlighted as well as pedestrians.
Fogged up or dirty windshield
If the windshield in front of the camera is fogged up or dirty on the inside or outside, the Night View Assist Plus display is affected.
▶ To defrost: check the automatic air conditioning settings (▷ page 160) and fold down the camera cover (▷ page 381).
▶ To defrost the inside of the windshield: fold down the camera cover (▷ page 381) and clean the windshield (▷ page 379).
Problems with Night View Assist Plus
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The picture quality of Night View Assist Plus has deteriorated. | The windshield wipers are smearing the windshield.▶ Replace the wiper blades (▷ page 141). |
| The windshield is smeared after the vehicle has been clean car wash.▶ Clean the windshield (▷ page 379). | |
| There is windshield chip damage in the camera's field of vis▶ Replace the windshield. | |
| The windshield is fogged up on the inside.▶ Defrost the windshield (▷ page 160). | |
| The windshield is iced up.▶ De-ice the windshield (▷ page 159). | |
| There is dirt on the inside of the windshield.▶ Clean the inside of the windshield (▷ page 379). |
Lane Tracking package
General notes
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (▷ page 243) and Lane Keeping Assist (▷ page 245).
Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the areas on both sides of your vehicle. It supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning
display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive a visual and audible collision warning. Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper for monitoring purposes.
Important safety notes
WARNING
Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
- vehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area
- vehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings in such situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving.
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Monitoring range of the sensors
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if:
- dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
• poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain snow or spray - narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicycles
• the road has very wide lanes
• the road has narrow lanes - you are not driving in the middle of the
- there are barriers or similar lane borders
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then indicated.
text_image
118 in (300 cm) 19.7 in (50 cm) 118 in (300 cm) 19.7 in (50 cm) 118 in (300 cm) P54.70-2611-31Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and direct next to your vehicle, as shown in the diag. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle be indicated, especially if the vehicles are driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles driving at the inner edge of their lanes.
Due to the nature of the system:
- warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders.
- the warning is canceled when driving for an extended period next to long vehicles, such as trucks.
The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the condition of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly.
Indicator and warning display
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a magnified inset showing a key dial (no text or symbols visible)① Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp ① in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist the operational.
may a vehicle is detected within the blind spot not monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp ① on the
corresponding side lights up red. This warning a trailer
is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or correctly established the electrical
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle connection. This can be accomplished by the warning only occurs if the difference in checking the trailer lighting. In this event, speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). Blind Spot Assist is deactivated. The indicator
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse ramp in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot and the Blind Spot Assist Currently Assist is no longer active. Unavailable See Operator's Manual
The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light.
and the Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction display.
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring ra of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp ① flashes. If the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp ①. There are no further warning tones.
i You can deactivate the indicator lamps the exterior mirrors.
To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist when:
- the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock
• the engine is not running
- the electrical connection to the trailer has been established
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
text_image
1 P34.70-2575-31▶ Make sure that the radar sensor system (▷ page 285) and Blind Spot Assist (▷ page 281) are activated in the on-boa computer.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
Warning lamps ① in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing steering wheel and dashboard, with a magnified inset highlighting a numbered component (no text or symbols on the main image)① Lane Keeping Assist camera
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of a camera ① at the top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and warns you before you leave your lane unintentionally.
If you select km on the on-board computer in the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function (▷ page 282), Lane Keeping Assist is active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If th
milesmiles display unit is selected, the ass System may be impaired or may not range begins at 40 mph. function if:
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Important safety notes
WARNING
Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly recognize lane markings.
In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:
- give an unnecessary warning
- not give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and stay in lane, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident.
You should always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
- there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray
- there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet)
- the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera
- there are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work
- the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
- the distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected
- the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge
• the road is narrow and winding
• there are strong shadows cast on the lane
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
▶ Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select of Standard or Adaptive (▷ page 282).
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk an accident nor override the laws of physic Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into accou the road, traffic and weather conditions. La Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehicle in the lane.
es. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph unt(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, nethe lines in the assistance graphics display (▷ page 280) are shown in green. Lane in Keeping Assist is ready for use.
Standard
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:
- you switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.
- a driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP.
Adaptive
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:
- you switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.
- a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP.
- you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
- you brake hard.
- you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid obstacle or change lanes quickly.
- you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
- you approach the outer lane marking on bend.
- the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.
- the system recognizes solid lane markings.
The warning vibration occurs later if:
• the road has narrow lanes.
- you cut the corner on a bend.
Active Driving Assistance package
General notes
The Active Driving Assistance package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 203), Active Blind Spot Assist (▷ page 247) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (▷ page 251).
Active Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the side areas of your vehicle which are behind the driver. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the
monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible
warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. Active Blind Spot Assist evaluates the free space in the direction of travel and to the side before making a course-correcting brake application. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors which are pointed in the direction of travel.
aActive Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h):
Important safety notes
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving.
WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
- vehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area - vehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
- This device may not cause harmful interference, and
- this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Radar sensors
The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors integrated into the front and rear bumpers and behind a cover in the radiator grill. M sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage into particular, the detection of obstacles can the bumpers, have the function of the radabe impaired if:
sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise no longer work properly.
Monitoring area
WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident.
Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.
text_image
ce 118 in (300 cm) not use 118 in (300 cm) 19.7 in (50 cm) 19.7 in (50 cm) are 118 in (300 cm) P54.70-2611-31Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. For this purpose, Active Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if:
- dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
• poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, snow or spray
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the inner edge of your lane.
Due to the nature of the system:
- warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders.
- warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g. trucks, for a prolonged time.
Indicator and warning display
text_image
Car interior view with a magnified inset showing a door panel labeled '1' and directional arrow, likely indicating navigation or movement.Visual and acoustic collision warning
text_image
Car interior panel with directional arrow and numbered component, likely indicating navigation or positioning① Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp ① in the exterior mirrors lie up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out an Active Blind Spot Assist is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind sp monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp ① on the corresponding side lights up red. This warn is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind on
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, A course-correcting brake application cannot the warning only occurs if the difference in always prevent a collision. There is a risk of speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). an accident.
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if rever gear is engaged. In this event, Active Blind Spot Assist is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light.
If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You then hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp ① flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp ①. There are no further warning tones.
Course-correcting brake application
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.
WARNING
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. Always maintain a safe distance
at the sides.
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a door panel and a circular annotation highlighting a numbered component (no readable text or symbols)
text_image
R N P < D C 254 32-9919-31If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp ① flashes in the exterior mirror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, display ② underlining the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display.
In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. A course-correcting brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly the opposite direction or accelerate.
The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km
Either no braking application, or a course-correcting brake application adapted to the driving situation occurs if:
- there are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle.
- a vehicle approaches you too closely at side.
-
you have adopted a sporty driving style high cornering speeds.
-
you clearly brake or accelerate.
- a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.
- ESP ^ is switched off.
- the off-road program is activated (vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD package).
- off-road program 1 or 2 is activated (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).
- the LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).
- a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected.
Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
text_image
1 P34.70-2575-31Make sure that the radar sensor system (▷ page 285) and Active Blind Spot Assist an (▷ page 281) are activated in the on-board computer.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
Warning lamps ① in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
Towing a trailer
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. Active Blind Spot Assist is then deactivated. The indicator lamp lights up yellow in the exterior mirrors and the Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual with message appears in the multifunction display.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can:
- give an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle
• not give a warning or intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you.
Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of function if:
camera ① at the top of the windshield. Active is poor visibility, e.g. due to Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on insufficient illumination of the road, or due the road and warns you before you leave you to snow, rain, fog or spray
lane unintentionally. If you do not react to warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane.
If you select km in the Display Unit
Speed-/Odometer:Speed-/Odometer:function
computer (▷ page 282), Active Lane Keeping. Assist is activated starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph.
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of
physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously keep your vehicle in its lane.
the there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet)
- the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the on the onboard vicinity of the camera
there are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work - the lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
e the distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected
the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge
• the road is narrow and winding
- there are highly variable shade conditions on the roadway
- no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and there are broken lane markings
Warning vibration in the steering wheel
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you
WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings.
by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
- you approach the outer lane marking on bend.
- the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.
- the system recognizes solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if:
• the road has narrow lanes. - you cut the corner on a bend.
Lane-correcting brake application
WARNING
A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you or makes a lane-correcting brake application.
WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect traffic conditions or road users. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application, e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid lane marking. There is a risk of an accident.
An inappropriate brake application may be if interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.
text_image
① R N P D C P54 32-9820-31If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display ① appears in the multifunction display.
If you leave your lane, under certain circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle back to the original lane.
This function is available in the range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).
A lane-correcting brake application can only be made after driving over a solid, recognizable lane marking. Before this, a warning must be given by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognized. The brake application also slightly reduces vehicle speed.
e i A further lane-correcting brake application can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane.
No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:
• you clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate.
- you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
- you have switched on the turn signal.
- a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.
- you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration.
- ESP® is switched off.
- the transmission is not in position D.
- on vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the electrical connection to the trailer has been correctly established.
- the off-road program is activated (vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD package).
- off-road program 1 or 2 is activated (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).
- the LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package).
- a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has you cut the corner on a sharp bend. been detected and displayed.
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:
- you switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for certain period of time.
- a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP.
- you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
- you brake hard.
- you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly.
has you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect traffic situations or road users. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you:
• steer slightly in the opposite direction
- switch on the turn signal
- clearly brake or accelerate
A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if:
- a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.
- lane markings can no longer be recognized
Towing a trailer
When you attach a trailer, make sure you correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting.
On-road programs (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package)
General notes
The on-road programs assist you during on-road driving and the off-road programs when driving off-road (▷ page 258).
The following program messages remain in iste multifunction display until the
Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assi
▶ Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select to Standard or Adaptive (▶ page 282).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphics display (▷ page 280) are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use.
Corresponding vehicle level has been set. Up to off-road level 2, you can hide the program messages using the ← or OK button of the multifunction steering wheel.
When Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:
- you switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time.
- a driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP
AUTO program
text_image
AUTO 1 2 P54.25-8588-31
text_image
COMFORT 0 ≡ AUTO R P54.32-9813-37Select the AUTO program for a more comfortable ride under all normal driving conditions.
Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
▶ Selector wheel ① engaged: briefly press selector wheel ①.
Selector wheel ① extends.
▶ To select: turn selector wheel ① until indicator lamp ② comes on.
AUTO indicator ③ appears in the multifunction display.
- Highway level is set. - ADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts comfortable damping characteristics to the current operating and driving conditions.
- The automatic transmission selects the automatic drive program for a comfortable driving style that provides for optimum fuel consumption.
SPORT program
text_image
SPORT ① ② P54.25-8589-31
text_image
SPORT SPORT ③—SPORT R P54.32-9814537Select the SPORT program for sporty, dynamic handling.
Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
▶ Selector wheel ① engaged: briefly press selector wheel ①. Selector wheel ① extends.
▶ To select: turn selector wheel ① until indicator lamp ② comes on. SPORT indicator ③ appears in the multifunction display.
- High-speed level, -15 mm compared to highway level, is set.
- ADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts sporty damping characteristics to the current operating and driving conditions.
- The automatic transmission selects the automatic drive program for a sporty driving style.
• The sporty accelerator pedal curve is selected, e.g. the accelerator pedal no
longer has to be pressed as far to accelerate.
- The sporty steering curve is selected, e.g. greater force is required when steering.
You cannot select the SPORT program if LOW RANGE has been selected. The Drive Program SPORT Not in LOW RANGERANGE message then appears in the multifunction display.
Snow program
text_image
2 1 P54.25-8606-31
text_image
COMFORT 0≡ ③—SNOW R P54-32-9815-31Select the snow program for driving in snow with or without snow chains.
▶ Selector wheel ① engaged: briefly press selector wheel ①. Selector wheel ① extends.
▶ To select: turn selector wheel ① until indicator lamp ② comes on. Snow indicator ③ appears in the multifunction display.
- Highway level is set. - ADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts comfortable damping characteristics to the current operating and driving conditions.
- 4ETS and the differential lock are adapted for driving on snow-covered roads.
- The automatic transmission selects the automatic drive program for a comfortable driving style that provides for optimum fuel consumption.
- The soft accelerator pedal curve is selected, e.g. the accelerator pedal must be pressed significantly further to accelerate.
• The optimum gear for pulling away is engaged.
Trailer program
text_image
Diagram of car gear shift lever with labeled parts and a magnified inset showing component details
text_image
COMFORT 0 ≡ ③ TRAILER R P54.32-9816-57Select the trailer program when towing a trailer.
▶ Selector wheel ① engaged: briefly press selector wheel ①. Selector wheel ① extends.
▶ To select: turn selector wheel ① until indicator lamp ② comes on. Trailer indicator ③ appears in the multifunction display.
• Highway level is set.
- ADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts comfortable damping characteristics to the current operating and driving conditions.
- The automatic transmission selects the automatic drive program for a comfortable driving style that provides for optimum fuel consumption, changing gear at optimum points.
- While pulling away, the differential locks are engaged.
otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system.
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with E5 and 4ETS, it improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip.
In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary.
Further information about "Driving off-road" (▷ page 197).
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
Off-road driving systems
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MA can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instruction for towing the vehicle with all wheels in contact with the ground.
A function or performance test should only be carried out on a two-axle dynamometer. Before you operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified workshop. You could
Important safety notes
^g DSR assists you when driving downhill. It keeps the speed of travel at the speed set on the on-board computer. The steeper the downhill gradient, the greater the DSR braking effect on the vehicle. When driving on flat stretches of road or on an uphill gradient, the DSR braking effect is minimal or nonexistent.
- DSR controls the set speed when it is active and the automatic transmission is in the D, R or N position. By accelerating or braking, you can always drive at a higher or a lower speed than that set on the on-board computer.
Further information about "Driving off-road" (▷ page 197).
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. DSR cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. DSR is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
You are always responsible for keeping control of the vehicle and for assessing whether the downhill gradient can be managed. DSR may not always be able to keep to the set speed, depending on road
surface and tire conditions. Select a set speed suitable for the prevailing conditions and when necessary, apply the brakes manually.
If the current vehicle speed is too high, the DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display with the Max. Speed 25 mph message (Canada: 40 km/h).
WARNING
If the speed driven and the set speed devia and you activate DSR on a slippery road surface, the wheels may lose traction. If the wheels lose traction, the vehicle can no long be steered. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Never activate DSR on slippery road surfaces.
You cannot activate DSR if the SPORT to road program is activated. The DSR symbol and the Not in Drive Program SPORTSPORT message then appear in the gemultifunction display.
Deactivating DSR
▶ Press button ①. Indicator lamp ② goes out.
The DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display with the OffOff message.
Activating DSR
WARNING
If you drive faster than the set speed and activate DSR, the vehicle will decelerate on downhill gradients. If you do not know the speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident
DSR switches off automatically if you drive faster than 28 mph (Canada: 45 km/h). The DSR symbol appears in the Decelerate the vehicle to the set speed before the status indicator in the multifunction activating DSR. If you do not know what the display goes out. You also hear a warning. On stored set speed is, store the desired set speed again. vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package, if you select a different on-road/off-road program, DSR is also deactivated.
text_image
① DSR ② P54.25-8482-31Example: vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package
Indicator lamp ② lights up.
The DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display.
You can only activate DSR when driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Changing the set speed
text_image
① ② P54 25-8746-31
text_image
③ DSR 10 mph R N P D P54.35-2635-31▶ To increase or decrease in 1 mph Off-road program 1
increments (Canada: 1 km/h
increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up ① for a higher set speed or down ② for a lower set speed. The set speed appears in the multifunction display with the DSR symbol. It is also displayed in status indicator ③.
When DSR is activated, you can change the set speed to a value between 1 mph and 11 mph (Canada: between 2 km/h and 18 km/h).
The DSR set speed is always changed in 1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/h increments). This is regardless of whether you press the cruise control lever to or beyond the pressure point.
Off-road programs (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package)
General notes
The off-road programs assist you in driving off-road. The engine's performance characteristics and the gearshifting characteristics of the automatic transmission are adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESD 4ETS programs especially adapted to off-road driving are activated. An accelerator pedal curve suitable for the terrain is selected, i.e. the accelerator pedal must be depressed further to accelerate.
Do not use the off-road programs on roadsOff-road program 1 switches to the AUTO that are snow-covered or icy or if you have program if you drive faster than 70 mph mounted snow chains on your vehicle. (110 km/h).
For information on driving off-road, see (▷ page 197).
The following program messages are shown in the multifunction display until the applicable vehicle level is set. Up to off-roa level 2, you can hide the program message
using the ← or the OK button on multifunction steering wheel.
text_image
1 2 P54.25-8486-31
text_image
COMFORT 1 E OFFROAD 1 Max. 60 mph R P54.32-9817-5▶ Selector wheel ① engaged: briefly press selector wheel ①. Selector wheel ① extends.
To select: turn selector wheel ① until indicator lamp ② comes on. Off-road indicator ③ appears in the multifunction display.
Off-road level 1 is set to +1.2 in (+30 mm) above the highway level.
Select off-road program 1 for gentle off-road terrain, e.g. for gravel or sand surfaces or tracks. The engine's torque is restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels can spin. The spinning wheels produce a cutting effect for better traction.
Moa can only activate off-road program 1 when driving at speeds of 60 mph (100 km/h) or below. The Drive Program OFFROAD 1 Max. 60 mph (100 km/h)
message appears in the multifunction display.
Off-road program 2
text_image
① ② P54.25-8593-31
text_image
COMFORT 2≡ OFFROAD 2 Max. 25 mph P54-32-9818-37▶ Selector wheel ① engaged: briefly press selector wheel ①. Selector wheel ① extends.
▶ To select: turn selector wheel ① until indicator lamp ② comes on. Off-road indicator ③ appears in the multifunction display.
- Off-road level 1 is set to +2.4 in (+60 mm) above the highway level.
- DSR is switched on.
• The differential lock is closed.
Off-road program 2 automatically switches off-road program 1 if you drive faster than 30 mph (45 km/h).
Select off-road program 2 for rough terrain, e.g. for steep and/or rough terrain or driving on rocky terrain.
Your vehicle has an automatically activated differential lock for the transfer
case. It controls the balance between the front and rear axles.
The differential lock improves the vehicle's traction. 4ETS (▷ page 72) controls the balance between both wheels on an axle.
You can only activate off-road program 2 when driving at speeds of 25 mph (40 km/h) or below.
LOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package)
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you select the LOW RANGE off-road gear on a slippery road surface, the wheels could lose traction:
- if you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal when driving
- if off road ABS intervenes when braking. If the wheels lose traction, the vehicle can no longer be steered. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Never select the LOW RANGE off-road gear when driving on slippery road surfaces.
WARNING
If you do not wait for the transfer case gear change process to complete, the transfer case could remain in the neutral position. The power transmission to the driven wheels is then interrupted. There is a danger of the vehicle rolling away unintentionally. There is a risk of an accident.
Wait until the transfer case shift process is completed.
Do not turn off the engine while changing gear and do not shift the automatic transmission to another position.
General notes
text_image
1 LOW RANGE 2 P54.25-8488-31① LOW RANGE off-road gear button
② LOW RANGE off-road gear indicator lamp
| HIGH RANGE | Position for all normal on-road driving conditions |
| LOW RANGE | Off-road position for driving off-road and fordingThe transmission ratio between the engine and wheels is only approximately one third of that in the HIGH RANGE road position. Drive torque is thus proportionately higher.Do not use LOW RANGE:on slippery road surfaces, e.g. in the cas of slushon snow or ice-covered roadsif you have mounted snow chains to your vehicle |
The LOW RANGE off-road gear assists you in driving off-road and when fording. When LOW RANGE is engaged, the engine's performance characteristics and the gearshifting characteristics of the automatic transmission are adapted for this purpose.
Further information about "Driving off-road" (▷ page 197). You will find information about driving safety systems in conjunction with LOW RANGE in the "Safety" section (▷ page 66).
From HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE
! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE if:
• the engine is running.
• the transmission is in position N
- you are driving at a speed below 40 km/h
▶ Press LOW RANGE button ①.
Indicator lamp ② flashes.
When the gear change is complete, indicator lamp ② lights up. LOW RANGE indicator appears in the multifunction display and in the status indicator.
While indicator lamp ② is flashing, you can cancel the gear change by pressing LOW RANGE button ① again.
You cannot activate LOW RANGE if the SPORT on-road program is activated. The LOW RANGE Not in Drive Program SPORTSPORT message then appears in the multifunction display.
From LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE
! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE if:
• the engine is running.
• the transmission is in position N
- you are driving at a speed below 70 km/h
▶ Press LOW RANGE button ①. Indicator lamp ② flashes.
When the gear change is complete, indicator lamp ② goes out. In the multifunction display, the LOW RANGE Off message appears and status indicator ③ goes out.
While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can cancel the gear change by pressing LOW RANGE button : again.
Messages in the multifunction display
If a gear change process has not been successful, the following messages may be displayed in the multifunction display:
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| LOW RANGE Max. Speed 40 km/h | You have been driving faster than 40 km/h. Additionally, the indicator lamp on the button in the center console blinks. ▶Drive more slowly to carry out the gear change process. |
| LOW RANGE Shift to Position N Briefly | The transmission is in position D and you are driving at below 40 km/h. ▶Shift the transmission to N to complete the gear change process. |
| LOW RANGE Shifting Canceled Please Cancel ReactivateReactivateReactivate | The gear change process was not carried out. ▶Ensure that all gear change conditions are fulfilled and carry out the gear change process again. |
| LOW RANGE Stop Apply Parking Brake | A warning tone also sounds. The gear change process has not been completed. LOW RANGE is in the neutral position. There is no connection between the engine and the drive wheels. ! Do not drive any further. You could otherwise damage the vehicle's drive train. ▶Stop the vehicle. Take into account the road and traffic conditions when doing this. ▶Depress the electric parking brake (▶ page 189). ▶Carry out the gear change process again. If the gear change process has been carried out, the LOW RANGE Stop Apply Parking Brake message disappears. |
ON&OFFROAD menu in the COMAND display (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package)
text_image
① P54.25-8627-31You can display some driving systems, driving programs and additional information in the COMAND display.
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Make sure that COMAND is activated, see the separate COMAND operating instructions.
▶ Press function button ①.
The corresponding displays appear in the COMAND display:
- level control
- steering angle
-
vehicle's angle of inclination
-
uphill or downhill gradient in percentage
- on-road/off-road program selected
• condition of the differential lock for the transfer case - the LOW RANGE off-road gear is selec
• condition of the LOW RANGE off-road gear - the on-road trailer program is selected
because the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time.
Towing a trailer
Important safety notes
WARNING
Installing an unsuitable ball coupling may result in overloading of the trailer tow hitch and the rear axle. This applies especially if ball coupling in question is longer or angled differently. This could seriously impair the driving characteristics and the trailer can come loose. There is a risk of an accident. You should only ever install a ball coupling that has the permissible dimensions and that is designed to meet your trailer-towing requirements. Do not modify the ball coupling or the trailer tow hitch.
You will find the values approved by the manufacturer on the vehicle identification plates and those for the towing vehicle "Technical data" (▷ page 457).
WARNING
If the ball coupling is not installed correctly not secured with the bolt provided and the corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
Always install and secure the ball coupling as described. Before every journey, ensure that m the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and the corresponding spring cotter.
WARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even
WARNING
When the vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehicle/trailer combination could even rollover. There is a risk of an accident. On no account should you attempt to straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle speed and do not countersteer. Apply the brake as necessary.
Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads.
Please observe the manufacturer's operating instructions for the trailer coupling if a detachable trailer coupling is used.
Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer could become detached.
Make sure that the following values are not exceeded:
de the permissible trailer drawbar noseweight
• the permissible trailer load
- the permissible rear axle load of the towing or vehicle
- the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of both the towing vehicle and the trailer
a) the applicable permissible values, which must not be exceeded, can be found:
^q in the vehicle documents
- on the identification plates for the trailer tow hitch and the trailer
• on the vehicle identification plate
if the values differ, the lowest value applies.
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling vehicle for a maximum load; see the tire characteristics will be different in comparison pressure table in the fuel filler flap with when driving without a trailer. (▷ page 425).
The vehicle/trailer combination:
- is heavier
• is restricted in its acceleration and gradient-climbing capability
• has an increased braking distance
• is affected more by strong crosswinds
• demands more sensitive steering
• has a larger turning radius
This could impair the handling characteristics.
When towing a trailer, always adjust your speed to the current road and weather conditions. Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed for your vehicle/trailer combination.
Notes on towing a trailer
General notes
- Do not exceed the legally prescribed maximum speed for vehicle/trailer combinations in the relevant country. This lowers the risk of an accident.
- Only install an approved trailer coupling your vehicle.
Further information on availability and on installation is available from any authorize Mercedes-Benz Center.
- The bumpers of your vehicle are not suitable for installing detachable trailer couplings.
- Do not install hired trailer couplings or other detachable trailer couplings on the bumpers of your vehicle.
- If you no longer need the ball coupling, remove it from the ball coupling recess. This will reduce the risk of damage to a ball coupling.
When towing a trailer, set the tire pressure on the rear axle of the towing
Please note that when towing a trailer, PARKTRONIC (▷ page 222) and Blind Spot Assist (▷ page 243) are only available with limitations, or not at all.
You will find installing dimensions and loads under "Technical data" (▷ page 456).
Driving tips
i Observe the information on ES® trailer stabilization (▷ page 74) and on pulling away with a trailer (▷ page 170).
The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on the type of trailer. Before beginning the journey, check the trailer's documents to see what the maximum permissible speed is. Observe the legally prescribed maximum speed in the relevant country.
For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maximum permissible rear axle load is increased when towing a trailer. See "Technical data" to find out whether this applies to your vehicle ( page 457). If you utilize any of the added maximum rear axle load when towing a trailer, the vehicle/trailer combination may not exceed a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for vehicle/trailer combinations is above 60 mph (100 km/h). When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison with when driving without a trailer.
Use the left-hand paddle shifter to shift into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients.
This also applies if you have activated cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS.
This will use the braking effect of the engine, so that less braking will be required to maintain the speed. This relieves the load on
the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously.
Driving tips
If the trailer swings from side to side:
▶ Do not accelerate.
▶ Do not counter-steer.
▶ Brake if necessary.
- Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer.
- Avoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run. Then, increase the braking force rapidly.
- The values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine and, consequently, the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability, decreases with increasing altitude.
the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and If the corresponding spring cotter.
WARNING
If the ball coupling is not installed and secured correctly the trailer may come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
Install and secure the ball coupling as described in the ball coupling installation instructions. Make sure that the ball coupling is installed and secured correctly before every journey.
text_image
a on. ①← P31.10-3392-31Installing the ball coupling
WARNING
If the ball coupling is not correctly installed and secured, it can come loose during the journey and endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always install and secure the ball coupling as described. Before every journey, ensure that the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and the corresponding spring cotter.
Cover cap
▶ Pull protective cap ① in the direction of the arrow, out of the ball coupling recess.
▶ Place protective cap ① in the ball coupling recess.
WARNING
If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or not secured with the bolt provided and the corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may come loose. There is a risk of an accident.
Always install and secure the ball coupling as described. Before every journey, ensure that
text_image
P31.10-3393-31Ball coupling recess
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior component with a blue arrow pointing to a valve, shown in a magnified inset (no text or symbols)Bolt and spring cotter
text_image
P31.10-3394-31Holes in the ball coupling and ball coupling recess
text_image
Secure the bolt using spring cotter ⑥. P31.10-3369-31Ball Correctly installed and secured ball coupling Check the ball coupling, bolt and spring are cotter for correct installation.
▶ Insert the ball coupling horizontally into I coupling recess ② in the direction of the arrow until the holes in ball coupling ③ in line with the holes in ball coupling recess ④.
text_image
P31.10-3424-31Bolt
▶ Slide bolt ⑤ into the hole in the ball coupling recess and the ball coupling to stop.
If the ball coupling cannot be correctly mounted, remove the ball coupling. Under these circumstances, the ball coupling must not be used for trailer towing.
If the ball coupling cannot be locked and the key cannot be removed, remove the ball coupling and clean it. If the ball coupling can still not be installed (locked) after it has been cleaned, remove the ball coupling. The trailer tow hitch must then not be used to tow a trailer, as safe operation cannot be guaranteed.
Have the entire trailer tow hitch checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
the
Coupling up a trailer
! Do not connect the trailer's brake system (if featured) to the hydraulic brake system
of the towing vehicle, as the latter is equipped with an anti-lock brake system.
Doing so will result in a loss of function the brake systems of both the vehicle and the trailer.
Leave enough play in the chains to make tight cornering possible.
of A separate brake system for certain types of trailer.
- A safety switch for braked trailers. Check in the specific legal requirements applicable to your state.
If the trailer detaches from the towing vehicle, the safety switch applies the trailer's brakes.
▶ Make sure that the automatic transmission is set to position P.
▶ Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.
▶ Start the engine.
▶ Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: select highway level.
▶ Vehicles with ADS: set ADS to AUTO COMF.
▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Close all doors and the tailgate.
▶ Couple up the trailer.
▶ Establish all electrical connections.
▶ Check that the trailer lighting system is working.
i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: with a trailer attached, the vehicle will always remain at highway level. When coupling up a trailer, please observe the following:
- Unless highway level has been set manually, the vehicle is automatically lowered to highway level. This is the case if a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) is reached
- High-speed level is not available. - Backing up
These restrictions apply to all accessories • B powered through a connection to the trailer power socket of your vehicle, e.g. a bicycle carrier.
Observe the maximum permissible trailer dimensions (width and length).
Most U.S. states and all Canadian provinces require by law:
- Safety chains between the towing vehicle and the trailer. The chains should be cro wound under the trailer drawbar. They m be fastened to the vehicle's trailer coupling, not to the bumper or the axle.
of towing a trailer
There are numerous legal requirements concerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speed restrictions. Make sure that your vehicle/trailer combination complies with the local requirements not only in your area of residence but also at any location to which you are traveling. The police and local authorities can provide reliable information. Please observe the following when towing a trailer:
- In order to accumulate driving experience and accustom yourself to the new handling characteristics, practice the following at a location where there is no traffic:
se Cornering ed. Stopping
- Backing up
- Before driving, check:
the trailer tow hitch
e- the safety switch for braked trailers
- the safety chains
- electrical connections
- the lights
- the wheels
- Adjust the exterior mirrors to provide an unobstructed view of the rear section of the ss trailer.
- If the trailer has electronically controlled brakes, pull away carefully. Brake manually using the brake controller and check whether the brakes function correctly.
- Secure any objects on the trailer to prevent the cargo from slipping when the vehicle in motion.
- If you couple up a trailer, regularly check that the cargo is securely fastened and make sure that the trailer lamps and (if applicable) the trailer brakes are functioning correctly.
- Bear in mind that the handling will be less stable when towing a trailer than when driving without one. Avoid sudden steering movements.
- The vehicle/trailer combination is heavier, accelerates more slowly, has a decreased gradient climbing capability and a longer braking distance.
It is more susceptible to side winds and requires more careful steering.
- If possible, avoid abrupt braking. Depress the brake pedal moderately at first, so that the trailer can activate its own brakes. The increase the pressure on the brake pedal.
- If the automatic transmission repeatedly shifts between gears on uphill or downhill gradients, shift to a lower gear using the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.
A lower gear and lower speed reduce the risk of engine failure.
- When driving downhill, shift to a lower ge to utilize the engine's braking effect. Avoid continuous brake application as this may overheat the vehicle brakes and, if installed, the trailer brakes.
- If the coolant temperature increases dramatically while the air-conditioning system is switched on, switch off the air-conditioning system.
Coolant heat can additionally be dissipated by opening the windows and by setting the blower fan and the interior temperature to maximum.
- When overtaking, pay particular attention to the extended length of your vehicle/trailer combination.
nDue to the length of your vehicle/trailer combination, you will have to travel an additional distance beyond the vehicle you are overtaking before returning to the previous lane.
Decoupling a trailer
WARNING
If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun brake engaged, you could trap your hand between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. There is a risk of injury.
Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brake is engaged.
WARNING
Vehicles with level control:
The vehicle is lowered as soon as you at disconnect the trailer cable. This could result in your limbs or those of other people that are between the vehicle body and tires or underneath the vehicle being trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the immediate vicinity of the wheel housings or under the vehicle when you disconnect the trailer cable.
Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun brake.
▶ Make sure that the automatic transmission is set to position P.
▶ Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake.
▶ Start the engine.
- Close all doors and the tailgate.
- Apply the trailer's parking brake.
- Detach the trailer cable and decouple the trailer.
▶ Switch off the engine.
Permissible trailer loads and drawback checking the vehicle and trailer weight loads • To check that the weights of the towing
Weight specifications
Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating
The gross trailer weight is calculated by adding the weight of the trailer to the weight of the load and equipment on the trailer. • You will find installing dimensions and loads under "Technical data" (▷ page 456).
- To check that the weights of the towing vehicle and the trailer comply with the maximum permissible values, have the vehicle/trailer combination (including the driver, passengers, and cargo with a fully laden trailer) weighed on a calibrated weighbridge.
- Check the gross axle weight rating of the front and rear axles, the gross weight of the trailer and trailer drawbar load.
Permissible noseweight
You will find installing dimensions and loads under "Technical data" (▷ page 456).
Removing the ball coupling
▶ Remove the spring cotter.
▶ Remove the bolt from the ball coupling recess.
Loading a trailer
- When loading the trailer, make sure that neither the permissible gross weight of t trailer nor the gross vehicle weight is exceeded. The permissible gross vehicle weight is indicated on the identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side the vehicle.
You can find the maximum permissible values on the type plates of your vehicle and the trailer. When calculating how much weight the vehicle and trailer may carry, pay attention to the respective lowest values.
▶ Remove the ball coupling from the ball the coupling recess.
▶ Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty.
▶ Stow the ball coupling so that it cannot be thrown around.
Observe the loading guidelines
(▷ page 340) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (▷ page 341).
Information on cleaning and care of the trailer tow hitch can be found at (▷ page 381).
- The trailer drawbar load on the ball cou must be added to the rear axle load to exceeding the permissible gross axle weight. The permissible gross vehicle weight is indicated on the identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a trailer load where the trailer drawbar noseweight accounts for 8% to 15% of the trailer's permissible gross weight.
The weight of additional accessories, passengers, and cargo reduces the permissible trailer load and drawbar load for your vehicle.
Storing the ball coupling
avoid WARNING
Do not carry the ball coupling in the vehicle interior if it is not secured.
Otherwise, you and others could be injured by the ball coupling being thrown around if you:
- brake sharply
- change direction suddenly
• are involved in an accident
Trailer power supply
You can connect accessories with a maximum power consumption of 240 W to the permanent power supply. You must not charge a trailer battery using the power supply.
The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped at the factory with a permanent power supply. The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 4.
The trailer's permanent power supply is switched off in the event of low vehicle supply voltage and after six hours at the latest.
A qualified specialist workshop can provide more information about installing the trailer electrics.
Useful information 272
Important safety notes 27
Displays and operation 27
Menus and submenus 27
Display messages 290
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 324
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 28).
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not operating safely may cause an accident.
the For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (▷ page 33).
Displays and operation
Instrument cluster lighting
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the brightness control knob.
The brightness control knob is located on the bottom left of the instrument cluster (▷ page 33).
▶ Turn the brightness control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise.
If the light switch is set to AUTO, 300 or D, the brightness is dependent upon the brightness of the ambient light.
i The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of is the multifunction display.
In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not illuminated.
Coolant temperature display
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the on-board computer.
The on-board computer only shows messages temperature is too high. or warnings from certain systems in the
! A display message is shown if the coolant
If the coolant temperature is over 248 °F(120 °C), do not continue driving. engine will otherwise be damaged.
The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the right-hand side (▷ page 33).
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 °F (120 °C).
Tachometer
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display
You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point.
The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (▷ page 274).
Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay.
Speedometer with segments
The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available.
• Cruise control activated (▷ page 201):
The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed.
• DISTRONIC PLUS activated (▷ page 203):
One or two segments in the set speed range light up.
• DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:
The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up.
Operating the on-board computer
The
Overview
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 P46.10-3174-31① Multifunction display
② Switches on the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions
③ Right control panel
④ Left control panel
⑤ Back button
▶ To activate the on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
Left control panel
| • Calls up the menu and menu ba | |
| Press briefly:• Scrolls in lists• Selects a submenu or function• In the Audio menu: selects a stored station, an audio track or a video scene• In the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number | |
| Press and hold:• In the Audio menu: selects the previous/next station or selects an audio track or a video scene using rapid scrolling• In the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open | |
| OK | • Confirms a selection/display message• In the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialing the selected number• In the Audio menu: stops the station search function at the desired station |
Right control panel
| • Rejects or ends a call• Exits phone book/redial memory | |
| • Makes or accepts a call• Switches to the redial memory |
- Adjusts the volume
- Mute
Back button
 | Press briefly:BackSwitches off the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructionsHides display messages/calls up the lastTripmenu function usedExits the telephone book/redial memory |
 | Press and hold:Calls up the standard display in theTripTripmenu |
Press briefly:
Press and hold:
Multifunction display
text_image
10:30 70.5 °F 123.0 miles 26753 Trip Navi Audio Tel R N P D S P54 32-9637-31① Time
② Permanent display: outside temperature or speed (▷ page 283)
③ Text field
④ Menu bar
⑤ Drive program (▷ page 173)
⑥ Transmission position (▷ page 173)
▶ To show menu bar ④: press the
or ▶ button on the steering wheel.
- ON&OFFROAD menu (▷ page 286)
- AMG menu in AMG vehicles (▷ page 287)
Menu bar ④ disappears after a few seconds.
Text field ③ shows the selected menu or submenu as well as display messages.
You can set the time using the audio system or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions.
The following messages may appear in the multifunction display:
←P→ Active Parking Assist (▷ page 226)
CRUISE CR Cruise control (▷ page 201)
LOWLOW LOW RANGE off-road gear RANGERANGE page 259)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist (▷ page 134)
HOLD HOLD function (▷ page 216)
Menus and submenus
Menu overview
Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to call up the menu bar and select a menu.
Operating the on-board computer (▷ page 273).
Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus
- TripTrip menu (▷ page 275)
- NaviNavi menu (navigation instructions) (▷ page 277)
• AudioAudio menu (▷ page 278) - Tel menu (telephone) (▷ page 279)
- DriveAssistDriveAssist menu (assistance) (▷ page 280)
- ServServ menu (▷ page 282)
- Sett menu (settings) (▷ page 282)
Trip menu
Standard display
text_image
123.0 — miles — 26753 ① ② P54.33-2597-31▶ Press and hold the ← button on steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip odometer ① and odometer ② is shown.
Trip computer "From Start" or "From Reset"
text_image
From Start 150 mi 1:30 h 31.6 mpg 60 mph 4 3 P54.33-2598-31Example: trip computer "From Start"
① Distance
② Time
③ Average speed
④ Average fuel consumption
■:Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
▶ Press ▲ or ▼ to select From Start or From Reset.
The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey, while the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (▷ page 276).
The From Start trip computer is automatically reset when:
- the ignition has been switched off for than four hours.
• 999 hours have been exceeded.
• 9,999 miles have been exceeded.
The From Reset trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles.
ECO display
text_image
ECO DISPLAY 62 % From Start Acceleration Constant Coasting P54.33-2599-31Example: ECO display
The ECO display is not available for AMG vehicles.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
▶ Select ECO DISPLAY with ▲ or ▼.
If the ignition remains switched off for long than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset.
For further information on the ECO display, see (▷ page 192).
Displaying the range and current fuel consumption
text_image
Range 185 mi Consumption mpg 0 10 20 30 40 P54.33-2600-31▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select current fuel consumption (not for AMG vehicles) and the approximate range.
The approximate range that can be covered depends on the fuel level and your current
driving style. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being refueled instead of the range.
Digital speedometer
text_image
↑4—① 56—② mph P54.33-2601-31① Shift recommendation (▷ page 178)
② Digital speedometer
Gearshift recommendation ① is not given on AMG vehicles.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the digital speedometer.
Resetting values
text_image
Reset Values? No Yes FROM START P54.33-2602-31Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the function that you wish to reset.
▶ Press the OK button.
▶ Press the ▼ button to select Yes and press the OK button to confirm.
You can reset the values of the following functions:
-
Trip odometer
• "From Start" trip computer -
"From Reset" trip computer
- ECO display
③ Current road
④ "Follow the road's course" symbol
If you reset the values in the ECO disp the values in the "From start" trip comp are also reset. If you reset the values in "From start" trip computer, the values in the ECO display are also reset.
Change of direction announced without a iter lane recommendation
Navigation system menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions.
For more information, see the separate operating instructions.
▶ Switch on the audio system with Becker MAP PILOT or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu.
Route guidance not active
text_image
Direct. of Travel ①—NE ② MERCEDES DRIVE P54.33-24 19-31① Direction of travel
② Current road
Route guidance active
No change of direction announced
flowchart
graph TD
A["1"] -->|181 mi| B["4"]
B --> C["3"]
C -->|3 mi| D["2"]
style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
① Distance to the destination
② Distance to the next change of direction
text_image
Mercedes DRIVE ① ③ 800 ft ② P54.33-2421-31① Road into which the change of direction leads
② Distance to change of direction and visual distance display
③ Change-of-direction symbol
When a change of direction is announced, you will see symbol ③ for the change of direction and distance graphic ②. The distance indicator shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction.
Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation
text_image
M5-E ① 800 ft ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ P54.33-2422-31① Road into which the change of direction leads
② Distance to change of direction and visual distance display
③ New lane during a change of direction
④ Uninterrupted lane
⑤ Lane recommendation
⑥ Change-of-direction symbol
On multilane roads, the system can display lane recommendation ③ for the next change of direction. During the change of direction, additional lanes may be displayed.
Lane recommendations are only displayed if the relevant data is available on the digital map.
Other status indicators of the navigation system
• ☐: you have reached the destination or intermediate destination.
- New Route... or Calculating Route: calculating a new route
- Off Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicle position is outside the area of the digital map (off-map position).
- No Route: no route could be calculated to the selected destination.
▶ To select a station from the station list: press and briefly hold the ▲ or ▼ button.
If no station list is received:
▶ To select a station using the station search: press and briefly hold the ▲ and ▼ button.
For information on switching waveband and storing stations; see the separate operating instructions.
i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normal radio.
For more information on satellite radio operation, see the separate operating instructions.
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
text_image
FM 1: 97.1 MHz ① ② P54.33-2423-31① Waveband
② Station frequency with memory position
i Station ② is displayed with the station frequency or station name. The memory position is only displayed along with station ② if this has been stored.
▶ Switch on COMAND and select Radio; see the separate operating instructions.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
▶ To select a stored station: briefly press the ▲ or ▼ button.
Operating an audio player or audio media
text_image
DISC 02 ①—Track 3 P54.33-2424-31Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle.
▶ Switch on COMAND and activate audio CD/DVD mode or MP3 mode; see the separate operating instructions.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the e steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
▶ To select the next/previous track: briefly press the ▲ or ▼ button.
▶ To select a track from the track list ss(rapid scrolling): press and hold the ▲ or ▼ button until the desired track has been reached ①.
If you press and hold ▲ or ▼, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio drives or data carriers support this function.
If track information is stored on the audio When telephoning, you must observe the device or medium, the multifunction displaylegal requirements for the country in which will show the number and title of the trackyou are currently driving.
The current track does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected).
Video DVD operation
text_image
DISC 02 ① Scene 1 P54.33-2425-31Example: CD/DVD changer display
▶ Switch on COMAND and select video D see the separate operating instructions.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
▶ To select the next/previous scene: briefly press the ▲ or ▼ button.
▶ To select a scene from the scene (rapid scrolling): press and hold the ▲ or ▼ button until desired scene ① has been reached.
Telephone menu
Introduction
WARNING
If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of a accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
▶ Switch on the mobile phone (see the separate operating instructions).
▶ Switch on COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).
▶ Establish a Bluetooth® connection to COMAND; see the separate operating instructions.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display:
- Phone READY or the name of the network D; provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive.
- Phone No Service: there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network.
Accepting a call list
text_image
Call from Unknown P54.33-2427-31Example: incoming call
If someone calls you when you are in the TelTel menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Press the 📞 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call.
You can accept a call even if you are not in the TelTel menu.
thRejecting or ending a call
▶ Press the 📞 button on the steering wheel.
You can end or reject a call even if you are n in the TelTel menu.
Dialing a number from the phone book assistance menu
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
▶ Press the ▲, ▼ or OK button to switch to the phone book.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select desired name.
or
▶ To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold
the ▲ or ▼ button for longer than In the DriveAssist menu, you have the one second. following options:
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the Displaying the assistance graphic button or reach the end of the list. (▷ page 280)
▶ If only one telephone number is stored, activating/deactivating the distance for a name: press the 📞 or OK waiting function (▶ page 281)
to start dialing.
or
▶ If there is more than one number for Activating/deactivating ATTENTION particular name: press the 📞 or ⒽSIST (▷ page 281)
button to display the numbers.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select number you want to dial.
▶ Press the 📞 or OK button to start Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist dialing. (▷ page 282)
- Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
artAssist or Active Lane Keeping Assist (▷ page 282)
or
▶ To exit the telephone book: press the
button.
Redialing
The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
▶ Press the 📞 button to switch to the redial memory.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select desired name or number.
▶ Press the 📞 or OK button to sta dialing.
or
▶ To exit the redial memory: press the or button.
Introduction
text_image
Assistance Graphic Traffic Sign Assist ESP Distance Warning P54.33-2603-31- Displaying the assistance graphic (▷ page 280)
redactivating/deactivating the distance □ waiting function (▷ page 281)
- Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake (▷ page 281)
or Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST (▷ page 281)
- Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist the Active Blind Spot Assist (▷ page 281)
Displaying the assistance graphic
▶ Press ◀ or ▶ on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
▶ Press ▲ or ▼ to select Assistance GraphicGraphic.
▶ Press the OK button.
The multifunction display shows the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the assistance graphic (▷ page 210).
The assistance graphic can display the status of and information from other driving systems the or driving safety systems.
The assistance graphic shows:
- the OFF symbol when ATTENTION ASSIST (▷ page 239) is deactivated.
-
the lane markings as bright lines when Lane Keeping Assist (▷ page 245) or Active Lane Keeping Assist (▷ page 251) is activated.
-
the ▶!60 OFF symbol when the distance warning function (▷ page 69) is deactivated.
- the ▶OFF symbol when PRE-SAF®Brake (▶ page 75) is deactivated.
- the symbol when DSR (▷ page 256) is activated.
- the 📄 symbol when the Off-road program (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package) (▷ page 258) is activated.
Switching the distance warning function on and off
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssi menu.
▶ Press ▲ or ▼ to select Distance WarningWarning.
▶ Press the OK button.
The current selection is displayed.
▶ To activate/deactivate: press the OK button again.
When the distance warning function is deactivated, the assistance graphic shows the 🔍!OFF symbol in the multifunction display.
Further information on the distance warning function (▷ page 69).
▶ Press the OK button.
The current selection is displayed.
▶ To activate/deactivate: press the OK button again.
When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the assistance graphic shows the OFF symbol in the multifunction display.
For more information on PRE-SAFBrake, see (▷ page 75).
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssistDrive menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select ATTENTION ASSIST.
▶ Press the OK button.
The current selection is displayed.
▶ To activate/deactivate: press the OK button again.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the OFF symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphics display.
For further information about ATTENTION
Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake
PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS.
▶ Press ◀ or ▶ on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select PRE-SAFE Brake.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
▶ Press ◀ or ▶ on the steering wheel
es to select the DriveAssist menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select el Blind Spot Assist.
▶ Press the OK button.
The current selection is displayed.
▶ To activate/deactivate: press the OK button again.
For further information about Active Blind Spot Assist, see (▷ page 247).
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist
▶ Press ◀ or ▶ on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu.
▶ Press ▲ or ▼ to select Lane Keeping Assist.
▶ Press the OK button.
The current selection is displayed.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to set Off, Standard or Adaptive.
When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunction display shows the lane markings as bright lines in the assistance graphic.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
For further information about Lane Keeping Assist, see (▷ page 245).
For further information about Active Lane Keeping Assist, see (▷ page 251).
Settings menu
Introduction
text_image
Instrument Cluster Light Vehicle Heating P54.33-2605-31In the Sett. menu, you have the following options:
- Changing the instrument cluster settings (▷ page 282)
- Changing the light settings (▷ page 283)
- Changing the vehicle settings (▷ page 284)
g Changing the convenience settings (▷ page 285) - Restoring the factory settings (▷ page 286)
Instrument cluster submenu
text_image
Maintenance menu 1 Message Tyre Pressure ASSYST PLUS P54.33-2604-31In the Serv menu, you have the following options:
- Calling up display messages in message memory (▷ page 290)
- Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system (▷ page 412)
- Checking the tire pressure electronically (▷ page 412)
- Calling up the service due date (▷ page 375)
Selecting the unit of measurement for distance
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunction display.
You can determine whether the multifunction display shows some messages in miles or kilometers.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function.
You will see the selected setting: km or milesmiles.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to:
• Digital speedometer in the Trip menu
- Odometer and the trip odometer
- Trip computer
- Current consumption and the range
- Navigation instructions in the Navi menu
- Cruise control
• DISTRONIC PLUS
• ASSYST PLUS service interval display
▶ Press ▼ or ▲ to select the Daytime Running Lights function.
If the Daytime Running Lights function has been switched on, the cone of light and the symbol in the multifunction display are shown in orange.
▶ Press the OK button to save the settin
Further information on daytime running lamps (▷ page 128).
Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting
Selecting the permanent display function You can determine whether the multifunction display permanently shows your speed or the outside temperature.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select Instrument Cluster submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select Permanent Display: function. You will see the selected setting Outside Temperature or Additional Speedometer [km/h] (USA)/Additional Speedometer [mph] (Canada).
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting
i The speed is shown in km/h (USA)/mph (Canada).
Light submenu
Setting the daytime running lamps
This function is not available in Canada.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select LightLight submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the LightLight submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Amb. Light +/- function.
You will see the selected setting.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
Press the ▼ or ▲ button to adjust the brightness to any level from Off to Level 55 (bright).
▶ Press the OK or ← button to save the setting.
Setting the ambient lighting color
Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Lights submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Ambient Light Color function.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to set the color to SOLAR, NEUTRAL or POLAR.
the Press the OK or ← button to save the setting.
Surround lighting and exterior lighting delayed switch-off
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select LightsLights submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press ▼ or ▲ to select the Surround Lighting function.
When the Surround Lighting function is activated, the light cone and the area around the vehicle are displayed in orange in the multifunction display.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting temporarily:
▶ Before leaving the vehicle, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is deactivated.
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is reactivated the next time you start the engine.
If you have activated the SurroundSurround Vehicle submenu
LightingLighting function and the light switch is set
to AUTO, the following functions are activated: Activating/deactivating the automatic when it is dark: door locking mechanism
- surround lighting: the exterior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking with the SmartKey. If you start the engine the surround lighting is switched off and automatic headlamp mode is activated (▶ page 128).
If you activate the Automatic Door Lock function, the vehicle is centrally locked above 90°, speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
• exterior lighting delayed switch-off: the exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds after the engine is switched of
If you close all the doors and the tailgate, the exterior lighting goes off after 5 seconds.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, when the surround lighting and delayed
switch-off exterior lighting are on, the following light up:
- Parking lamps
• Daytime running lamps
the Side marker lamps
- Surround lighting in the exterior mirrors
Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off
If you activate the Interior Lighting DelayDelay function, the interior lighting remains on for 20 seconds after you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the LightLight submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Interior Lighting Delayf function. If the Interior Lighting Delay function has been switched on, the vehicle interior is displayed in orange in the multifunctions display.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
Vehicle submenu
Activating/deactivating the automatic door locking mechanism
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the VehicleVehicle submenu.
▶Press OK to confirm.
▶, Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Automatic Door Lock function.
When the Automatic Door Lock function is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed in orange in the multifunction display.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
For further information on the automatic locking feature, see (▷ page 88).
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an acoustic signal sounds when you lock vehicle.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
▶ Press ▼ or ▲ to select the Vehicle submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select Acoustic Lock function.
If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the 🔒 symbol in the multifunction display lights up orange.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
Activating/deactivating the radar sensor system
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
▶ Press ▼ or ▲ to select the Vehicle submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):.
You will see the selected setting: Enabled or DisabledDisabled.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
The following systems are switched off when the radar sensor system is deactivated:
• DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 203)
- BAS PLUS (▷ page 68)
- PRE-SAFE® Brake (▷ page 75)
- Blind Spot Assist (▷ page 243)
• Active Blind Spot Assist (▷ page 247)
Convenience submenu
Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants - particularly children - could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel.
If somebody becomes trapped:
- press one of the memory function position buttons, or
- move the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to that. in which the steering wheel is moving.
The adjustment process is stopped.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the ConvenienceConvenience submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Easy Entry/Exit: function.
If the Easy Entry/Exit function is
activated, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in orange in the multifunction display.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting. Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (▷ page 121).
Switching the belt adjustment on/off
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the ConvenienceConvenience submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select in the using button ①, they will not fold out Belt Adjustment function. automatically (▷ page 123).
If the Belt Adjustment function is activated, the vehicle seat belt is shown using button ①.
orange in the multifunction display.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting Restoring the factory settings
For further information on belt adjustment, see (▷ page 57).
Switching the fold-in mirrors with the locking feature on/off
This function is only available on vehicles with Press OK to confirm.
the memory function (▷ page 125).
When you activate the Auto. Mirror
Folding Folding function, the exterior mirror Passes the ▼ or ▲ button to select folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you No or Yes.
unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the exterior mirrors fold out again.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select Lights function in the Lights submenu is ConvenienceConvenience submenu. only reset if the vehicle is stationary.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press ▼ or ▲ to select the Auto.
Mirror Folding function.
For safety reasons, the Daytime Running Lights function in the Lights submenu is only reset if the vehicle is stationary.
If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is displayed in orange in the multifunction display.
▶ Press the OK button to save the settin
text_image
Car interior view with digital display and control panel, showing a numbered component labeled '1' in an inset zoom.▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Sett . menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Factory Setting submenu.
AtPress OK to confirm. The Reset All Settings? message appears.
Does Pass the ▼ or ▲ button to select u No or Yes.
the Press OK to confirm the selection. If you select Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message.
ON&OFFROAD menu
text_image
SPORT SPORT P54.33-2608-31Example: multifunction display
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the ON&OFFROAD menu.
You can set the current settings to appear in the ON&OFFROAD menu:
- On-road program (▷ page 253)
- Off-road program (▷ page 258)
① To fold the exterior mirrors in or out
If you have switched the Auto. Mirror
FoldingFolding on and you fold the exterior mirrors
AMG menu in AMG vehicles
AMG displays
text_image
① ② 75 mph UP 183°F 208°F 179°F ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ P54.33-2934-31① Digital speedometer
② Gear indicator
③ Upshift indicator
④ Engine oil temperature
⑤ Coolant temperature
⑥ Transmission fluid temperature
▶ Press ◀ or ▶ on the steering whe to select the AMGANG menu.
Upshift indicator UP ③ indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual gearshift program.
Upshift indicator UP ③ fades out other messages until you have shifted up.
If the engine oil temperature is below 176 (80 °C), oil temperature ④ is shown in bl
Avoid driving at full engine output during this time.
If the transmission fluid temperature is below 122 °F (50 °C), oil temperature ⑥ is shown in blue. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time.
SETUP
flowchart
graph TD
A["60 mph"] --> B["S"]
B --> C["①"]
B --> D["ON"]
B --> E["SPORT +"]
F["③"] --> G["Linking"]
G --> H["Linking"]
style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
① Drive program (C/S/M)
② ESP ^® mode (ON/OFF)
③ Suspension tuning (COMFORT/SPORT/SPORT+SPORT+)
SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP (Electronic Stability Program) mode and the suspension tuning.
▶ Press ▶ or ▶ on the steering wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.
▶ Press the ▲ button repeatedly until SETUP is displayed.
RACETIMER
Displaying and starting RACETIMER
The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads.
text_image
60 mph L1 00:00:00 Start P54.33-2805-31① Lap
② RACETIMER
You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Press ◀ or ▶ on the steering wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.
Press the ▲ button repeatedly until the RACETIMER is shown.
▶ To start: press the OK button to start the RACETIMER.
Displaying the intermediate time
text_image
60 mph L1 00:14 71 Interm. Time New Lap P54.33-2807-31▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button to select Deleting all laps
Interm. Time.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds.
Starting a new lap
text_image
60 mph ③ L2 00:11 90 ① BL 00:11 60 Interm. Time New Lap P54.33-2809-31① RACETIMER
② Fastest lap time (best lap)
③ Lap
▶ Press OK to confirm New Lap.
It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with Finish Lap.
Stopping the RACETIMER
text_image
Stop Race-Timer? No Yes P54.33-28 12-31▶ Press the ← button on the steering1 RACETIMER overall evaluation
wheel.
▶ Press OK to confirm Yes.
g1 RACETIMER overall evaluation
② Total time driven
③ Average speed
The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you
stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn
SmartKey to position 2 or 3 and then pre
OK to confirm Start, timing is continued.
Resetting the current lap
▶ Stop the RACETIMER.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button to select Reset Lap.
▶ Press OK to reset the lap time to "0".
text_image
Reset Race-Timer? No Yes P54.33-2814-31If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset.
▶ Reset the current lap.
▶ Press OK to confirm Reset.
Reset Race Timer? appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Press the ▼ button to select Yes and press the OK button to confirm. All laps are deleted.
Overall statistics
text_image
1 RT 01:01:5309 2 5 65 mph ø 60 mph 3 4 61 miles P54.33-2800-31④ Distance covered
⑤ Maximum speed the
This function is shown if you have stored at least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
▶ Press ◀ or ▶ on the steering wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.
▶ Press the ▲ button repeatedly until the overall evaluation is shown.
Lap statistics
flowchart
graph LR
A["①"] -->|L1| B["②"]
C["⑤"] -->|65 mph| D["③"]
E["④"] -->|60 mph| D
F["④"] -->|13 miles| D
① Lap
② Lap time
③ Average lap speed
④ Lap length
⑤ Top speed during lap
This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER.
▶ Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMGANG menu.
▶ Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown.
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol ①.
▶ Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation.
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
• HOLD function (▷ page 216)
- Parking (▷ page 188)
Hiding display messages
▶ Press the OK or ← button on the steering wheel to hide the display message. The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages:
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Serv . menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to scroll through the display messages.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
Safety systems
Display messages
Currently Currently Unavailable See Unava Operator's ManualOpe
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SA, Ethe HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights, crosswind driving assistance and ESP trailer stabilization are temporarily unavailable.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the 📄, 📄 and (ABS) warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
- self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
- the on-board voltage may be insufficient.
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP ^ is not operational, ESP ^ is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
▶ Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
▶ Drive on carefully.
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Inoperative SeeInope Operator's ManualOpe
ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE, HOLD, hill start assist, crosswind driving assistance and ESP trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.
The BRAKE (USA only)/① (Canada only), , OFF and (ABS) warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.► Drive on carefully.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. | |
 CurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailab SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual | ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE, HOLD, hill start assist, crosswind driving assistance and ESP trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the [IMAGE] and [IMAGE] warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.► Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.If the display message continues to be displayed:► Drive on carefully.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Inoperative See Inoperative See Operator's Manual Operator's Manual | ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist, crosswind driving assistance and ESP trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the [IMAGE] and [IMAGE] warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated⚠ WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESPs unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.► Drive on carefully.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 | EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESPBAS, PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist, crosswind driving assistance and ESP trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the [IMAGE], [IMAGE] and [IMAGE] warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.⚠ WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESPs unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.► Drive on carefully.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
| PARK (USA only) (Canada only)Please ReleasePlease Parking Brake | The red PARK (USA only)/ (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (▷ page 189).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.▶ Release the electric parking brake manually. |
| The red PARK (USA only)/ (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds.You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking (▷ page 189). | |
| PARK (USA only) (Canada only)Parking Brake See Operator's Manual | The yellow (P) warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:▶ Switch the ignition off.▶ Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.▶ Shift the transmission to P.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The yellow (P) warning lamp and the red PARK (USA only)/ (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp light up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:▶ Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.▶ Release the electric parking brake manually.or▶ Release the electric parking brake automatically (▷ page 189).If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:▶ Do not drive on.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.The red PARK (USA only)/ (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and the yellow (P) warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:►Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.►Release the electric parking brake manually.To apply:►Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.►Apply the electric parking brake manually.If the red PARK (USA only)/ (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash:►Do not drive on.►Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 428).►Shift the transmission to P.►Turn the front wheels towards the curb.►Consult a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| The yellow (P) warning lamp lights up. The red PARK (USA only)/ (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.►Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.►Apply the electric parking brake.If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:►Shift the transmission to P.►Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:►Release the electric parking brake automatically (▷ page 189).If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:►Consult a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| The yellow (P) warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red PARK (USA only)/ (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.▶ Shift the transmission to P.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. | |
  (Canada  | The yellow (P) warning lamp lights up. The red PARK (USA only)/ (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. |
 | The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage. |
| Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine.Engage or release the electric parking brake.If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.Engage or release the electric parking brake.If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:Consult a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| The yellow (P) warning lamp lights up and the red PARK (USA only)/ (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.Shift the transmission to P.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. | |
  (Canada      | The red PARK (USA only)/ (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off.SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition. |
| BRAKE (USA only) (Canada only)Check Brake Fluid LevelLevel | There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the BRAKE (USA only)/ (1) (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds⚠ WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction. |
| Check Brake Pad WearWear | The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| SOSmbrace Inoperativembrace Inoperative | USA only: one or more of the main functions in the mbrace syste are malfunctioning.Canada only: one or more of the main functions of the TELEAID system are malfunctioning.▶ USA only: have the mbrace system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Canada only: have the TELEAID system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. |
| PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFE Inoperative SeeInoperative SystemOperator's ManualOperative System | Important functions of PRE-SAF®have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
| PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFE FunctionsFunctions Currently Limited Current See Operator'sSee Operator's ManualManualPRE-SAFEPRE-SAFE FunctionsFunctionsCurrently LimitedSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual | Vehicles without the Active Driving Assistance package: Adaptive Brake Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:• function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.• the sensor in the bumper is dirty.• the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.• AMG vehicles: ESP is deactivated.• the system is outside the operating temperature range.• the on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.Adaptive Brake Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:► Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.► Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).► Clean the bumpers (▷ page 380).► Restart the engine.► AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP(▷ page 73).Vehicles with the Active Driving Assistance package: PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:• function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.• the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.• the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.• AMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.• the system is outside the operating temperature range.• the on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:► Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.► Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).► Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper (▷ page 380).► Restart the engine.► AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP(▷ page 73). |
| PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFE FunctionsFunctionsCurrently LimitedSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual | Vehicles without the Active Driving Assistance package: Adaptive Brake Assist is faulty. The distance warning function may also have failed.Vehicles with the Active Driving Assistance package: PRE-SAFE® Brake is faulty. BAS PLUS or the distance warning function may also have failed.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 SRS MalfunctionSRS MalfunctionService RequiredService Required | There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System).TheWARNING lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.⚠ WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.► Visit a qualified specialist workshop.Further information on occupant safety (▷ page 43). |
 Front Left Front Left MalfunctionMalfunctionService Required Service or Front Right MalfunctionMalfunctionService Required Service | SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Rear Left Rear Left MalfunctionMalfunction Service Required Service or Rear Right MalfunctionMalfunction Service Required Service | SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Rear Center Rear Center MalfunctionMalfunction Service Required Service | SRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required Service  t Side Curtain AirbagCurtain AirbagMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMal functionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalsessionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMaltionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfractionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalsectionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalactionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalpositionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalifemalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMallfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionBalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionKalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfunctionKallfuminalfunctionKallfuminalfunctionKallfuminalfunctionKallfuminalfunctionKallfuminalfunctionKallfuminalfunctionKallfuminalfunctionKallfuminalfunctionKallfuminalfunctionKallfuminalfunctionKallfuminalfunctionKallfuminalfunctionKallfuminalfunctionKallfuminalfunctionKallfuminalfunctionKallfuminalfunctionKallfuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunction Kall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminafter KalfuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfuminalfunctionKall fuminalfuminalfunctionKall fuminalfuminalfunctionKall fuminalfuminalfunctionKall fuminalfuminalfunctionKall fuminalfuminalfunctionKall fuminalfuminalfunctionKall fuminalfuminalfunctionKall fuminalfuminalfunctionKall fuminalfuminalfunctionKall fuminalfuminalfunctionKall fuminalfUMinalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfunctionKall fuminalfuminalfunctionKall fuminalfuminalfunctionKall fuminalfuminalfunctionKall fuminalfuminalfunctionKAll fuminalfuminalfunctionKAll fuminalfuminalfunctionKAll fuminalfuminalfunctionKAll fuminalfuminalfunctionKAll fuminalfuminalfunctionKAll fuminalfuminalfunctionKAll fuminalfuminalfunctionKAll fuminalfuminalfunctionKAll fuminalfuminalfunctionKAll fuminalfuminalfunctionKAll fuminalfuminalfunctionKAll guminalfuminalfunctionKAll guminalfuminalfunctionKAll guminalfuminalfunctionKAll guminalfuminalfunctionKAll guminalfuminalfunctionKAll guminalfuminalfunctionKAll guminalfuminalfunctionKAll guminalfuminalfunctionKAll guminalfuminalfunctionKAll guminalfuminalfunctionKAll guminalfuminalfunctionKAll gumminalfuminalfunctionKAll gumminalfuminalfunctionKAll gumminalfuminalfunctionKAll gumminalfuminalfunctionKAll gumminalfuminalfunctionKAll gumminalfuminalfunctionKAll gumminalfuminalfunctionKAll gumminalfuminalfunctionKAll gumminalfuminalfunctionKAll gumminalfuminalfunctionKAll gumminalfuminalfunctionKAll gummmalfuminalfunctionKAll gummmalfuminalfunctionKAll gummmalfuminalfunctionKAll gummmalfuminalfunctionKAll gummmalfuminalfunctionKAll gummmalfuminalfunctionKAll gummmalfuminalfunctionKAll gummmalfuminalfunctionKAll gummmalfuminalfunctionKAll gummmalfuminalfunctionKAll gummmalfuminalfunctionKAll gummmalfluminalfunctionKAll gummmalfluminalfunctionKAll gummmalfluminalfunctionKAll gummmalfluminalfunctionKAll gummmalfluminalfunctionKAll gummmalfluminalfunctionKAll gummmalfluminalfunctionKAll gummmalfluminalfunctionKAll gummmalfluminalfunctionKAll gummmalfluminalfunctionKAll gummmalfluminalfunctionKAll gummmalfluinalfunctionKAll gummmalfluinalfunctionKAll gummmalfluinalfunctionKAll gummmalfluinalfunctionKAll gummmalfluinalfunctionKAll gummmalfluinalfunctionKAll gummmalfluinalfunctionKAll gummmalfluinalfunctionKAll gummmalfluinalfunctionKAll gummmalfluinalfunctionKAll gummmalfluinalfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfuminalfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaiaiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaiaiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaiaiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaiaiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaiaiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaiaiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaiaiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaiaiaialfunctionKAll gummmalfluiaiaiaialfusionKAll gummmalfluiaiaiaialfusionKAll gummmalfluiaiaiaialfusionKAll gummmalfluiaiaiaialfusionKAll gummmalfluiaiaiaialfusionKAll gummmalfluiaiaiaialfusionKAll gummmalfluiaiaiaialfusionKAll gummmalfluiaiaiaialfusionKAll gummmalfluiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymminalfluiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymminalfluiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymminalfluiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymminalfluiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymminalfluiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymminalfluiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymminalfluiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymminalfluiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymminalfluiaaiaiaialfusionKAll gymminalfluiaaiaiaialfusionKAll gymminalfluiaaiaiaialfusionKAll gymminalfluiaaiaiaialfusionKAll gymminalfluiaaiaiaialfusionKAll gymminalfluiaaiaiaialfusionKAll gymminalfluiaaiaiaialfusionKAll gymminalfluiaaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaiaiaiaialfusionKAll gymmmalfluiaaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaaiaaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaiaslaualfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalguminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfulaminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfumeralfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalkullminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfum/malfunctionFulaminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalgum/malfunctionFulaminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalfuminalgum/malfunctionFulaminalfum/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionGum/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/malfunctionFulam/mal functionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMalfunctionMullminalfum/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunction Mullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/mallfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMullm/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunction Mulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/mallfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMulln/malfunctionMull nmalfunctionMullnmalfunctionMullnmalfunctionMullnmalfunctionMullnmalfunctionMullnmalfunctionMullnmalfunctionMullnmalfunctionMullnmalfunctionMullnmalfunctionMullnmalfunctionMullnmalfunctionMullnmalfunctionMullnmalfunctionMullnmalfunctionMullnmalfunctionMullnmalfunctionMullnmalfunctionMullnmalfunctionMull |
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Front PassengerFront The front-passenger air bag is disabled during the journey, eve Airbag DisabledAirbag though:
See Operator's See Operator's Manual Manual
• an adult or
- a person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
WARNING
The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident. There is an increased risk of injury.
▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, attention to road and traffic conditions.
paving
▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).
▶ Switch the ignition off.
▶ Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
- Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.
▶ Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
- the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front passenger air bag (▷ page 49).
- the Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display.
▶ Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed.
▶ Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Front PassengerFront Airbag EnabledAirbag See Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual | The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even thougha child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seatorthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat.WARNINGThe air bag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).Switch the ignition off.Open the front-passenger door.Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. When the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag (▷ page 49).the Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display.▶ Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed.▶ Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display.If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifier occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
Lights
i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 Check LeftCheck Left Cornering Light or Check RightCheck Right Cornering Light | The left or right-hand cornering light is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Left Low Beam or Check Right Low Beam | The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective. ▶ Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb you (▷ page 138). or ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Trailer Left Turn Signal or Check TrailerCheck Right Turn Signal | The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is defective. ▶ Observe the separate operating instructions provided by the trailer manufacturer. |
 Check Rear Left Turn Signal or Check Rear Right Turn SignalTurn Signal | The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective. ▶ Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb you (▷ page 138). or ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| [3DAS]Check Front Left Turn Signal or Check Front Right Turn SignalTurn Signal | The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Left Mirror Turn Signal or Check Right Mirror Turn SignalTurn Signal | The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Center Brake LampLamp | The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Left Brake Lamp or Check Right Brake Lamp | The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective. ▶ Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (▷ page 138). or ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Left Tail and Brake Lamps or Check Right Tail and Brake Lamps | The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective. ▶ Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (▷ page 138). or ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Left High Beam or Check Right High Beam | The left or right-hand high beam is defective. ▶ Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (▷ page 138). or ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| [3ABT]License Plate Lamp | The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Front Left Parking Lamp or Check Front Right Parking LampParking | The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective. ▶ Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb your (▷ page 138).or ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Backup LightBackup Light | The backup lamp is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Front Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Front Right Sidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp | The left or right front side marker lamp is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Left Tail Lamp or Check Right Tail Lamp | The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective. or The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Left Daytime Running Light or Check RightCheck Right Daytime RunningDaytime RunningLightLight | The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Active LightActive Light System InoperativeSystem Inoperative | The active light function is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Malfunction SeeMalfunction See Operator's ManualOperator's Manual | The exterior lighting is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown. ▶ Check the fuses (▷ page 400). ▶ If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes. If the display message continues to be displayed: ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| Auto Lamp Function InoperativeInoperative | The light sensor is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Switch Off Lights | The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. ▶ Turn the light switch to AUTO. |
| Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative Assist Inoperative Assist Inoperative Assist Inoperative Assist Currently Assist Inoperative Assist Currently Assist Inoperative Assist Currently Assist Inoperative Assist Currently Assist Inoperative Assist Currently Assist Inoperative Assist Currently Assist Inoperative Assist Currently Assist Inoperative Assist Currently Assist Inoperative Assist Currently Assist Inoperative Assist Currently Assist Inoperative Assist Currently Assist Inoperative Assist Currently Assist Inoperative Assist Currently Assist Inoperative Assist Currently Assist Inoperative Assist Currently Assist Inoperative Assist Currently Assist Inoperative Assist Currently Assist Inoperative assist in the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. ▶ visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. ▶ Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. |
Engine
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 Check CoolantCheck CoolantLevel SeeLevel SeeOperator's ManualOperational | The coolant level is too low.⚠ Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.▶ Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (▶ page 373).▶ If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. |
 | The fan motor is faulty.▶ At coolant temperatures below 248 °F (120 °C), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.▶ Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. |
 Coolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnEngine OffEngine Off | The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause som fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).▶ Wait until the engine has cooled down.▶ Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.▶ Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 248 °F (120 °C). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.▶ Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.▶ If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 °F (120 °C). |
 | The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:• a defective alternator• a torn poly-V-belt• a malfunction in the electronics▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Open the hood.▶ Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:⚠ Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Engine OilAt Next Refueling | The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.▶ Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (▷ page 371).▶ If necessary, add engine oil (▷ page 372).▶ Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.⚠ Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged.Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. |
 Check Engine OilLevel (Add 1 quart) | AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.▶ Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (▷ page 371).▶ If necessary, add engine oil (▷ page 372).▶ Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.⚠ Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged.Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mer Mercedes-benz.com. |
 Fuel Level Low | The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.▶ Refuel at the nearest gas station. |
 | There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.▶ Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail. |
 Gas Cap Loose | The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.▶ Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:▶ Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Ultra Low-sulfur Ultra Low-sulfurDiesel Fuel Only | Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel level has fallen below the reserve range.▶ Refuel at the nearest gas station.▶ Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm sulfur MAXIMUM). |
 Replace Air Filter | Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Fuel Filter | Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Additive SeeOperator's Manual Operator's Manual | The DEF tank is almost empty.▶ Have the DEF tank filled as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop (▷ page 186). |
 Remaining Starts: Remaining Starts:1616 | The DEF level has fallen to a minimum. You can start the engine further 16 times.▶ Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialist workshop (▷ page 186).i You can start the engine a further 16 times. If DEF is not adc it will then not be possible to restart the engine. Refill the DEF tank with approximately 1 gal (3.8 l) DEF (▷ page 186). |
Driving systems
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 Attention Assist:Attention Assist:Take a Break! | Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning to also sounds.▶ If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. |
 Attention Assist:Attention AssistInoperativeInoperative | ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Drive More Slowly | You cannot change the vehicle level. Possible causes are:you are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level.you are towing a trailer.the trailer-coupling socket is being used, e.g. for a bicycle rack.Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again.Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package (▷ page 212)Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package (▷ page 218)Observe the notes on towing a trailer (▷ page 264). |
 Compressor IsCompressor IsCoolingCooling | You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor first needs to cool down because of frequent level changes.Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level.Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.Allow the compressor to cool down.When the compressor has cooled down, the display message disappears. The vehicle then continues rising to the selected level. |
 MalfunctionMalfunction | AIRMATIC is malfunctioning.Drive as appropriate for the current vehicle level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Max. Speed 12 mph | You are exceeding the speed permissible for the selected off-road level.In addition, the vehicle level display appears between the vehicle icon and the display message, and a warning tone sounds.[62WT]WARNINGThe vehicle could tip and rollover.There is a risk of an accident.Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.Only make slight steering movements and avoid fast steering movements.Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) until the vehicle has reached off-road level 2. |
| ACTIVE CURVEACTIVE SYSTEM Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction Systems, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, S, | |
| ACTIVE CURVEACTIVE SYSTEM Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Mal function System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction System Malfunction Total Number of 1000s (80 km/h) | |
| Raising Max. Speed 12 mph 12 mph | The vehicle is being adjusted to off-road level 3. The display message informs you of the maximum speed permissible for off-road level 3. ▶ Do not drive at speeds above 12 mph (20 km/h). |
| Lowering Max. Speed 12 mph | The vehicle is being lowered from off-road level 3 to off-road level 2. The display message informs you of the maximum speed permissible for off-road level 3. ▶ Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) until the vehicle has reached off-road level 2. |
| Different. Lock Sys. Malfunction | The differential lock is malfunctioning. ▶ Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h). ▶ Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Different. Locking Sys. Cooling Down Please WaitPlease Wait | The differential lock is too hot and has been disengaged. ▶ Drive on carefully. ▶ Allow the differential lock to cool down. ▶ The differential lock reengages as soon as it has cooled down. |
| LOW RANGE StopApply Parking Brake | A gearshift process has been canceled. LOW RANGE is in the neutral position. There is no connection between the engine and the drive wheels.Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.Apply the electric parking brake. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.Repeat the gearshift process. |
| LOW RANGELOW RANGE Malfunction ToMalfunction To Park, Apply Brake | LOW RANGE is malfunctioning.Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).When parking, secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop. |
| LOW RANGELOW RANGE Max.Speed 25 mph | You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.Drive more slowly.The gear change is made. |
| LOW RANGE Max. Speed 40 mph | You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.Drive more slowly.The gear change is made. |
| LOW RANGE Shift to Position N Briefly | You have reduced the vehicle speed, but the automatic transmission is not in position N.Briefly shift the automatic transmission to position N. |
| LOW RANGE Shifting Canceled Please Reactivate | The gearshift process has been canceled.Repeat the gearshift process. |
 Inoperative | DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a malfunction.Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop. |
 OffOff | The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.Reactivate the HOLD function later (▷ page 216). |
| Radar Sensors Deactivated See Operator's ManualOperator's ManualLane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist Currently Assist Currently Assist Unavailable See Unavailable See Operator's Manual Operator's Manual or Active Lane Keeping Assist Keeping Assist Currently Currently Unavailable See Unavailable See Operator's Manual Operator's Manual | The radar sensor system is deactivated.Switch on the radar sensor system (▷ page 285).Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactiv and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.there are no lane markings for a longer period.the lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirtWhen the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operate again.If the display message does not disappear:Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, attention to road and traffic conditions.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).Clean the windshield. |
| Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist Assist Inoperative Inoperative Active Lane Active Lane Keeping Assist Keeping Assist Inoperative Inoperative | Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defectVisit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Blind Spot Assist CurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailableSeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manualor Active BlindSpot AssistSpot AssistCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailableSeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual | Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:the sensors are dirty.function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.the radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range.the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.The yellow ▲ indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▶ page 188).Clean the sensors (▶ page 380).Restart the engine. |
| Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while towing a trailer.You have established the electrical connection between the trailer and your vehicle.Press OK on the steering wheel to confirm the display message. | |
| Blind Spot Assist InoperativeInoperativeActive Blind SpotAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative | Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow ▲ indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Park AssistPark AssistCanceledCanceled | The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fastened.Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed. |
| You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active.While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.The vehicle has started to skid and®ESs intervened.▶ Use Active Parking Assist again later (▷ page 226). | |
| Park AssistPark Assist InoperativeInoperati | You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking maneuvers.Active Parking Assist will become available again after approximately ten minutes (▷ page 226).▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Switch off and restart the engine.If the display message continues to be displayed:▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| PARKTRONIC is defective.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| Park AssistPark Assist FinishedFinished | The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically. |
| DISTRONIC PLUS Off | DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (▷ page 203).If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds. |
| DISTRONIC PLUS Now AvailableAvailable | DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 203). |
| DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Currently CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual Operator's Manual | DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.the system is outside the operating temperature range.the on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.DISTRONIC is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper (▷ page 380).Restart the engine. |
| DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.Inoperative Inoperative | DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) and PRE-SAB Make may be inoperative as well.A warning tone also sounds.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS Passive Passive | You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. |
| DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS Passive Passive | An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 203). |
| Cruise ControlCruise InoperativeInoperative | Cruise control is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Cruise ControlCruise --- mph--- mph | A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled. You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), example. ▶ If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) store the speed. ▶ Check the activation conditions for cruise control (▷ page 201). |
| Tires | |
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Check TireCheck TirePressure SoonPressure | The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards:they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (▷ page 387).Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct (▷ page 412). |
| Check TireCheck TirePressureThen Restart RunFlat Indicator-Flat Indicator | The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since.Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (▷ page 412). |
| Run Flat IndicatorInoperativeInoperative | The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| RectifyRectifyTire Pressurelire Pressure | The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great.Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (▷ page 412).If necessary, correct the tire pressure.Restart the tire pressure monitor (▷ page 415). |
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| CheckCheckTiresTires | The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards:they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (▷ page 387).Check the tire pressure (▷ page 412).If necessary, correct the tire pressure. |
| WarningWarningTire MalfunctionTire Malfunction | The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.⚠ WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazardoa flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.you could lose control of the vehicle.continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.There is a risk of an accident.Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (▷ page 387). |
| Tire Press.MonitorTimeCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailableUnavailable | Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.▶Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been solved. |
| TirePress.TirePress.Sensor(s) Missing | There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display.▶Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Tire PressureTireMonitorMonitorInoperative NoInoperativeNoWheel SensorsWheel Sensors | The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.▶Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. |
| Tire Press. MonitorInoperativeInoperative | The tire pressure monitor is faulty.▶Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Vehicle | |
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Shift to 'P' or 'N' to Start Engine | You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. ▶ Shift the transmission to position P or N. |
| Auxiliary BatteryAUX MalfunctionMalfunction | The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer being charged. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity. ▶ Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before you switch off the engine. ▶ Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. ▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188). |
| Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' | You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. ▶ Depress the brake pedal. |
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Transmission NotTrans in P Risk of Vehicle RollingVehicle Rolling AwayAway | The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N or D.A warning tone also sounds.▶ Shift the transmission to position P.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188). |
| Service RequiredServ Do Not Shift Gears Visit DealerVisit Dealer | You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:▶ Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D.If transmission position R, N or P is selected:▶ Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. |
| Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is StationaryStationary | The vehicle is moving.▶ Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Shift the transmission to position P. |
 | The tailgate is open.⚠ WARNINGWhen the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open.There is a risk of poisoning.▶ Close the tailgate. |
 | The hood is open.⚠ WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motionThere is a risk of an accident.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).▶ Close the hood. |
 | At least one door is open.A warning tone also sounds.▶ Close all the doors. |
 2nd Seat Row, Left Not Locked or 2nd Seat Row, Right Not LockedNot Locked | The second row of seats is not engaged on the left-hand or right-hand side.▶ Fold back the second row of seats until it engages. |
 3rd Seat Row, Left Not Locked or 3rd Seat Row, Right Not LockedNot Locked | The third row of seats is not engaged on the left-hand or right-hand side.▶ Fold back the third row of seats until it engages. |
 Power Steering Power Steering  | The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.▶ Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop.If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. |
| Phone No Service | Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.▶ Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. |
 Check Washer Fluid | The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.▶ Add washer fluid (▷ page 374). |
| WiperWiperMalfunctioningMalfunctioning | The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Warning Hazard Flashers  | The hazard warning lamps are faulty.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
SmartKey
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions | |
 Key Does NotBelong to Vehicle | You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.▶ Use the correct SmartKey. | |
 Take Your Key fromIgnitionIgnition | The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.▶ Remove the SmartKey. | |
 Obtain a New Key | The SmartKey needs to be replaced.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. | |
 Replace Key Battery | The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.▶ Change the batteries (▷ page 83). | |
 Don't Forget Your KeyKey | This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 sec and is simply a reminder.You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.▶ Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when yo leave the vehicle. | |
 Key Not Detected(red display message) | The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the ve centrally or start the engine.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).▶ Locate the KEYLESS-GO key. | |
| The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is ru because there is interference from a strong source of radio A warning tone also sounds.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).▶ Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock | ||
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions | |
 Key Not Detected (white display message) | The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.▶ Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO functions in the vehicle.If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:▶ Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. | |
 Remove 'Start' Button and Insert KeyKey | KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning tone also sounds.▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. | |
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Safety
Seat belts
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds. | The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.▶ Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 57). |
| After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds. | The driver's seat belt is not fastened.▶ Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 57).The warning tone ceases. |
| The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed. | The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.▶ Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 57).The warning lamp goes out.There are objects on the front-passenger seat.▶ Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out. |
| The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. | The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat be vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).▶ Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 57).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning t ceases. |
| There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle i driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been d faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).▶ Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and sto them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning t ceases. |
Safety systems
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| BRAKE (USA only)(1) (Canada only)The red brake system warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. | WARNINGThe brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.There is a risk of an accident.Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).Consult a qualified specialist workshop.Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. |
| BRAKE (USA only)(1) (Canada only)The red brake system warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. | There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the malfunction.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. |
| The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. | ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction. For this reason, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE-SAFE, PRE-SAFE Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD function, hill start assist, crosswind driving assistance and ESPailer stabilization are also deactivated, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.⚠ WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESPIs unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available. |
| The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. | ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS®, ESP EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD function, hill start assist, crosswind driving assistance and® ESP trailer stabilization, for example, are also deactivated. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Possible causes are: self-diagnosis is not yet complete.the on-board voltage may be insufficient.WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out.If the warning lamp is still on:Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.Drive on carefully.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. | EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, ^ ,ESP PRE-SAFE ^ , PRE-SAFE ^ Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD function, hill start assist, crosswind driving assistance and ESP ^ trailer stabilization, for example, are also not available. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.⚠ WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP ^ is not operational, ESP ^ s unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| (BRAKE (USA only)(1) (Canada only)[IMAGE]The red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP and ESP ^ OFF warning lamps and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. | ABS and ESP ^ are malfunctioning. For this reason, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE ^ , PRE-SAFE ^ Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD function, hill start assist, crosswind driving assistance and ESP ^ trailer stabilization, for example, are also not available. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.⚠ WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP ^ is not operational, ESP ^ s unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. | ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.Do not deactivate ESPIn rare cases (▶ page 72), it may be best to deactivate ESP |
| The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. | ESP® is deactivated.WARNINGIf ESP® is switched off, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.Reactivate ESP®.In rare cases (▶ page 72), it may be best to deactivate ESPAdapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.If ESP® cannot be activated:Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The yellow ESP and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. | ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD function, hill start assist,crosswind driving assistance and ESPailer stabilization are not available due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.Drive on carefully.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. | ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist, crosswind driving assistance and ESP® trailer stabilization are temporarily unavailable.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without functions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can then increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP®s unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out.If the warning lamp is still on:Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.Drive on carefully.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| PARK (USA only)(P) (Canada only)The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or lights up and/or(P)warning lamp for the electric parking brake lights up. | ▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. |
| The red SRS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. | There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System).⚠ WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about SRS, see (▷ page 43). |
Engine
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. | There may be a malfunction, for example:in the engine managementin the fuel injection systemin the exhaust systemin the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines)in the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode.Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving. |
| Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (▷ page 185).Start the engine three to four times after refueling.If the yellow Check Engine warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is canceled. The vehicle need not be checked. | |
| The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. | The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.Refuel at the nearest gas station. |
| The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.In addition, theCheck Engine warning lamp may light up. | The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closely corrected or the fuel system is leaking.Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel cap.If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale. | The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is defective.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the e paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not co driving under any circumstances.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. | The coolant level is too low.⚠ Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).▶ Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle unt the engine has cooled down.▶ Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (▷ page 373).▶ If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked.▶ Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.▶ Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 °F (120 °C). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.▶ Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.▶ Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. |
| The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. | The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 °F (120 °C). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.⚠ WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause som fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury. |
| ▸Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.▸Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▸Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).▸Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.▸Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (▷ page 373).▸If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked.▸Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.▸At coolant temperatures below 248 °F (120 °C), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.▸Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. |
Driving systems
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The red distance warning function warning lamp comes on while the vehicle is moving. A warning tone also sounds. | You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed.▶ Be prepared to brake immediately.▶ Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action.Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS (▷ page 203).Further information on PRE-SAP®Brake (▷ page 75).Further information on the distance warning function (▷ page 69). |
Tires
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) is lit. | The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.⚠ WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards:they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (▷ page 387).Check the tire pressure (▷ page 412).If necessary, correct the tire pressure. |
| The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. | The tire pressure monitor is faulty.⚠ WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.There is a risk of an accident.Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
Useful information 340
Stowage areas 340
Features 348
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 28).
Stowage areas
Loading guidelines
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured (not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailg is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicle's weight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, spare wheel, installed accessories, vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo.
The gross load limit and the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle must
never be exceeded. The gross load limit and the GVWR are specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door (▷ page 415).
the load must also be distributed so that the weight on each axle never exceeds the gross axle weight rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles. The specifications for GVWR and GAWR are on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door (▷ page 415).
Observe the notes on the loading the vehicle (▷ page 415).
The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load:
- Never exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the gross axle weight rating of the vehicle (including occupants).
- The cargo compartment is the preferred place to carry objects.
- Position heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the cargo compartment as possible.
- The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests.
• Always place the load against the rear or front seat backrests. Make sure that the seat backrests are securely locked into
• Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible.
- Use the cargo tie down rings and the parcel nets to transport loads and luggage.
- Use cargo tie-down rings and fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the load.
- Hook in the cargo net when loading.
- Secure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for protection.
Stowage space
Important safety notes
WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
• Always stow objects so that they cannot thrown around in such situations.
• Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.
- Close the lockable stowage spaces while driving.
- Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines (▷ page 340).
Glove box
text_image
Car interior panel with labeled parts and directional arrow indicator
text_image
1 2 P80.00-22 15-31bel Glove box unlocked
2 Glove box locked
The glove box can be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key.
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with air vent and control panel (no visible text or symbols)Partition ① for stowing flat objects is located in the upper section of the glove box. It can be removed to increase the stowage space in the glove box.
▶ To remove: pull partition ① forwards and out
▶ To install: insert partition ① and push it back until it engages.
▶ To open: pull handle ① and open glove box flap ②.
▶ To close: fold glove box flap ② upwards until it engages.
The glove box can be cooled and ventilated (▷ page 163).
Stowage compartment under the armrest
natural_image
Interior view of a car gear shift lever with blue directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)▶ To open: pull handle ① up. The armrest folds out.
In the stowage compartment, there is a stowage tray.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a USB connection or a Media Interface is installed in the stowage compartment. A Media Interface is a universal interface for mobile audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player (see the separate COMAND Operating Instructions).
There is a removable stowage tray in storage compartment, in which objects such as an iPod can be stored.
Eyeglasses compartment
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)▶ To open: press marking ①.
The eyeglasses compartment opens downwards.
▶ To close: press marking ① again and the eyeglasses compartment returns upwards and engages.
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Stowage compartment in the front center console
text_image
Car interior diagram with numbered components and directional indicators▶ To open: slide cover ① forwards. Stowage compartment ② appears.
▶ To close: pull cover ① back as far as it will go.
Stowage compartment in the rear center console
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a blue upward arrow indicator (no text or symbols on the main body)▶ To open: briefly press the stowage compartment marking. The stowage compartment opens.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there may be open stowage spaces above and below the stowage compartment.
Stowage nets
WARNING
Vehicles with the Occupant Classification System (OCS):
If the gross weight of the objects in the stowage net on the back of the frontpassenger seat is greater than 4.4 lb (2 kg).Observe the loading guidelines (▷ page 340) OCS cannot correctly assess the occupant's and the safety notes regarding stowage weight category. The front-passenger front airspaces (▷ page 341). bag could deploy without cause, or may fail to deploy in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injur Never exceed the permissible gross weight of 4.4 lb (2 kg). Stow and secure heavy objects in the cargo compartment.
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a gear shift and numbered component (no readable text or symbols)① Stowage net in front-passenger footwell
natural_image
Interior view of a vehicle's dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)
text_image
① P68.00-6851-31① Stowage net in cargo compartment
Through-loading facility in the rear
If objects or loads are not secured when transported in the through-loading facility, they could slip or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. Observe the loading guidelines (▷ page 340) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (▷ page 341).
text_image
① P68.00-6841-31The through-loading facility is opened from the cargo compartment.
▶ Release the seat backrests in the second row of seats and tilt them in the cargo/load position (▷ page 111).
▶ Fold down the rear seat armrest.
① Stowage net on the back of the front seats
▶ Pull the center head restraint on the rear bench seat into the uppermost position (▷ page 108).
▶ Slide release catch ① to the left and sw flap ② to the left until it is lying on the side of the rear bench seat.
text_image
② ③ P68.00-6842-31▶ Push cover ③ forward until it is lying rear seat armrest.
Cargo compartment enlargement
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident.
- The vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries.
- Objects or loads in the trunk/cargo compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged.
! Release and fold the seat cushion upwards before folding the rear bench seat
forward. Otherwise, the backrests may be damaged.
When the backrest is folded forwards, the front seats cannot be moved to their rearmost position. Otherwise, the front seats and the rear bench seat could be damaged.
Observe the loading guidelines (▷ page 340). The left-hand and right-hand backrests in the second row of seats can be folded forwards separately to increase the cargo compartment capacity.
On vehicles with a 3rd row of seats, you must fold down the 3rd row of seats beforehand (▷ page 111) to obtain maximum cargo compartment enlargement.
Folding the rear bench seat forwards
! The backrest is heavy. Therefore, take care when folding it down. Make sure that the head restraints are pushed all the way in so that the backrests and seat cushions are not damaged.
text_image
① ② P91.12-3594-31If the driver's or front-passenger seat is set for a larger person, it may not be possible to fold the rear bench seat forwards. In this case, move the front seats as far forward as possible.
▶ Move the head restraints to the lowest position (▷ page 110).
▶ Pull release loop ① of seat cushion ②.
▶ Fold seat cushion ② upwards.
text_image
P91.12-3572-31▶ Pull release handle ③ in the direction of the arrow.
The backrest is released.
▶ Fold the backrest forwards until it reaches the cargo compartment position.
text_image
① ② P91.40-3264-31▶ Guide seat belts ② under respective clips ①.
Folding the rear bench seat back
text_image
Diagram of a car interior showing two labeled components with blue arrows indicating motion or flow, likely illustrating vehicle dynamics or system change.▶ Fold seat backrest ② back until it engages. Make sure not to trap the seat belt while doing so.
▶ Swing seat cushion ① back.
▶ Pull up and adjust the head restraints if necessary (▷ page 110).
Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down rings
General notes
WARNING
The Top Tether anchorages cannot secure a load. If you secure a load with the Top Tether anchorages, the Top Tether anchorages could be pulled out during braking, abrupt changes in direction or in the event of an accident. The load could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury.
Only use the cargo tie down rings when securing a load.
Observe the following notes on securing loads:
- Secure the load using the cargo tie-down rings.
- Distribute the load on the cargo tie-down rings evenly.
- Do not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads.
- Do not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners.
- Pad sharp edges for protection.
Cargo compartment
natural_image
Top-down view of a car engine bay with a circular inset highlighting a specific component (no text or symbols)There are four cargo tie-down rings ① in cargo compartment.
Bag hook
WARNING
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage could be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly changing directions. There is a risk of injury. Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks.
Cargo compartment cover
Important safety notes
WARNING
On its own, the cargo compartment cover cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the cargo compartment cover.
When loading the vehicle, make sure that you do not stack the load in the cargo compartment higher than the lower edge of the side windows. Do not place heavy objects on top of the cargo compartment cover.
The cargo compartment cover may be installed behind the 2nd or 3rd row of seats.
! The bag hook can bear a maximum lo of 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used secure a load.
text_image
① P68.00-6844-31Extending/retracting the cargo compartment cover
text_image
① ② P68.50-2566-31There is a bag hook in the cargo compartment on the right-hand side.
▶ Press bag hook marking ①.
▶ Turn bag hook ① until it engages.
▶ To extend: pull the cargo compartment cover back by grab handle ① and clip it into retainers ② on the left and right.
▶ To retract: unhook the cargo compartment cover from left-hand and right-hand retainers ②.
▶ Guide cargo compartment cover forwards by grab handle ① until it is completely rolled up.
text_image
t ent ① ② P68-00-6840-31Coat hooks on the tailgate
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the intake manifold and gear shift lever (no text or symbols visible)① Coat hook
The TREFIT kit, tire-change tool kit, etc. located in the stowage compartment.
▶ To open: holding the ribbing, press handle ① downwards ②.
Handle ① folds up.
▶ Swing the cargo compartment floor upwards using handle ① until it rests against the cargo compartment cover.
text_image
P68.00-6618-31Stowage well under the cargo compartment floor
WARNING
If you drive when the cargo compartment flo is open, objects could be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always close the cargo compartment floor before a journey.
Fold out hook ③ on the underside of the cargo compartment floor in the direction of the arrow.
text_image
④ ③ P68.00-6838-31▶ Attach hook ③ to the cargo compartment's upper seal ④.
▶ To close: detach hook ③ from the cargo compartment's upper seal ④.
▶ Fasten hook ③ to the bracket on the underside of the cargo compartment floor.
▶ Fold the trunk floor down.
▶ Press the cargo compartment floor down ② until it engages.
text_image
1 2 P69.00-6874-311 Cargo compartment floor unlocked
2 Cargo compartment floor locked
The cargo compartment floor can be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key.
Roof carrier
Important safety notes
WARNING
When you load the roof, the center of grav of the vehicle rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style.
Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof carrier is installed you can:
- raise the sliding sunroof fully
- open the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel fully
- open the tailgate fully
The maximum roof load is 220 lbs(100 kg).
Attaching the roof carrier
natural_image
Exterior view of a modern SUV with open roof and side seats (no visible text or symbols)▶ Secure the roof carrier to roof rails ①. In doing so, observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.
Features
yCup holder
Important safety notes
WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle.
• Always stow objects so that they cannot thrown around in such situations.
• Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.
- Close the lockable stowage spaces while driving.
- Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment.
! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. ①
The stowage compartments in the doors provide space for bottles with a capacity up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 l).
The bottles are not secured or prevented tipping over. Therefore, do not place any drink containers in the stowage compartments.
Cup holder in the front-compartment center console
text_image
Car interior diagram showing two car compartments with numbered labels and a blue arrow indicating direction or movement.① Cup holder
② Cover
▶ To open: slide cover ② to its foremost position.
▶ To close: pull cover ② back as far as go.
You can remove the cup holder's rubber for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.
bTemperature-controlled cup holder in the front-compartment center console
text_image
1 2 3 of P68.00-6703-31① Cup holder
② Residual heat indicator lamp
f③ Switch
The temperature-controlled cup holder can be used to keep cold drinks cool and warm drinks warm.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ To switch on the cooling function: press and hold button ③ until the blue indicator lamp on the button lights up.
▶ To switch on the heating function: press and hold button ③ until the red indicator lamp on the button lights up.
▶ To switch off the function: press and hold button ③ until the indicator lamp on the button goes out.
When the heating function is used, the metal insert of the cup holder is heated. Once a certain temperature is reached, residual heat indicator lamp ② lights up. This means that the metal insert of the cup holder is hot. For this reason, you must not reach into the cup holder metal insert.
Do not use hard or sharp objects to clean the cup holder. Use only a soft cloth to clean it. it will
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it.
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the rearrest seat, dashboard, and side armrest (no text or symbols visible)▶ Fold down the rear seat armrest.
Cup holder ① is located in the rear sea armrest.
text_image
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ P6B: 60-2338-31① Mirror light
② Bracket
③ Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
④ Vanity mirror
⑤ Mirror cover
Cup holder in the third row of seats
natural_image
Interior view of a car seat with two numbered labels pointing to the seats (no text or symbols on the seats)① Cup holder
The cup holders are located in the side trim on the left and right-hand sides.
Sun visors
Overview
WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is fo up when the vehicle is in motion, you could blinded by incident light. There is a risk of accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving.
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Mirror light ① only functions if the sun visor is clipped into bracket ② and mirror cover ⑤ has been folded up.
Glare from the side
text_image
① ② ③ m P68 60 2339 31▶ Fold down sun visor ①.
▶Dull sun visor ① out of retainer ③.
▶ Swing sun visor ① to the side.
Slide sun visor ① horizontally as required.
▶ Fold down additional sun visor ② to the windshield.
Roller sunblinds on the rear side windows
▶ Tilt pull-out profile ① as illustrated.
▶ Slip guide bush ② into open area of guide rail ③.
▶ Straighten up pull-out profile ① again.
! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand.
Do not let it snap back suddenly as this would damage the automatic roller mechanism.
Ashtray
Front ashtray
! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller sunblind hooked in and the side windows opened simultaneously. The roller sunblind
can jump out of the retainers and spring! The holder under the ashtray is not heat back suddenly when driving at high speeds, resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the e.g. when driving on the freeway. This could ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is damage the inertia reel. Therefore, either properly engaged. Otherwise, the holder close the side window or retract the roller could be damaged.
sunblind before driving at high speeds.
text_image
Diagram showing car seatbelt adjustment with numbered annotations and directional arrow
text_image
Diagram of car air intake system with numbered components and directional arrows indicating flow or movement▶ To extend: pull the roller sunblind out tab ① and hook it onto retainers ② at back of the window.
▶ To open: slide cover ① to its foremost by position.
theFold cover ③ of the insert upwards.
text_image
Diagram of a car interior showing a directional arrow and three labeled parts (①, ②, ③) with a magnified inset view.▶ To remove the insert: push insert ③ to the left ④. Insert ③ slides out slightly to the right.
▶ Lift insert ③ up ② and out.
▶ To re-install the insert: place insert ③ into the holder and press it down on the right until it engages.
▶ To close: pull cover ① back as far as it will go.
Rear-compartment ashtray
The roller sunblind can be hooked back into place should it pop out from the top of the guide rail.
Close the ashtray when it is not in use and before you fold the rear seats forward. You can otherwise damage the ashtray.
text_image
Car interior control panel with numbered arrows indicating directional movement, showing three labeled positions (①, ②, ③) and a blue arrow pointing to the bottom panel.
text_image
① ② P68.00-6816-31▶ To open: briefly press cover ② at the The ashtray opens.
▶ To remove the insert: push into recess:
③ from the right.
Ashtray insert ① slides out slightly to right.
▶ Lift insert ① up and out.
▶ To re-install the insert: place insert ① into the holder and press down on the r until it engages.
Vehicles without a Rear Seat Entertainment System have an ashtray in the center cons in the rear compartment.
Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
▶ To open: slide cover ① to its foremost position.
▶ Press in cigarette lighter ②.
Cigarette lighter ② will pop out
automatically when the heating element is red-hot.
▶ To close: pull cover ① back as far as it will go.
Cigarette lighter
WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
• the hot cigarette lighter falls
- a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
12 V sockets
General notes
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
With the exception of the socket in the front center console, all sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum current draw of 240 W (20 A). The socket in the front center console can be used for accessories with a maximum current draw of 180 W (15 A).
Accessories include such items as lamps or chargers for mobile phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may
! The cigarette lighter in the center console discharge.
in the front compartment is not intended for operating the tire inflation compressor.
i An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If
the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine.
Socket in the front-compartment center console
! The socket is not suitable for operating the tire inflation compressor.
text_image
① TV ② P68.00-6817-31▶ To open: slide cover ① to its foremost position.
▶ Lift up the cover of socket ②.
▶ To close: pull cover ① back as far as go.
Socket in the rear-compartment center console
text_image
① P54.10-3491-31▶ Lift up the cover of socket ①.
Vehicles with the Rear Seat Entertainment System have two sockets in the center console in the rear compartment.
Socket in the cargo compartment
text_image
1 12 V MAX.20 A▶ Lift up the cover of socket ①.
115 V socket
Important safety notes
DANGER
When a suitable device is connected, the 115 V power socket will be carrying a high voltage. You could receive an electric shock if the connector cable or the 115 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.
- Use only connector cables that are dry and free of damage.
- When the ignition is off, make sure that the 115 V power socket is dry.
- Have the 115 V power socket checked or replaced immediately at a qualified specialized workshop if it is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
- Never plug the connector cable into a 115 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
DANGER
If you reach into the power socket or plug inappropriate devices into the power socket, you could receive an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Only connect appropriate devices to the power socket.
! Note that work and repairs on the 115 ▶Insert the plug of the electronic device into power socket should only be carried out by 15 V power socket ①. qualified specialist personnel. Indicator lamp ② lights up.
General notes
115 V power socket provides an alternating voltage of 115 V so that small electronic devices can be connected. These devices, such as games consoles, chargers and laptops, should not consume more than a maximum of 150 watts altogether.
Requirements for operation of these devices:
- the electronic device that you connect has a suitable connector and conforms to standards specific to the country you are in.
- the plug of the electronic device is plugged correctly into 115 V power socket.
- the maximum wattage of the device to be connected must not exceed 150 watts.
- the on-board power supply is within a permissible voltage range.
- the 12 V sockets in the rear compartment and the cargo compartment are operational.
▶ To turn off: disconnect the plug from 115 V power socket ①.
Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.
Using the 115 V power socket
text_image
① ② ③ P82.00-2858-31▶ To switch on: switch the ignition on.
▶ Open flap ③.
Problems with the 115 V power socket
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The warning lamp on the 115 V power socket is not lit. | The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too ▶ Start the engine.or ▶ Charge the battery (▷ page 394).If the indicator lamp still does not light up: ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too ▶ Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V s ▶ Let the DC/AC converter cool down.If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down converter: ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| You have connected an electronic device that has a constar nominal power of less than 150 watts, but a very high swit current. This device will not work. If you connect such a de the 115 V power socket will not supply it with power. ▶ Connect a suitable device. |
mbrace
General notes
You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To log in, press the MB Info call button. Any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines:
• USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
• Canada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367
Shortly after successfully registering with the service, a user ID and password will be sent to you by post.
USA only: you can use this password to log a onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
The system is available if:
- it has been activated and is operational
- the corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Customer Center
- a service subscription is available
• the starter battery is sufficiently charged
i Determining the location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if:
• GPS reception is available.
- the vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center.
The mbrace system
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as follows:
▶ Press the + or - button on the multifunction steering wheel.
or
▶ Use the volume controller of the audio system/COMAND.
The system offers various services, e.g.:
• Automatic and manual emergency call
• Roadside Assistance call
- MB Info call
USA only: you can find information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
System self-test
After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis.
A malfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following occurs:
- The indicator lamp in the SOS button do not come on during the system self-test.
- The indicator lamp in the 📊 Roadside Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.
- The indicator lamp in the i MB Info button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.
- The indicator lamp in one or more of the vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure following buttons continues to light up red the vehicle in accordance with national after the system self-diagnosis: regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.
- SOS button
- 📞 Roadside Assistance call button
- 📞 i MB Info call button
• After the system self-diagnosis, the Inoperative or Service Not
ActivatedActivated message appears multifunction display.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as
expected. In the event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means.
Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the following service hotlines:
• USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
• Canada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367
Emergency call
Important safety notes
WARNING
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, even if you have pressed the SOS button in an emergency if:
- you see smoke inside or outside of the vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident
- the vehicle is on a dangerous section of s road
- the vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
cave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Move to a safe location along with other
e vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.
You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To register, press the i MB Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried outhe the system may not be activated.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as
If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines:
• USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
• Canada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367
General notes
An emergency call is dialed automatically if means. an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. Making
You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated manually.
As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The multifunction display shows the Connecting Call message.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display.
All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example:
- Current location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system)
• Vehicle identification number
• Information on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Customer
Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants.
- If the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the emergency.
- If there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, the system has been unable to initiate an emergency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously.
The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display and must be confirmed. In this case, summon assistance by other
Making an emergency call
text_image
① ② P82.95-2910-31▶ To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover ① briefly to open.
▶ Press SOS button ② briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ② flashes until the emergency call is concluded.
▶ Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
▶ After the emergency call, close cover ①.
If the mobile phone network is unavailable, mbrace will not be able to make the emergency call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after pressing the SOS button, you will not know whether mbrace placed the emergency call. In this case, always summon assistance by other means.
Roadside Assistance button
text_image
P82.95-2911-31▶ Press Roadside Assistance button ①. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button ① flashes while the call is active. The multifunction display shows the Connecting Call message. The audio output is muted.
Benz technician or makes arrangements for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing.
Further details are available in your mbrace manual.
i The system has not been able to initiate a roadside assistance call, if:
- the indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance call button ① is flashing continuously. - no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example.
The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display.
If a connection can be made, the CallCall ▶ To end a call: press the 📞 button on ConnectedConnected message appears in the multifunction steering wheel.
multifunction display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Press the corresponding button for ending a phone call on the audio system or on COMAND.
- Current location of the vehicle
• Vehicle identification number
The audio system or COMAND display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants.
From the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center can ascertain the nature the problem (▷ page 362).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-
MB Info call button
text_image
menu , P82.95-2912-31▶ Press MB Info call button ①. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz of Customer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in MB Info call button ① flashes while the connection is being made. The multifunction display
shows the Connecting Call message.
The audio system is muted.
▶ To end a call: press the
multifunction steering wheel.
button o
If a connection can be made, the CallCal or
ConnectedConnected message appears in the Press the corresponding button for ending multifunction display. a phone call on the audio system or on
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception COMAND. are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, Call priority for example: When service
- Current location of the vehicle
• Vehicle identification number
The audio system or COMAND display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation m by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants.
You receive information about operating your vehicle, about the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and about other products and services from Mercedes-Benz.
USA only: you can find further information the mbrace system under "Owners Online" http://www.mbusa.com.
i The system has not been able to initiate an MB Info call, if:
- the indicator lamp in MB Info call button ① is flashing continuously.
- no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. in
The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display.
,Call priority
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and overrid all other active calls.
The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended.
An emergency call can only be terminated the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
All other calls can be ended by pressing:
- the button on the multifunction ar steering wheel
- the corresponding button on the audio system or on COMAND for ending a telephone call
When a call is initiated, the audio system is muted. The mobile phone is no longer connected to COMAND. However, if you want to use your mobile phone, do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location.
Downloading destinations in COMAND
Downloading destinations
Downloading destinations gives you access one a database with over 15 million points of interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navigation system in your vehicle. If you know the destination, the address can be downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the location of Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity.
Furthermore, you can download routes with up to 20 way points.
You are prompted to confirm route guidance to the address entered.
The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered.
If you select No, the address can be saved in the address book.
i The destination download function is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and data transfer is possible.
i The destination download function can only be used if the vehicle is equipped a navigation system.
Route Assistance
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package and cannot be purchased separately.
You can also use the Route Assistance function if your vehicle is not equipped a navigation system.
Within the framework of this service, you receive a professional and reliable form of navigation support without having to leave your vehicle.
The customer service representative finds a suitable route depending on your vehicle's current position and the desired destination. You will then be guided live through the current route section.
Search & Send
General notes
To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be equipped with mbrace and a navigation system. Additionally, an mbrace service subscription must be completed.
"Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A destination address which is four on Google Maps can be transferred via mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation system.
Specifying and sending the destination address
▶ Go to the website http://www.maps.google.com and enter a destination address into the entry field.
▶ To send the destination address to the e-mail address of your mbrace account: click on the corresponding button on the website.
Example: If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will be sent to your vehicle.
When the "Send" dialog window appears: Enter the e-mail address you specified when setting up your mbrace account into the corresponding field.
▶ Click "Send".
i Information on specific commands such as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found with the website.
Calling up destination addresses
▶ Switch on the ignition. The destination address is loaded into the vehicle's navigation system. A display message appears, asking whether navigation should be started.
▶ Select Yes by turning (☐) or sliding ←→ the COMAND controller and press → to confirm.
The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered.
i If you select No, the address can be saved in the address book.
e i If you have sent more than one destination address, each individual destination must be confirmed separately.
Destination addresses are loaded in the same order as the order in which they were sent.
If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with mbrace and activated mbrac accounts:
If multiple vehicles are registered under same e-mail address, the destination will be sent to all the vehicles.
Vehicle remote opening
You can use the vehicle remote opening if have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a replacement SmartKey is not available. The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes remotely.
Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately opened remotely within four days of the ignition be turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened remotely.
▶ Contact the following service hotlines:
• USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
• Canada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your password.
▶ Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:
- the Internet, under the "Owners Online" section
- the telephone application (e.g. iPhone Blackberry)
To do this, you will need your identification number and password.
i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if the corresponding mobile phone network is accessible.
Vehicle remote closing
The remote closing feature can be used when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you are no longer nearby.
The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote closing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle can no longer be closed
▶ Contact the following service hotlines:
• USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer & Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
• Canada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your password.
The next time you are inside the vehicle and you switch on the ignition, the DoorsDoors Locked Remotely message appears in the multifunction display.
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:
- the Internet, under the "Owners Online" section
- the telephone application (e.g. iPhone Blackberry)
To do this, you will need your identification number and password.
The vehicle remote closing feature is available when the relevant mobile phone network is available and data connection is possible.
Stolen vehicle recovery service
If your vehicle has been stolen:
▶ Notify the police. The police will issue a numbered incident report.
This number will be forwarded to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center together with your PIN. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center then tries to locate the system. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center contacts you and the local law enforcement agency if the vehicle is located.
However, only the law enforcement agency is informed of the location of the vehicle.
If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center is automatically informed.
Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis
With the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), the Customer Assistance center can provide improved support for problems with your vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Customer Assistance center. The customer service representative can use the received data to decide what I of assistance is required. You are then, for example, guided to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicle is called.
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance of this is initiated by the Customer Assistance center. You will see the RoadsideRoadside Assistance Connected message in the COMAND display. If the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis can be started, the Request for vehicle diagnosis received. Start vehicle diagnosis? message appears in the display.
- Confirm the message with Yes. - When the Vehicle Diagnosis Please start ignition message appears, turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▶ page 167). - When the Please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position. message appears, follow the customer service representative's instructions. The message in the display disappears. If you select Cancel, the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis is canceled completely. - The vehicle operating state check begins. You will see the Vehicle diagnosis activated. message.
When the diagnosis is completed, the Send vehicle diagnostics data//(Voice connection may be//interrupted during data transfer) message appears. The vehicle data can now be sent to the Customer Assistance center.
▶ Press OK to confirm the message. The voice connection with the Customer Assistance center is terminated. a You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis: Transferring data... message. The vehicle data is sent to the Customer kind Assistance center.
Depending on what the customer service representative agreed with you, the voice connection is re-established after the transfer is complete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone.
Further functions of the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis include, for example:
- transfer of service data to the Customer Assistance center. If a service is overdue, the COMAND display shows a message
about various special offers at your workshop.
- monthly status information e-mail on oil level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes, etc. If applicable, you will receive information on special offers in the e-mail USA only: this information can also be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Information on the data stored in the vehicle (▷ page 29).
Information on Roadside Assistance (▷ page 25).
Downloading routes
Downloading routes allows you to transfer and save predefined routes in the navigation system. To do this, an SD memory card must be inserted into the COMAND system. If no SD memory card is inserted, you must insert the card into the card slot on the COMAND system before saving.
A route can be prepared and sent either customer service representative or via the mbrace portal on the Internet.
Each route can include up to 20 way point. Once a route has been received by the navigation system, you will see the
The route is saved to the SD memory caro
▶ To start route guidance: select Yes.
An overview of the route is shown in the display.
If you select No, the saved route can be called up later via the navigation menu.
▶ Select StartStart. Route guidance is started.
Downloaded and saved data can be call up again in COMAND. You can find further information in the separate COMAND Operating Instructions.
Speed alert
You can define the upper speed limit, which must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a message will be sent to the Customer Assistance center. The Customer Assistance center then forwards this information to you.
You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call.
The data you receive contains the following information:
- the location where the speed limit was exceeded
n the time at which the speed limit was ust exceeded
• the selected speed limit which was ert exceeded
Geo fencing
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries of the selected areas. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated
call AND display.
dThe area can be determined as either a circle or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.
You can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Different settings are possible for each area.
USA only: these settings can be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and inform the customer service representative that you wish to activate geo fencing.
Currently inactive areas can be activated by text message.
Triggering the vehicle alarm
With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on the setting, the pan alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards the alarm switches off.
Garage door opener
General notes
The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and g systems.
Use the integrated garage door opener only on garage doors that:
• have safety stop and reverse features and
- meet current U.S. federal safety standards
Once programmed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system.
When programing a garage door opener, paper the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run engine while programming.
Certain garage door drives are incompatible Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" with the integrated garage door opener. If (you page 364).
have difficulty programing the integrated garage door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services:
• USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
• Canada: Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100
- HomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of charge)
More information on HomeLink and/or compatible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com.
Notes on the declaration of conformity (▷ page 27).
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
WARNING
When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury.
When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door.
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
r these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There the a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
Programming
Programming buttons
text_image
1 2 3 4 6 5 P68.05-2225-31Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (youpage 364).
Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror
Garage door remote control ⑤ is not included with the integrated garage door opener.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
▶ Select one of buttons ② to ④ to use control the garage door drive.
▶ To start programing mode: press and hold one of buttons ② to ④ of the integrated garage door opener.
The garage door opener is now in programing mode. After a short time, indicator lamp ① lights up yellow.
Indicator lamp ① lights up yellow as soon as button ②, ③ or ④ is programmed for first time. If the selected button has already
been programmed, indicator lamp ① will only light up yellow after ten seconds ha elapsed.
▶ Release button ②, ③ or ④. Indicator lamp ① flashes yellow.
▶ To program the remote control: point garage door remote control ⑤ towards buttons ② to ④ on the rear-view mirror a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm
▶ Press and hold button ⑥ on remote con ⑤ until indicator lamp ① lights up green. When indicator lamp ① lights up green: programing is finished.
When indicator lamp ① flashes green: programing was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code.
▶ Release button ⑥ on remote control ⑤ the garage door drive system.
If indicator lamp ① lights up red: repeat the programing procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control ⑤ and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote control ⑤ and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be
necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" to page 364).
If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronize the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will need to use the programing button on the door drive control panel. The programing button may be placed at different locations.
depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling.
Familiarize yourself with the garage door adeive operating instructions, e.g. under
"Programming of additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps.
Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate.
▶Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the Ignition lock (▷ page 167).
▶ Get out of the vehicle.
▶ Press the programing button on the door drive unit.
Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step.
▶ Get into the vehicle.
▶ Press previously programmed button ②, ③ or ④ of the integrated garage door opener until the door closes.
The rolling code synchronization is then complete.
Notes on programing the remote control
Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.
^e Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door
opener. The signal is not recognized during Problems when programming
programming. Comparable with Canadian law, If you are experiencing problems programing some U.S. garage door openers also feature the integrated garage door opener on the a "break". rear-view mirror, take note of the following
Proceed as follows:
- if you live in Canada
- if you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when using the programming steps
▶ Press and hold one of buttons ② to ④ o the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp ① lights up yellow.
▶ Release the button. Indicator lamp ① flashes yellow.
▶ Press button ⑥ of garage door remote control ⑤ for two seconds, then release for two seconds.
▶ Press button ⑥ again for two seconds.
▶ Repeat this sequence on button ⑥ of remote control ⑤ until indicator lamp ① lights up green.
When indicator lamp ① lights up green: programing is finished.
When indicator lamp ① flashes green: programing was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code.
▶ Release button ⑥ of remote control ⑤ of the garage door drive.
If indicator lamp ① blinks red: repeat the programing process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control ⑤ and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote control ⑤ and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
Problems when programming
If you are experiencing problems programing the integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instructions:
- Check the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote control ⑤ and whether it is supported. The transmitter's frequency can usually be found on the back of the garage door drive remote control. On The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that have units which operate in the frequency range of 280 to 433 MHz.
- Replace the batteries in garage door remote control ⑤. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control it ⑤ will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror.
- When programing, hold remote control ⑤ at varying distances and angles from the button that you are programing. Try various angles at a distance between 2 and 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances.
- If another remote control for the same garage door drive is available, repeat the same programing steps with this remote control. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote control ⑤.
• Note that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button ⑥ on remote control ⑤ again before transmission ends.
- Align the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission.
Opening/closing the garage door
After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
▶ Press button ②, ③ or ④ which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp ① lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp ① flashes green.
securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.
text_image
1 2 1 1 P68.00-0613-31The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp ① lights up yellow. Press button ②, ③ or ④ again if necessary.
Clearing the memory
Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
▶ Press and hold buttons ② and ④.
The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green.
▶ Release buttons ② and ④.
The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
Fgoormat on the driver's side (example)
isDriver's seat/front-passenger seat: slide the respective seat back.
▶ Rear seats: slide the respective seat forwards.
▶ To install: place the floormat in the footwell.
thePress studs ① onto retainers ②.
To remove: pull the floormat from retainers ②.
▶ Remove the floormat.
Infrared reflective windshield
text_image
or the P67.10-2392-31Floormats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle. The infrared reflecting glass prevents the is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident vehicle interior from becoming too hot. It also Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are blocks radio waves up into the gigahertz stowed correctly, and that they cannot enterrange. the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
To enable operation of radio-controlled equipment, e.g. toll recording systems, areas on the windshield are permeable to radio waves ①. In these areas, you can install radio-controlled systems.
These areas can best be seen from outside the vehicle by observing the light reflected off the windshield.
Useful information 370
Engine compartment 370
ASSYST PLUS 374
Care 376
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 28).
Engine compartment
Hood
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up who the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
There is a risk of an accident.
Never unlatch the hood while driving.
WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood.
Open and close the hood only when no one within its range of movement.
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.
WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine may compartment:
- switch off the ignition
- never reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area
- remove jewelry and watches
- keep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts
WARNING
The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. If you touch components which are under voltage, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of injury.
Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on.
Opening the hood
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.
WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood.
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood.
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior with a magnified inset showing a blue arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)▶ Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off.
▶ Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released.
natural_image
Front view of a Mercedes-Benz car with a blue arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols on the car itself)▶ Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ; up and lift the hood. If you lift the hood by approximately 15 (40 cm), the hood is opened and held op automatically by the gas-filled strut.
Closing the hood
▶ Lower the hood and let it fall from a hei of approximately 8 in (20 cm).
▶ Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force.
Radiator
Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not cover the radiator, for example with a winter front or bug cover. The readings of the on-board-diagnostic system may otherwise be inaccurate. Some of these readings are required by law and must be accurate at all times.
Engine oil
General notes
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil pe 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
- park the vehicle on a level surface.
- the engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature.
- if the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement.
Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.
text_image
Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts and an inset magnified view highlighting a specific feature.Example: vehicles with a gasoline engine
text_image
Diagram of a car engine component with numbered parts and an inset close-up showing a key inserted into the engine.Example: vehicles with a diesel engine
▶ Pull oil dipstick ① out of the dipstick gu tube.
▶ Wipe off oil dipstick ①.
▶ Slowly slide oil dipstick ① into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark ③ and MAX mark ②, the oil level is correct.
▶ If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark ③ or below, add 1.1 US qt(1.0 liter) eng oil.
Adding engine oil
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.
WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the components before starting the engine.
Environmental note
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment.
! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service center.
Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following:
• using engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system
- replacing engine oil and oil filters after the interval for replacement specified by the service system has been exceeded
• using engine oil additives.
!eDo not add too much oil. adding too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off.
text_image
① P01.00-3250-31Example: engine oil cap
▶ Turn cap ① counter-clockwise and remove it.
▶ Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil.
▶ Replace cap ① on the filler neck and turn clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.
▶ Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (▷ page 371).
Further information on engine oil (▷ page 449).
Additional service products
Checking coolant level
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.
WARNING
The engine cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the engine is warm. When
opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before opening the cap. Wear eye and hand protection when opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a turn to allow pressure to escape.
text_image
Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts and a magnified circular detail highlighting a blue arrow.Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (▷ page 167).
▶ Check the coolant temperature gauge in the multifunction display.
The coolant temperature must be below 158 °F (70 °C).
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position
0 (▷ page 167) in the ignition lock.
▶ Slowly turn cap ① half a turn counterclockwise to allow excess pressure to escape.
Turn cap ① further counter-clockwise and remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar ③ in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ②.
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above marker bar ③ in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in expansion tank ②.
▶ If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
▶ Replace cap ① and turn it clockwise as far as it will go.
For further information on coolant, see (▷ page 450).
Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot
engine components or the exhaust system it could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injur
Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
text_image
far ① d P82 35-2690-31Example: washer fluid reservoir
text_image
① P82 35-2691-31Example: washer fluid reservoir in AMG vehicles
▶ To open: pull cap ① upwards by the tab.
▶ Add the premixed washer fluid.
▶ To close: press cap ① onto the filler neck until it engages.
If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to add washer fluid (▷ page 322).
Further information on windshield washer fluid/antifreeze (▷ page 451).
ASSYST PLUS
Service message
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date.
Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Maintenance Booklet).
You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (▷ page 371).
The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.:
• Service A in .. Days
- Service A Due
• Service A Exceeded by .. Days
Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed.
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, shows the type service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service.
You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected.
Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule:
▶ Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery.
or
▶ After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display.
Hiding a service message
▶ Press the steering wheel.
Displaying service messages
▶ Switch on the ignition.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the way steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the OK button.
The service due date appears in the multifunction display.
Information about Service
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop.
Have service work carried out as described in the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example.
Special service requirements
The specified maintenance interval takes only the normal operation of the vehicle into account. Under arduous operating conditions or increased load on the vehicle, maintenance work must be carried out more frequently, for example:
- regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops
- if the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances
- use in mountainous terrain or on poor road should drive for a few minutes after surfaces - if the engine is often left idling for long periods cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked.
Under these or similar conditions, have, for Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filtetaining the quality in the long term. replaced or changed more frequently. Under Use care products and cleaning agents arduous operating conditions, the tires must recommended and approved by Mercedes-be checked more often. Further information Benz.
can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Automatic car wash
WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored.
Care
General notes
Environmental note
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations:
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following:
• dry, rough or hard cloths
• abrasive cleaning agents
- solvents
- cleaning agents containing solvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film.
ny • when towing the vehicle
- in the car wash
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
! Make sure that:
- the side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed.
- the ventilation/heating is switched off (the OFF button has been pressed).
- the windshield wiper switch is in position 0.
Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
In car washes with a towing mechanism, make sure that the automatic transmission
is in transmission position N, otherwise vehicle could be damaged.
- Vehicles with a SmartKey: Do not remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels. You can prevent this by shifting the automatic transmission to N beforehand.
- Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door when the engine is switched off. Otherwise, the automatic transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels.
Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in position N:▶
▶ Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off. Wh
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position
2 (▷ page 167) in the ignition lock.
Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/
Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-G
▶ Depress and hold the brake pedal.
▶ Shift the automatic transmission to position N.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶ Release the electric parking brake.
▶ Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic wash from the very start.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield.
tWashing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned.
▶ Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
▶ Use a soft sponge to clean.
Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
▶ Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water.
▶ Do not point the water jet directly toward the air inlets.
▶ Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently.
▶ Rinse the vehicle with clean water and d
the thoroughly with a chamois.
▶ Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork.
When using the vehicle in winter, remove traces of road salt deposits carefully and soon as possible.
Power washers
WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components.
Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged car tires or chassis components replaced immediately.
! Always maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following agree to five months, depending on the
- tires
• door gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
• electrical components - battery
- connectors
- lights
- seals
- trim
- ventilation slots
Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures.
Cleaning the paintwork
! Do not affix:
- stickers
- films
- magnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard.
▶ Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
▶ Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
▶ Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.
▶ Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
▶ Use silicone remover to remove wax.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the p surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately every agree to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used. If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used.
Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot.
▶ Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paintwork quickly and provisionally.
Matte finish care
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.
! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matte effect:
- Vigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials.
- Frequent use of car washes.
- Washing the vehicle in direct sunlight.
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas).
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish.
The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water.
Use only insect remover and car shampoo away. This can lead to corrosion damage from the range of recommended and damage to electronic components.
▶ Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the vehicle parts
Cleaning the wheels
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning product to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheer cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked.
Cleaning the windows
WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield of wiper blades.
Cleaning wiper blades
WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield of wiper blades.
Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise.
Hold the wiper arm securely when folding the back. The windshield could be damaged if of the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
▶ Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield.
▶ Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth.
▶ Fold the windshield wiper arms back again, before switching on the ignition.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the window
Do not touch the insides of the windows! with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.
! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals ▶ and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining
Cleaning the exterior lighting
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning ng cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or
cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses.
▶ Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild g cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.
Mirror turn signals
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals.
- Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.
Cleaning the sensors
! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) be the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.
text_image
Diagram of a Mercedes-Benz car's grille with labeled components and a numbered annotation pointing to the grille.
natural_image
Front view of a car's back edge with blue outline marking (no text or symbols)▶ Clean sensors ① of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the rear view camera
! Do not clean the camera lens and the are with ⚙.
around the rear view camera with a power The cover of the 360° camera opens.
washer.
natural_image
Front view of a Mercedes-Benz car with a close-up inset showing the rear wheel (no text or symbols on the car itself)▶ Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens ①.
Cleaning the 360° camera
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area we around the 360° camera with a power washer.360
natural_image
Front view of a Mercedes-Benz car with a circular inset highlighting the front wheel (no text or symbols on the car itself)▶ Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ To open the cover of the 360° camera: with COMAND activated, press the SYS button.
▶ Select System by turning (☐) the COMAND controller and press 🔍 to confirm.
▶ Select 360° Camera and press 🔒 to confirm.
▶ Select Open Camera Cover and confirm
erThe cover of the 360° camera opens.
▶ To clean the 360^ camera: clean camera lens ① with clean water and a soft cloth.
If you drive at speeds above 20 mph The ball coupling must be cleaned if it (30 km/h) or with the SmartKey in position becomes dirty or corroded.
0 or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover 360^ camera closes automatically.
▶ Remove rust on the ball of the ball coupling, e.g. with a wire brush.
▶ Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a brush.
Cleaning the exhaust pipe
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with a based cleaning agents such as sanitary cleansers or wheel cleaners.
After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball coupling ①.
▶ Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is and working properly.
Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing.
You can also have the maintenance work on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried out by a qualified specialist workshop.
- Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch
Environmental note
Dispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in environmentally responsible manner.
! Do not clean the ball coupling with a power washer. Do not use solvents.
! Please note the care instructions in the trailer coupling manufacturer's operating instructions.
natural_image
Front view of a car's rear bumper with visible grille and side stripes (no text or symbols)Interior care
Cleaning the display
! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
• alcohol-based thinner or gasoline
- abrasive cleaning agents
• commercially-available household cleaning agents
These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display.
▶ Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down.
▶ Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner.
▶ Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber cloth.
Cleaning Night View Assist Plus
! Never clean the camera lens. When cleaning the field of vision of the driving systems, make sure that you do not spray glass cleaner on the camera lens. If the
camera lens is dirty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the rearview mirror and dashboard, with a magnified inset highlighting a component labeled '1' (no text or symbols on main subject)▶ Fold down the camera cover by recess
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a close-up inset showing a component detail (no text or symbols visible)▶ Use a soft cloth to clean the windshield front of camera ②.
Cleaning the plastic trim
WARNING
Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. As a result, plastic parts may come loose in the event of air bag deployment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning agents to clean the cockpit.
! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:
- stickers
- films
• scented oil bottles or similar items You can otherwise damage the plastic.
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces.
▶ Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
▶ Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change color temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again.
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever
▶ Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim elements
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk in of damaging the surface.
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces.
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
▶ Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
▶ Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the seat covers
General notes
! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean genuine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA covers. If used often, these can damage the cover.
Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort the covers is retained over time.
Genuine leather seat covers
! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions:
- Clean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth.
- Make sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked.
- Only use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop.
Leather is a natural product.
It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for example:
• differences in the texture
• marks caused by growth and injury
- slight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not material defects.
Seat covers of other materials
! Observe the following when cleaning:
- Clean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
- Clean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry
afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there.
- Clean Alcantara® covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines.
Cleaning the seat belts
WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 °F (80 °C) or in direct sunlight.
▶ Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets
▶ Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brus or dry shampoo.
▶ Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Useful information 386
Where will I find...? 386
Flat tire 387
Battery (vehicle) 391
Jump-starting 395
Towing and tow-starting 397
Fuses 400
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 28).
Where will I find...?
Vehicle tool kit
General notes
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor.
Apart from certain country-specific variations, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which V tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tools required for changing a wheel may include, for example:
- Jack
- Wheel chock
- Lug wrench
- Ratchet wrench
- Alignment bolt
Vehicles with a TREFIT kit
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P58.00-6974-31① Lug wrench
② Towing eye
③ Ratchet wrench
④ Alignment bolt
⑤ Tire sealant filler bottle
⑥ Tire inflation compressor
⑦ Folding wheel chock
⑧ Jack
⑨ Wheel bolts
▶ Lift the cargo compartment floor up (▷ page 347).
▶ Use the TREFIT kit (▷ page 388).
Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P5B.10-2298-31① Alignment bolt
② Velcro fastener
③ Folding wheel chock
④ Ratchet wrench
⑤ Lug wrench
⑥ Jack
⑦ Wheel bolts
⑧ Towing eye
▶ Lift the cargo compartment floor up (▷ page 347).
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
- MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) (▷ page 387) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires.
- a TREFIT kit (▷ page 386)
- an emergency spare wheel (only for certain countries) (▷ page 439)
Information on changing/mounting a wheel (▷ page 427).
▶ Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic.
▶ Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).
▶ If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.
▶ Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD
package: make sure that highway level selected (▷ page 212).
▶ Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD
package: make sure that highway level selected (▷ page 212).
▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
▶ Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey have been removed.
▶ Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
▶ All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so.
▶ Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier.
▶ Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so.
▶ Close the driver's door.
▶ Unload heavy luggage.
i Only operate the tire inflation compresses using a 12 V socket, even if the ignitions turned off (▷ page 352).
An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine.
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties)
General notes
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. The affected tire must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking next to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index (▷ page 421).
SMOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor.
If the pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: Important safety notes
- Observe the instructions in the display messages (▷ page 318).
- Check the tire for damage.
- If driving on, observe the following notes.
The maximum driving distance is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden.
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon:
- Speed
- Road condition
- Outside temperature
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving.
The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode is counted the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING
When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle.
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
- you hear banging noises.
• the vehicle starts to shake. - you see smoke and smell rubber.
- ESP® is intervening constantly.
• there are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. rom
TREFIT kit
Important safety notes
When replacing one or all tires, make suitREFIT is a tire sealant.
that you use only tires:
• of the size specified for the vehicle
- marked "MOExtended"
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be used as a tempora measure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tire).
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to -4 °F (-20 °C).
WARNING
In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
A TREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
- there are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above.
• the wheel rim is damaged. - you have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified Using the TREFIT kit specialist workshop.
WARNING
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following:
- Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water.
- If the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water.
- If tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately.
- Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant.
- If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.
text_image
max.80 km/h max.50 mph Replace cycle without delay Explan unimpacted speed i THREFTI ① ② P40.10-5007-31TREFIT sticker, 2-part
▶ Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.
▶ Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompanying TREFIT sticker and the tire inflation compressor from the stowage well underneath the cargo compartment floor (▶ page 386).
▶Affix part ① of the TIREFIT sticker within the driver's field of vision.
▶ Affix part ② of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor.
text_image
wise ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ tion P40.10-5509-31▶ Pull plug ④ with the cable and hose ⑤ out of the housing.
▶ Screw hose ⑤ onto flange ⑥ of tire sealant bottle ①.
▶ Place tire sealant bottle ① head downwards into recess ② of the tire inflation compressor.
text_image
7 8 P40.10-5899-31▶ Remove the cap from valve ⑦ on the fat tire.
▶ Screw filler hose ⑧ onto valve ⑦.
▶ Insert connector ④ into a 12 V socket your vehicle.
Observe the notes on sockets (▷ page 352).
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
▶ Press on/off switch ③ on the tire inflati compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated.
i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase.
▶ Allow the tire inflation compressor to run for five minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes: (▷ page 390).
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes: (▷ page 390).
If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. can then be removed like a layer of film
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible.
Tire pressure not reached
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes:
▶ Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
▶ Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire.
▶ Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m).
▶ Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of five minutes the tire pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).
in! WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving
Characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Fire pressure reached
WARNING
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.
! Residue from the tire sealant may come out of the filler hose after use. This could cause stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TREFIT kit.
Environmental note
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop.
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes:
▶ Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
▶ Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire.
▶ Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor.
▶ Pull away immediately.
The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of the TREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's field of vision.
▶ Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure with the tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached ▶ after driving for a short period, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
text_image
10 9 P40.10-5657-31⑨ Pressure release button ⑩ Pressure gauge
▶ To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure release button ⑨ on the filler hose.
▶ Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor.
▶ Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire changed ther
▶ Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist air workshop.
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop.
In cases such as the one mentioned above, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
▶ Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values.
▶ To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor.
Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notes
Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installing. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out least qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting system, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example:
- braking
- in the event of abrupt steering maneuver and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk an explosion.
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up.
WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
- Make sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
- Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
- It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery.
- When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
- It is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables.
- Never connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when charging the battery as well as when jump-starting.
Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for example:
- by wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers
- due to friction between clothing and seats
- if you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials
- if you wipe the battery with a cloth
Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment.
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a
special collection point for used batteries.
! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information.
You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. In the exceptional case that it is necessary for you to disconnect the battery yourself, make sure that:
- you switch off the engine and remove the SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switched
off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise electronic components, such as the alternator, may be damaged.
- you first remove the negative terminal clamp and then the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clampss. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic d system may be damaged.
- the transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. The b vehicle is secured against rolling away. T You can then no longer move the vehi The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be installed securely during operation.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from buffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the
maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged.
Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.
workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information.
Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified
are specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
i Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical g. consumers. The vehicle will then use very
little energy, thus conserving battery power.
If the power supply has been interrupted, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will warning lamps in the instrument cluster do have to: not light up, it is highly likely that the
- set the clock. Information on setting the clock can be found in the separate operating instructions.
On vehicles with COMAND and a navigation system, the clock is set automatically.
- reset the function for folding the exter mirrors in/out automatically, by folding the mirrors out once (▷ page 123).
df, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/Warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified @specialist workshop.
Charging the battery
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of inj Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention.
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.
Never charge a battery still installed in the vehicle unless a battery charger unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used. An accessory battery charge unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Charge the battery in accordance with the separate instructions for the battery charger.
The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (▷ page 395).
Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery.
▶ Open the hood.
Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (▷ page 395).
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean of the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention.
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a rise of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or space are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
- Make sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
- Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
- It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery.
- When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
- It is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables.
- Never connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an expl Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may not jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points:
- The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
- Vehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
- Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
- Only jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
- Only use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
- If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connection for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
• Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
• the jumper cables are not damaged.
- when the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.
- the jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
- Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
▶ Shift the transmission to position P.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (▷ page 167). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off (▷ page 167). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off.
▶ Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
▶ Open the hood.
text_image
Diagram showing automotive battery connection with labeled parts and close-up insets highlighting key components(Example)
Position number ⑥ identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jur starting device.
▶ Slide cover ① of positive terminal ② in the direction of the arrow.
▶ Connect positive terminal ② on your vehicle to positive terminal ③ of donor battery ⑥ using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ② on your own vehicle first
▶ Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
▶ Connect negative terminal ④ of donor battery ⑥ to ground point ⑤ of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle ⑥ first.
▶ Start the engine.
▶ Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
▶ First, remove the jumper cables from ground point ⑤ and negative terminal ④, then from positive clamp ② and positive terminal ③. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.
▶ Close cover ① of positive terminal ② after removing the jumper cables.
▶ Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.
Towing and tow-starting
Important safety notes
WARNING
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or no longer available if:
• the engine is not running.
- the brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning.
- there is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more force may be necessary to steer or brake. There is a risk of an accident.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, make sure that the steering moves freely.
WARNING
If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or started is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle:
• the towing eye could detach itself
- the vehicle/trailer combination could rollover.
There is a risk of an accident.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations:
- when towing the vehicle
- in the car wash
! Make sure that the electric parking brake vehicle identification plate; see the printed is released. If the electric parking brake is Operator's Manual. faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop it is better to have the vehicle transported
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the to have it towed. towing eyes, or the trailer tow hitch, if If the vehicle has suffered transmission available. You could otherwise damage the damage, have it transported on a transporter vehicle. or trailer.
Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you:
When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, cannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the vehicles could be damaged. the ignition lock
When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the key instead of the Start/Stop button. Otherwise, the automatic • cannot release the electric parking brake • cannot shift the automatic transmission to position N
transmission may shift to position P when Disarm the automatic locking feature the driver's or front-passenger door are before the vehicle is towed (▶ page 284). opened, which could lead to damage to the You could otherwise be locked out when transmission. pushing or towing the vehicle.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle.
! Vehicles with differential locks: make sure the differential locks are in automatic mode. When towing, the differential locks must not be switched on. The transmission may otherwise be damaged.
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported.
! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle.
Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate (▷ page 444).
i Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle weight rating can be found on the
Installing/removing the towing eye
Installing the towing eye
text_image
① of ed. m
text_image
be its 2 P88.20-3757-31Example: towing eye mounting covers
① Front cover
② Back cover
Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: if possible, connect the towbar to the trailer tow hitch (▷ page 264).
The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the front and at the rear, behind the covers.
▶ Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit (▷ page 386).
▶ To open the cover at the front: press mark on cover ① inwards in the direction of the arrow.
▶ To open the cover at the rear: insert flat, blunt object into the cutout and lever cover ② out of the bumper.
▶ Take cover ① or ② off the opening.
▶ Screw in and tighten the towing eye clockwise to the stop.
Removing the towing eye
▶ Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
▶ Attach cover ① or ② to the bumper and press until it engages.
▶ Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool
Towing a vehicle with both axles the ground
It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (▷ page 397).
The automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the drive or front-passenger door or when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points:
▶ Make sure that the vehicle is stationary the SmartKey in the ignition lock is in position 0.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button (▷ page 167).
▶Depress and hold the brake pedal.
Shift the automatic transmission to position N.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶ Release the electric parking brake.
Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Switch on the hazard warning lamps t (▶ page 132).
In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case only the indicator lamps for the direction of travel flash. After resetting the combination switch, the hazard warning lamp starts flashing again.
Transporting the vehicle
You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such axle or steering components. Otherwise, on the vehicle could be damaged.
The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter if you wish to transport it.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Shift the automatic transmission to ve position N.
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake.
▶ Shift the automatic transmission to position P.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.
▶ Secure the vehicle.
Information on 4MATIC vehicles
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed Important safety notes with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. ⚠ WARNING
If the vehicle has transmission damage or damage to the front or rear axle, have it transported on a transporter or trailer.
In the event of damage to the electrical system
If the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To
shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (▷ page 395).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporterbe damaged. or trailer.
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage.
! For the fuse boxes in the engine compartment and under the rear bench seat, only use fuses with the suffix "S". Otherwise, components or systems could
Recovering a vehicle that has become stuck
! When recovering a vehicle that has become stuck, pull it as smoothly and evenly as possible. Excessive tractive power could damage the vehicles.
If the drive wheels have become stuck in loose or muddy ground, pull the vehicle ou with extreme caution, especially so if the vehicle is loaded.
Never attempt to recover a vehicle with a trailer attached.
Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible using the tracks it made when it became stuck.
Tow-starting (emergency engine starting)
! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission.
You can find information on "Jump-starting" under (▷ page 395).
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart.
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Before changing a fuse
Observe the important safety notes (▷ page 400)
- Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 188).
▶ Switch off all electrical consumers.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (▷ page 167). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off (▷ page 167). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
- Fuse box on the front-passenger side of dashboard
- Fuse box in the engine compartment on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel
- Fuse box under the rear bench seat
The fuse allocation chart is located in the f box under the rear bench seat (▷ page 402)
the ay attention to the important safety notes (> page 400).
WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Use Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood.
Dashboard fuse box
Observe the important safety notes (▷ page 400)
! Do not use a pointed object such as a screwdriver to open the cover in the dashboard. You could damage the dashboard or the cover.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.
When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a blue arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)▶ To open: pull cover ① outwards in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
▶ To close: clip in cover ① on the front the dashboard.
▶ Fold cover ① inwards until it engages.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.
text_image
the it are ① ② P54.15-3360-31▶ Open the hood.
▶ Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box.
▶ To open: open clamps ②.
▶ Fold up cover ① in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
▶ To close: check whether the seal is seated correctly in cover ①.
▶ Insert cover ① at the side of the fuse box into the retainers.
▶ Fold down cover ① and close clamps ②.
▶ Close the hood.
Fuse box under the rear bench seat
Pay attention to the important safety notes (▷ page 400).
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.
When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses or the cover could be damaged by the rear bench seat.
▶ Fold the left-hand rear bench seat forward (▷ page 344).
text_image
Technical diagram showing mechanical components with numbered annotations and a magnified inset highlighting a blue upward arrow.▶ To open: reach into recesses ② on each side of fuse box cover ①.
▶ Fold cover ① up in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the fuse box.
i The fuse allocation chart is located in a recess at the side of the fuse box.
▶ To close: place cover ① on the fuse box.
▶ Press cover ① down until you feel the clamps engage.
▶ Fold back the left-hand rear bench seat (▷ page 344).
Useful information 404
Important safety notes 404
Operation 404
Winter operation 406
Tire pressure 408
Loading the vehicle 415
All about wheels and tires 419
Changing a wheel 427
Wheel and tire combinations 432
Emergency spare wheel 439
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 28).
Important safety notes
WARNING
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are us the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident.
Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct:
- designation
- model
When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct:
- designation
- manufacturer
- model
WARNING
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
- do not drive with a flat tire.
- immediately replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics:
- pay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics).
Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not being used correctly can impair operating safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about:
- suitability
- legal stipulations
• factory recommendations
Information on the dimensions and types of wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found in the "Wheel/tire combinations" section (page 432).
Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found:
- on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar (▷ page 415)
the• on the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap (▷ page 184)
• in the "Tire pressure" section
Operation
Information on driving
If the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tire pressures and correct them if necessary.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. -If you find no signs of damage, have the tires
and wheels checked at a qualified specialist Regularly check the pressure of all the tires workshop. particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire
When parking your vehicle, make sure that pressure as necessary (▷ page 408).
the tires do not get deformed by the curb Observe the notes on the emergency spare other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive wheel (▷ page 439).
curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try the service life of tires depends on the to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. following factors amongst other things:
Otherwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged.
- Driving style
- Tire pressure
- Distance covered
Regular checking of wheels and tires
WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Important safety notes on the tire tread
WARNING
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
The tire is no longer able to dissipate waters. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
Regularly check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for damage at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as:
- cuts in the tires
- punctures
- tears in the tires
- bulges on tires
- deformation or severe corrosion on wheels • M+S tires: 1/6 in (4 mm)
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the for safety reasons, replace the tires before condition of the tread across the whole width the legally prescribed limit for the minimum of the tire (▷ page 405). If necessary, turn tire tread depth is reached.
the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect
the inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
text_image
t ne s, ① TWI P40.10-5338-31Bar indicator ① for tread wear is integrated. Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with into the tire tread. a flat tire ( page 387).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once the tread depth is approximately 116 in (1.6 mm). If this is case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced.
i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
Selecting, mounting and replacing tires
- Only mount tires and wheels of the same type and make.
Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (▷ page 387).
- Only mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels.
- Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). They only read their full performance after this distance. tin
- Do not drive with tires which have too I tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
- Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (▷ page 439).
Winter operation
General notes
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (▷ page 427).
Driving with summer tires
At temperatures below 45 °F (+7 °C), summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage.
M+S tires
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties)
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires.
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss
warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. At temperatures below 45 °F (+7 °C), use winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking.
WARNING
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than 16 in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident.
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than 16 in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. At temperatures below 45 °F (+7 °C), use winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking.
Only winter tires bearing the symbol in addition to the M+ provide the best possible grip conditions.
snowflake if you have installed snow chains. The king vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
Only these tires will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESPD function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and trea all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics.
Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted.
Once the winter tires are mounted:
▶ Check the tire pressures (▷ page 411).
▶ Restart the tire pressure monitor (▷ page 412).
▶ Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pressure loss warning system (▷ page 412).
For more information on driving with the emergency spare wheel, see (▷ page 439).
Snow chains
WARNING
If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
- never install snow chains to the front wheels
- always install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels.
On some tire sizes there is not enough space for snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire combinations" section under "Tires and wheels".
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality.
If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear the following points in mind:
- Only use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow.
Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that not snow-covered. - Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
- Local regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to mount snow chains.
- Snow chains may not be mounted on all wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-tire combinations (▷ page 432).
You may wish to deactivate ESP (▶ page 73) when pulling away with snow chains installed. You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action).
For more information on driving with the emergency spare wheel, see (▷ page 439).
You must drive at raised vehicle level (height 1) if snow chains have been installed. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
! Vehicles with Adaptive Damping System (ADS): do not use the sports mode
Tire pressure
Tire pressure specifications
Important safety notes
WARNING
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks:
- the tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
- the tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.
- the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel:
• monthly, at least
- if the load changes
• before beginning a long journey
• under different operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
i The specifications on the sample Tire and speed.
Loading Information placard and tire pressure tables are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle.
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tire mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here.
Operation with the emergency spare wheel(▷ page 439).
Operation with a trailer: the applicable value for the rear tires is the maximum tire pressure value stated in the table inside the fuel filler flap.
Further information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire and Loading Information placard
text_image
TIRE LOADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENT SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 7 FRONT 2 MIDDLE 3 REAR 2 NOMBRE DE PLACES AVANT AVANT MILLED ARRIÈRE The combined weight of occupants and c Le poids total des occupants et du chargement ne doit jamais dépasser xxx kg or xxx lbs. TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE PNEU DIMENSIONS PRESSION DES AVANT PNEUS À FROID SEE OWNER'S ADDITIONAL INFORMATION VEIR LE MANUEL DE L'USAGER POUR PLUS DE RENSIGNEMENTS FRONT AVANT AVANT 255/40 ZR18 99Y XL 209 KPA, 29 PSI REAR ARRIÈRE 286/35 ZR18 101Y XL 209 KPA, 29 PSI SPARE DE SECOURS 175/55-1895P 429 KPA, 60 PSIP40.00-2205-31
① Recommended tire pressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side (▷ page 415).
The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle
speed.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the ere. fuel filler flap.
text_image
COLD TIRE PRESSURE normal bed 30 psi 30 psi maximum load 30 psi 42 psi Warm tires up to: + 4 psi A 212 594 00 15 123627P40.00-2179-31
Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted for this vehicle by the factory
The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions.
text_image
LUFTDRUCK PRESSURE PRESSION PRESIÓN für kalte Reifen for cold tires des pneus froids de Inflado 100 kPa = 1 bar 195/55 R16 215/45 R17 215/40 R18 Warme Reifen: +30 kPa +4 pi Pneus échauffes jusqu'à: Warm tires up to: Neumáticos calientes hasta: A 69 584 50 17P40.00-2183-31
Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the pressure information following is only valid for that tire size. The load conditions "parti laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants an amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ.
text_image
Luftdruck für kälte Reifen The pressure cold tires Pression des preus frald Pression deinfondo 100 kPa = 1 bar R 18 R 19 bis: up to: 240 km/h jusq/ä: hasta Wärme Reifen bis: Warm tires up to: Winterresses: Winter tires: Preus hiver: twermatische de inverno: Preus echuaffes jusq/ä: twermatische calentes hasta: +30 kPa +4 psi +30 kPa +4 psi A 212-584 02 17 Ø20027P40.00-2184-31
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.
R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire and can be found on the tire sidewall (▷ page 421).
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values:
- if you want to drive with an increased low tide tire temperature and pressure increase and/or when the vehicle is in motion. This is
- if you want to drive at higher road speed dependent on the driving speed and the load.
The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load.
The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Important notes on tire pressure
WARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
allyCheck the tire for foreign objects.
- Check whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.
size Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitoring system, the tire pressure can be checked using the on-board computer.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold.
The tires are cold:
- if the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least hours and
- if the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km)
The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 °F (10 °C), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ 1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tire were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.
Observe the recommended tire pressures foOverinflated tires may:
cold tires:
- on the Tire and Loading Information placa on the B-pillar on the driver's side
- in the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap
- printed in yellow on the rim of the emergency/collapsible spare wheel (depending on vehicle equipment)
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel.
Underinflated tires may:
overheat, leading to tire defects
• have an adverse effect on handling characteristics
- wear quickly and unevenly
• have an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Overinflation
WARNING
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by rtdad debris, potholes etc. In addition, they nealso suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires, including the spare wheel.
Overinflated tires may:
- increase the braking distance
have an adverse effect on handling characteristics
f- wear quickly and unevenly
• have an adverse effect on ride comfort
- be more susceptible to damage
Maximum tire pressures
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflation
WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident ^1
text_image
MAX. PERMISS. INFLAT. PRESS. 420 KPA (60 PSI)Example: maximum permissible tire pressure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle
when adjusting the tire pressure (▷ page 408).
The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values the illustration.
Checking the tire pressures
Important safety notes
Observe the notes on tire pressure (▷ page 408).
Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found:
- on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar (▷ page 415)
- on the tire pressure label on the fuel fille flap (▷ page 184)
• in the "Tire pressure" section - under "Tire pressure" (▷ page 408)
Checking tire pressures manually
To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows:
▶ Remove the valve cap of the tire that is be checked.
▶ Press the tire pressure gauge securely on the valve.
▶ Read the tire pressure and compare it with the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard (▷ page 408).
▶ If the tire pressure is too low, increase the recommended value.
If the tire pressure is too high, release a by pressing down the metal pin in the v Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then, check the tire pressure again using the t pressure gauge.
▶ Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
▶ Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Tire pressure loss warning system
General notes
While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display.
You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message
which appears in the Service menu of the multifunction display. Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system" section (▷ page 412).
Important safety notes
The tire pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (▷ page 408).
The tire pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An even loss of pressure on several tires at the same time cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss warning system.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn into you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers.
it to The function of the tire pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if:
• snow chains are mounted on your vehicle's valve. tires.
tire road conditions are wintry.
- you are driving on sand or gravel.
- you adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration).
- you are towing a very heavy or large traile
- you are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof).
Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning systemdisplay.
if you have:
• changed the tire pressure
- changed the wheels or tires
- mounted new wheels or tires
Before restarting, make sure that the tire pressures are set properly on all four tires for the respective operating conditions.
The recommended tire pressures can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side or the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap.
The tire pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored.
▶ Also observe the notes in the section on tire pressures (▷ page 408). If a
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (▶ page 167).
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the ServiceSe menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Tire Pressure.
▶ Press the OK button.
The Run Flat Indicator Active
Press 'OK' to Restart message
appears in the multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
▶ Press the OK button.
The Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears in the multifunction display.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select YesYes.
▶ Press the OK button.
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message appears in the multifunction
After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tire pressures of all four tires.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
Press the button.
▶ If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears, use the ▲ or ▼ button to select CancelCancel.
Press the OK button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored.
Tire pressure monitor
General notes
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor on the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the correct sensors are installed on all wheels.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the Service menu of the multifunction display.
text_image
29 29 31 31 [ psi ] P54.33-23 16:31Example: current tire pressure display
For information on the message display, to the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section (▷ page 414).
Important safety notes
WARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once a month when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different s than the size indicated on the Tire and Load Information placard or the tire pressure label you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitorin system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitu for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
USA only:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
It is the driver's responsibility to set the pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation (▷ page 408). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires (▷ page 415). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pressure drops significantly.
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure ( page 408).
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the Checking the tire pressure event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the electronically
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers.
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights indicates whether a tire pressure is too low the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
- if the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning.
- if the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display.
Further information can be found on (▷ page 318).
If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning it may take more than ten minutes for the pressure warning lamp to inform you of the malfunction by flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving.
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure
values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the pressures.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle.
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 (▷ page 167) in the ignition lock.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the ServiceService menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Tire Pressure.
Press the OK button.
The current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the multifunction display.
If the vehicle has been parked for longer than 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes minutes message appears.
After a teach-in process, the tire pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure value to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active display message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored.
If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the system may continue to show the tire pressure of the wheel that has been removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel is mounted is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel.
Tire pressure monitor warning messages
If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display and the yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp comes on.
- If the Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low
and must be corrected at the next opportunity.
- If the Check Tires message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significant and the tires must be checked.
- If the Tire Malfunction appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly and the tires must be checked.
If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the ServiceService menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select tlyTire Pressure.
▶ Press the OK button.
The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure for the individual tires or the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutesminutes message.
▶ Press the ▼ button.
The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message appears in the multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also define If reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values.
▶ Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar (▷ page 408).
Additional tire pressure values for different loads can also be found on the tire press table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (▷ page 408).
▶ Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels.
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Press the OK button.
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display.
After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
Press the ← button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored.
Loading the vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the door, seat, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)① B-pillar, driver's side
Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating
text_image
TIRE COADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 7 FRONT MIDDLE 3 REAR NOMBRE DE PLACES AVANT MILIEU ARRIERE 2 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed Le goils total des occupants et du chargement ne doit jamais dépasser XXX kg or XXX lb.* PNEU SUE COLD TIRE PRESSURE SEE OWNER'S DIMENSIONS PRESSION DES ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS AVANT AVANT PNEUS À FROID VOIR LE MANUEL ARRIÈRE 256/40 ZR18 9PY XL 209 KPA, 29 PSI DE L'USAGER ARRIÈRE 266/36 ZR18 10Y EL 209 KPA, 29 PSI DE L'USAGER ARRIÈRE 171/55-1895P 429 KPA, 60 PSI DE RENSIGNEMENTSP40.00-2206-31
▶ Specification for maximum gross vehicle upweight ① is listed in the Tire and Loading Information placard: "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage must not exceed the is specified value.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the The illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Number of seats
text_image
TIRE COADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENT SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 7 FRONT 1 MIDDLE 3 REAR 2 NOMBRE DE PLACES AVANT MILIEU ARRÈRE The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed xxx kg or xxx lbs." Le poids total des occupants et du chargement ne doit jamais dépasser. TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PINEU DIMENSIONS PRESSION DES VOIR LE MANUEL DE L'USAGER POUR PLUS DE RENSIGNEMENTS FRONT 256/40 ZR1B 99Y XL 209 KPA, 29 PSI AVANT ARRÈRE 286/36 ZR1B 101Y EL 209 KPA, 29 PSI SPARE 171/55-18/SP 429 KPA, 60 PSI DE SECOURSP40.00-2207-31
Maximum number of seats ① indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Determining the correct load limit
Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
- Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard.
▶ Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
▶ Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
▶ Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
▶ Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1,500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (▷ page 415).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Additional information when towing a trailer (▷ page 264).
Step 1
| Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 | |||
| Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) | 1500 lbs (680 kg) | 1500 lbs (680 kg) | 1500 lbs (680 kg) |
Step 2
| Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 | |||
| Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) | 5 3 1 | ||
| Distribution of the occupants | Front: 2Rear: 3 | Front: 1Rear: 2 | Front: 1 |
| Weight of the occupants | Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)Occupant 2:180 lbs (82 kg)Occupant 3:160 lbs (73 kg)Occupant 4:140 lbs (63 kg)Occupant 5:120 lbs (54 kg) | Occupant 1:200 lbs (91 kg)Occupant 2:190 lbs (86 kg)Occupant 3:150 lbs (68 kg) | Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg) |
| Gross weight of all occupants | 750 lbs (340 kg) | 540 lbs (245 kg) | 150 lbs (68 kg) |
Step 3
| Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 | |||
| Permissible load(maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) | 1500 lbs (680 kg)-750 lbs (340 kg)750 lbs (340 kg) | 1500 lbs (680 kg)=-540 lbs (245 kg)=960 lbs (435 kg) | 1500 lbs (680 kg)-150 lbs (68 kg)=1350 lbs (612 kg) |
Vehicle identification plate
Even if you have calculated the total cargo carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross a weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (▷ page 415).
Permissible gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.
Gross axle weight rating: the maximum permissible weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.
Trailer load/noseweight
The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, the trailer load/noseweight is included in the load along with occupants and luggage. The trailer load/noseweight is usually approximately 8% of the gross weight of the trailer and its cargo.
All about wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards
text_image
TREADWEAR 240 TRACTION B TEMPERATURE A 1 2 3 P40.10-5345-31Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: ① tread wear grade, ② traction grade and ③ temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America are provided with the corresponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire.
Where applicable, the tire grading information can be found on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum tire width.
Example:
• Treadwear grade: 200
- Traction grade: AA
• Temperature grade: A
All passenger car tires must conform to the freezing point.
statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades.
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values the illustration.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when te under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government test track a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm, due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions.
Traction
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.
You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of 16 in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. Observe the legally required minimum still tread depth ( page 405). Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires.
The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires) ( page 406).
Temperature as
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, 'underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. These represent the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, of performance which all passenger car tires are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A measured under controlled conditions on represent higher levels of performance on the specified government test surfaces of asphalaboratory test wheel than the minimum and concrete. A tire marked C may have pre-quired by law. traction performance.
Tire labeling
Overview
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 MANUFACTURER TITLE NAME 225/55 #714 15 # H P40.10-5339-31① Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard (▷ page 425)
② DOT, Tire Identification Number (▷ page 424)
③ Maximum tire load (▷ page 423)
④ Maximum tire pressure (▷ page 410)
⑤ Manufacturer
⑥ Tire material (▷ page 424)
⑦ Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed index (▷ page 421)
⑧ Load index (▷ page 423)
⑨ Tire name
The markings described above are on the in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating
WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire burst. There is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.
text_image
225 / 55 R 16 95 H ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ P40.10-5340-31① Tire width
② Nominal aspect ratio in %
③ Tire code
④ Rim diameter
⑤ Load bearing index
⑥ Speed rating
General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wa may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description
If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards.
If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. tire manufacturing standards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: these are compact emergency spare wheels at high tire pressure, to be used only temporarily in an emergency.
Tire width: tire width ① shows the nominal tire width in millimeters.
Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ② is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect
ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height.
Tire code: tire code ③ specifies the tire "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ④ is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index ⑤ is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (▷ page 415).
Example:
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (▷ page 423).
For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (▷ page 423).
Speed rating: speed rating ⑥ specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.
Summer tires
| Index | Speed | rating |
| Q up to | 100 mph | (160 km/h) |
| R up to | 106 mph | (170 km/h) |
by Index Speed rating
| S up to type. | 112 mph (180 km/h) |
| T up to | 118 mph (190 km/h) |
| H up to | 130 mph (210 km/h) |
| V up to in | 149 mph (240 km/h) |
| W up to | 168 mph (270 km/h) |
| Y up to | 186 mph (300 km/h) |
| ZR...Y up | to 186 mph (300 km/h) |
| ZR...(..Y) | over 186 mph (300 km/h) |
| ZR over | 149 mph (240 km/h) |
- Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).
The service specification is made up of load-bearing index ⑤ and speed rating ⑥.
- If the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service in specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed.
If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h).
- The size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph and (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example:
275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
| Index | Speed | rating |
| Q | M+S2 | up to 100 mph (160 km/h) |
| T | M+S2 | up to 118 mph (190 km/h) |
| H | M+S2 | up to 130 mph (210 km/h) |
| V | M+S2 | up to 149 mph (240 km/h) |
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires.
In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also have the snowflake symbol on index ① may be imprinted after the letters the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill that identify the speed index ⑥ on the requirements of the Rubber sidewall of the tire (▶ page 421).
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow.
- If no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire - XL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire
An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding the following speeds:
• all vehicles (except AMG vehicles): 130 mph (210 km/h)
• AMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h)
- AMG vehicles with increased top speed: 174 mph (280 km/h)
The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "Tires" section (▷ page 432).
Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.
- Light Load: represents a light load tire - C, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the can carry at a certain pressure
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
Maximum load rating
text_image
d The be MAX. LOADRATING 710 KG (1565 LBS) M P40.10-5343-31Maximum tire load ① is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (▷ page 415).
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values the illustration.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of every tire produced
text_image
1 DOT HW A7 3 4 AMCW 5 1600 P40.10-5342-31The TIN is a unique identification number. TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ②, tire size ③, tire type code ④ and manufacturing date ⑤.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol ① indicates that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ② provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols.
For further information about retreaded tires see (▷ page 432).
Tire size: identifier ③ describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ④ can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture ⑤ provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture.
For example, a tire that is marked with "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in 2008.
d i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
Tire characteristics
text_image
The SIDEWALL : 2 PUES POLYESTER PUE STEELE UNDER TREAD : 2 PUES POLYESTER + 2 PUES STEEL + 1PLY NYLON and P40.10-5346-31This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall ① and under tire tread ②.
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
^e Definition of terms for tires and loading
eTire ply composition and material used
Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
Stread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials.
Bar
Metric unit for tire pressure.
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and
100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on 1 bar. the driver's side.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements the United States Department of Transportation.
Speed rating
ofThe speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants which the vehicle is designed for, multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lb).
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
eThe GTW is the weight of a trailer including the weight of the load, luggage, accessories etc. on the trailer.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsGVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
A uniform standard to grade the quality of The gross vehicle weight includes the weight tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare and temperature characteristics. Ratings arewheel, accessories installed, occupants, determined by tire manufacturers using U.S luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if government testing procedures. The ratings applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not be molded into the sidewall of the tire. exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Recommended tire pressure
The recommended tire pressure
The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory.
The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for maximum permissible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
Increased vehicle weight due to option equipment
This is the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The maximum weight is the sum of:
• the curb weight of the vehicle
• the weight of the accessories
- the load limit
- the weight of the factory installed optional equipment
Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted.
e ^t Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely.
Curb weight
The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the conditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but do not include passengers or luggage.
Maximum load rating
The maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
Maximum load on one tire
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one by two.
PSI (pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for tire pressur
Aspect ratio
Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent.
Tire pressure
This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should be corrected when the tires are cold.
Cold tire pressure
Tide tires are cold:
- if the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and
- if the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road.
Bead
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim.
Sidewall
The part of the tire between the tread and the bead.
Weight of optional extras
The combined weight of those optional extras ed that weigh more than the replaced standard axle parts and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs). These optional extras, such as high- performance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date.
^1 Load bearing index
The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire.
Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface.
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)
The TWR specifies the maximum permissible weight that the ball coupling of the trailer to hitch can support.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tre is level with the bars, the wear limit of 110 (1.6 mm) has been reached.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions.
Total load limit
Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.
Changing a wheel
Flat tire
You can find information on what to do in the event of a flat tire in the "Breakdown assistance" section (▷ page 387).
Information on driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found until "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" (▷ page 387).
The "Breakdown assistance" section (▷ page 387) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tire. Information driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" (▷ page 387).
Vehicles with an emergency spare
wheel: in the event of a flat tire, mount the emergency spare wheel according to the description under "Mounting a wheel" (▷ page 428).
Rotating the wheels
WARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
the wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions.
!nOn vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components.
Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (▷ page 428).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically the wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center.
If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Do not change the direction of wheel rotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor.
Direction of rotation
Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a of hydroplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation observed.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indica its correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Cleaning the wheels
WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately.
Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
▶ Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: when mounting the emergency spare wheel in the event of a flat tire, follow the additional notes on vehicle preparation under "Flat tire" (▷ page 387).
▶ Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground.
▶ Unload heavy luggage.
▶ Apply the electric parking brake manually
▶ Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.
▶ Shift the transmission to position P.
▶ Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package: make sure that highway level is selected (▷ page 212).
risk ▶Switch off the engine.
▶ Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
▶ Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed.
▶ Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the cool, Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (▷ page 167).
▶ If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.
- Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.
i Apart from certain country-specific variations, vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Necessary wheel-changing tools can include, for example:
- Jack
- Wheel chock
- Lug wrench
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away
text_image
the nd
natural_image
Mechanical bracket component with blue arrow indicating motion direction (no text or symbols)
natural_image
Close-up of a black automotive component with blue arrows indicating motion or movement, no visible text or symbols
natural_image
Metal bracket component labeled P40.10-5602-31, showing internal cavities and mounting holes (no text or symbols on the object itself)If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel c it can be found in the tire-change tool kit (▷ page 386).
The folding wheel chock is an additional securing measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel.
▶ Fold both plates upwards ①.
▶ Fold out lower plate ②.
▶ Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully the openings in base plate ③.
natural_image
Side profile of a modern SUV (no visible text or symbols on the vehicle body)Securing the vehicle on level ground
▶ On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
natural_image
Side profile of a modern SUV on a flat surface, no visible text or symbolsSecuring the vehicle on slight downhill gradients
▶ On light downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle.
Raising the vehicle
WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly tender the jacking point of the vehicle.
AMG vehicles with "Minispare"
emergency spare wheel: use the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel only
on the rear axle. If you mount the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel on the front axle, this could result in damage to the brake system.
If a tire on the front axle is defective, an intact wheel from the rear axle must first be replaced with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. The defective wheel on the front axle can then be replaced with the intact wheel from the rear axle.
Make sure to note the placard on the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
The jack is designed exclusively for backing up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.
Observe the following when raising the vehicle:
- to raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
- the jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle.
-
avoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes.
-
before raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
- the jack must be placed on a firm, flat a non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
- do not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height.
• make sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). - never place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle.
• do not lie under the vehicle. - do not start the engine when the vehicle is raised.
- never open or close a door or the tailgate when the vehicle is raised.
• make sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
natural_image
Close-up of a car tire with a blue arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols on the tire itself)
text_image
e and P40.00-2210-31The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel housings and just in front of the rear wheel housings (arrows).
▶ Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicle tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AUF are visible.
text_image
the is te n ② ③ ④ P40.10-6057-31② Jacking points
③ Jack
④ Crank
▶ Position jack ③ at jacking point ②. The alignment bolt on the jack must be inserted into the intended opening on the jacking point.
▶ Using lug wrench ①, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
natural_image
Mechanical linkage diagram showing two configurations with no visible text or symbolsExample
▶ Make sure the foot of the jack is directly replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. beneath the jacking point.
▶ Turn ratchet wrench ④ until jack ③ sits completely on jacking point ② and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground
▶ Turn ratchet wrench ④ until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from ground.
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts the when the vehicle is on the ground.
Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in.
natural_image
Close-up of a car tire mounted on a lift with a visible mechanical support (no text or symbols)▶ Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely.
▶ Screw alignment bolt ① into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.
▶ Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
▶ Remove the wheel.
Mounting a new wheel
WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
WARNING
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt. n a Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (▷ page 427).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel.
! Always use wheel bolts ② to mount the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Using other wheel bolts to mount the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel could damage the brake system.
natural_image
Two metallic bolts with hexagonal end caps, labeled 1 and 2, shown without any text or symbols on the parts themselves.① Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by factory
② Wheel bolts for the collapsible spare wheel
natural_image
Close-up of a car tire mounted on a lift with blue arrows indicating motion direction (no text or symbols)▶ Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces.
▶ Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on.
▶ Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight.
▶ Unscrew the alignment bolt.
▶ Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.
Lowering the vehicle
WARNING
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nu and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed.
text_image
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ P40.10-6165-31the Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visible.
▶ Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground.
▶ Place the jack to one side.
▶ Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (① to ⑤). The tightening torque must be 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
▶ Turn the jack back to its initial position.
▶ Stow the jack and the rest of the tire-change tool kit in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor again.
▶ Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Observe the recommended tire pressure (▷ page 408).
i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: all wheels mounted must be equipped with functioning sensors.
Wheel and tire combinations
General notes
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
ts recommends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle.
These tires have been specially adapted for the recommended pressures for various use with the control systems, such as A&Operating conditions can be found:
or ESP ^® , and are marked as follows:
• MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
- MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
- MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel
consumption, may otherwise be adversely equip the vehicle with:
affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause
the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved.
Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.
! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if you have no information about their previous usage.
Overview of abbreviations used in the following tire tables:
- BA: both axles
- FA: front axle
-
RA: rear axle
-
on the Tire and Loading Information placard with the recommended tire pressures on the B-pillar on the driver's side
- in the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions (page 408).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment - always equip the vehicle with:
- tires of the same size on a given axle (left/right)
- the same type of tires at a given time (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)
Vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TREFIT kit at the factory. is therefore recommended that you
additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.
i Not all wheel and tire combinations are available at the factory for all countries.
On the following pages, you can find information on approved wheel rims and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter tires. Winter tires are not available at the factory as standard equipment or optional extras.
If you would like to equip your vehicle with approved winter tires, you may also, in certain circumstances, require rims of the appropriate size. The size of the approved winter tires may deviate from that of the standard tires. This is dependent on the model and the equipment installed at the factory.
The tires and wheel rims, as well as further information, can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tires
GL 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC
All-weather tires
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels
| BA: 275/50 R 19 111 H M+S |
BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
| Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) |
R 20
| Tires Alloy wheels | |
| BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+S | BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) |
| BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+SMOExtended34 | BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) |
All-terrain tires
R 18
Tires Alloy wheels
| BA: 265/60 R 18 110 H M+S BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 |
| Wheel offset: 2.22 in (56.5 mm) |
R 19
| Tires Alloy wheels | |
| BA: 275/55 R 19 111 H M+S | BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) |
Winter tires
R 18
Tires Alloy wheels
| BA: 265/60 R 18 110 H M+S |
18 H2
| Wheel offset: 2.22 in (56.5 mm) |
R 19
| Tires Alloy wheels | |
| BA: 265/55 R 19 109 H M+S [IMAGE] BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) |
R 20
| Tires Alloy wheels | |
| BA: 275/45 R 20 110 V XL M+S ^5 [IMAGE] | BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm) |
GL 450 4MATIC
All-weather tires
R 19
| Tires Alloy wheels | |
| BA: 275/50 R 19 111 H M+S | BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) |
R 20
| Tires Alloy wheels | |
| BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H +S | BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) |
| BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+S MOExtended | BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) |
All-terrain tires
R 19
| Tires Alloy wheels | |
| BA: 275/55 R 19 111 H M+S | BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) |
Winter tires
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels
| BA: 265/55 R 19 109 H M+S | BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 |
| Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) |
R 20
Tires Alloy wheels
| BA: 275/45 R 20 110 V XL M+S ^5 | BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm) |
GL 550 4MATIC
All-weather tires
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels
| BA: 275/50 R 19 111 H M+S | BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) |
R 20
Tires Alloy wheels
| BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+S | BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) |
| BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+S MOExtended | BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) |
R 21
Tires Alloy wheels
| BA: 295/40 R 21 111 V XL M+S | BA: 10.0 J x 21 H2Wheel offset: 1.81 in (46 mm) |
All-terrain tires
R 19
| Tires Alloy wheels | |
| BA: 275/55 R 19 111 H +S | BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) |
Winter tires
R 19
| Tires Alloy wheels | |
| BA: 265/55 R 19 109 H M+S | BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) |
R 20
| Tires Alloy wheels | |
| BA: 275/45 R 20 110 V XL M+S ^5 | BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm) |
GL 63 AMG 4MATIC
Summer tires
R21
| Tires Alloy wheels | |
| BA: 295/40 ZR 21 111 Y^3 XL | BA: 10.0 J x 21 H2Wheel offset: 1.81 in (46 mm) |
Winter tires
R 20
| Tires Alloy wheels | |
| BA: 275/45 R 20 110 V XL M+S | BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm) |
Emergency spare wheel
Important safety notes
WARNING
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of the spare wheel or emergency spare w and the wheel to be replaced may differ. Mounting an emergency spare wheel may severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
- adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully.
- never mount more than one spare wheel emergency spare wheel that differs in s
- only use a spare wheel or emergency s wheel of a different size briefly.
- do not switch ESPoff.
• have a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions as well as the tire type must be correct.
AMG vehicles with "Minispare"
emergency spare wheel: use the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel only on the rear axle. If you mount the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel on the front axle, this could result in damage to brake system.
If a tire on the front axle is defective, an intact wheel from the rear axle must first be replaced with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. The defective wheel on the front axle can then be replaced with the intact wheel from the rear axle.
Make sure to note the placard on the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Snow chains must not be mounted on emergency spare wheels.
General notes
Mounting the emergency spare wheel is described under "Mounting a wheel" (▷ page 428).
You should regularly check the pressure of the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (▷ page 408). The value on the wheel or as given in the "Wheels and tires" section is valid (▷ page 441).
An emergency spare wheel may also be mounted against the direction of rotation.
Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel.
Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel.
When you are driving with the collapsible spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning system/the tire pressure monitor when the damaged wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitor:
after mounting an emergency spare wheel, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel for a few minutes. The value displayed for the mounted emergency spare wheel is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel.
Removing the emergency spare wheels
text_image
① ② ③ P68.00-6846-31Emergency spare wheel (example: vehicle without lockable cargo compartment floor)
The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the car compartment floor.
▶ Lift the cargo compartment floor up (▷ page 347).
▶ Vehicles with a lockable cargo compartment floor: remove the stowage tray.
▶ Release the Velcro fastener (▷ page 386).
▶ Take out the jack.
▶ Turn emergency spare wheel retainer ① counter-clockwise and remove it.
▶ Remove stowage well ②.
▶ Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel ③.
text_image
① ② ③ P40.10-6286-31On vehicles with a Bang & Olufsen sound system, the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel is packed in the emergency spare wheel bag. The emergency spare wheel bag
is secured to the cargo tie down rings in the cargo compartment.
To stow the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel, the rear seats in the third row must be folded in (▷ page 111).
▶ To remove the emergency spare wheel: open the tailgate.
▶ Detach fastening straps ②.
▶ Unhook retaining spring hooks ① and ③ of fastening straps ② from the lasing eyelets.
Remove the emergency spare wheel bag with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
Open the emergency spare wheel bag and remove the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
▶ To stow the emergency spare wheel: place the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel into the emergency spare wheel bag and close the emergency spare wheel bag.
▶ Place the emergency spare wheel bag with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel into the cargo compartment with the carrying strap at the back.
▶ Hook retaining spring hooks ① and ③ of fastening straps ② into the lasing eyelets.
▶ Tighten fastening straps ②.
Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (▷ page 428).
Technical data
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel
Tires Alloy wheels
T 165/90 R19 119 M
Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)
4.5 B x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 1.58 in (40 mm)
Useful information 444
Information regarding technical data 444
Identification plates 444
Service products and filling capacities 445
Vehicle data 453
Vehicle data for off-road driving ..... 454
Trailer tow hitch 456
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (▷ page 28).
text_image
MFD BY MERCEDES-BENZ U.S. INTL, INC TISCALOOSA COUNTY, ALABAMA (USA) UNDER CONTRACT FOR DAMLER AG, STUTTCART (GERMANY) 12/07 C172 KG LB TRES NW SIZE COLD CAP (PSB) GWMR FRONT 1400 3086 295/35 ZR21 10x21 250(36) GWMR REAR 1495 3527 295/35 ZR21 10x21 280(41) GWWR 2830 6239 THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS INVECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE. WDCGF76F07A123456 MPV This vehicle may include Michigan added devisions installed by the manufactured. • High Intensity Electroght Headlamps • Displays • Rock-W Instruments Remain Devices Before Vehicle Disposal Upon Removal of Devices Please Balance, Recycle or Disposals are Hazelnator Waats. P00.01-3924-31Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
② Paint code
③ VIN
Information regarding technical dat
General information
The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.
You can find information on technical data the printed Operator's Manual
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN)
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the door and seat area with a numbered label (1) pointing to a component, no readable text or symbols present.
text_image
MERCEDES-BENZ U.S. INTL., INC KG TIRES RIM SIZE COLD KPA(PSI) GAWR/PNBE 1470 265/60 R18 8.0x18 220(32) FRONT/AV GAWR/PNBE 1800 265/60 R18 8.0x18 260(38) GEAR/AI GVWR/PNBV 3150 10/07 TYPE: MPV/VTUM C172 MANUFACTURED UNDER CONTRACT FOR DAIMLER AG WDCGF76E07A223811 ② ③P00.01-3665-31
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
② Paint code
③ VIN
The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate.
▶ Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate ①.
VIN
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the left side of the window with a numbered indicator (1) and a blue checkmark on the right side (no text or symbols on the main object)▶ Open the front right-hand door.
▶ Open cover ① in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
You will see the VIN.
The VIN can also be found in the following locations:
- on the lower edge of the windshield (▷ page 444)
• on the vehicle identification plate (▷ page 444)
Engine number
text_image
① ② ③ P00.10-5.099-31① Emission control information plate, including the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards
② Engine number (stamped into the crankcase)
③ VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
Service products and filling capacities
Important safety notes
WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children.
Environmental note
Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner.
Service products include the following:
- Fuels
- Exhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g. DEF
- Lubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission
- Coolant
- Brake fluid
• Windshield washer fluid
• Climate control system refrigerant
Comply with all valid regulations with respect to handling, storing, and disposing of service fluids.
Components and service products must be matched. You should therefore only use products that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following
inscription on the containers:
• MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
• MB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Fuel
Important safety notes
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling.
WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fu vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following:
- Wash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water.
- If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.
- If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting.
- Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel.
Tank capacity
| inModel Total | capacity |
| All models | 26.4 US gal(100.0 l) |
| Model Of which | reserve |
| AMG vehicles | Approx. 3.7 US gal (14.0 l) |
| All other models | Approx. 3.2 US gal (12.0 l) |
Gasoline
Fuel grade
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
! Only use the fuel recommended.
Operating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine failure.
! Do not use the following:
• E85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)
• E100 (100% ethanol)
• M15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)
• M30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)
• M85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)
• M100 (100% methanol)
• Gasoline with metalliferous additives
- Diesel
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel in recommended for your vehicle. Do not use additives. This can otherwise lead to engine damage. This does not include cleaning additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. gasoline may only be mixed with cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower octane rating.
Information on refueling (▷ page 183).
Additives
Operating the engine with fuel additives of added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! To ensure the longevity and full performance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used. If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline of a lower grade, observe the following precautions:
- Only fill the fuel tank to half full with regular unleaded gasoline and fill the with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible.
- Do not drive at the maximum speed.
- Avoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3,000 rpm.
Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is permitted. E10 fuel or E15 fuel (unleaded gasoline with 10% or 15% ethanol) can be used.
You will usually find information about the grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance.
For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop or visit http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use branded fuels that have additives.
The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the injection system as a result. In such cases, and in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gasoline may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container.
not Diesel
Fuel grade
WARNING fuel
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, exhaust system components could overheat without being noticed. There is a risk of fire.
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel.
All other models: as a temporary measure, the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 RON/91 MON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle ! Refuel only using diesel fuel that h conforms to European standard EN 590 or an equivalent specification. Fuel that does senot conform to EN 590 can lead to tincreased wear and damage the engine and exhaust system.
! Do not use the following:
- marine diesel
- heating oil
- bio-diesel
- vegetable oil
- gasoline
- paraffin
- kerosene
Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and do not use any special additives. This can otherwise lead to engine damage.
Do not refuel your vehicle with fuels unless they have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Information on refueling (▷ page 183).
Low outside temperatures
i Diesel fuel with improved cold flow properties is available during the winter months. Further information about fuel properties can be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at gas stations.
DEF
! Vehicles with diesel particle filters:
countries outside the EU, only use low sulfur Euro diesel with a sulfur content under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission control system could be damaged.
in Important safety notes
oComply with the important safety notes for service products when handling DEF (▷ page 445).
! Vehicles without a diesel particle
filter: in countries where only diesel fuel ^8 with a high sulfur content is available, you will need to carry out your vehicle's oil change at shorter intervals. Further information on oil change intervals can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop
DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is:
You will usually find information about the grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance.
Information on refueling (▷ page 183).
not poisonous
• colorless and odorless
- not flammable
When you open the DEF container, small amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous membranes and to the eyes. You may experience a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are possible. (ster)
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank only in well-ventilated areas.
Bio-diesel - FAME (fatty acid methyl
the ester)
Mercedes-Benz USA approves the use of bio-diesel B5 for all BlueTEC diesel engines. The concentration of bio-diesel in the ULSD may not exceed 5% by volume.
Low outside temperatures
Pure bio-diesel and diesel fuel with a higheDEF freezes at a temperature of percentage of bio-diesel, such as B20, can approximately 12 °F (-11 °C). The vehicle is damage the engine and the fuel system. Fo delivered from the factory equipped with a this reason, they are not approved. DEF preheating system. Winter operation can
For more information, consult the gas station thus be guaranteed even at temperatures staff. The bio-diesel B5 label on the gasoline below 12 °F (-11 °C).
pump must clearly state that the standard for ULSD has been fulfilled. If the label is not clear, do not refuel the vehicle.
Additives
! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO 22241. Do not use additives with DEF and do not dilute DEF with water. This may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system.
Purity
! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to other service products, cleaning agents or dust) lead to:
• increased emission values
• damage to the catalytic converter
- engine damage
- malfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system
Assuring the purity of DEF is particularly important with respect to avoiding malfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system.
If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g. during repair work, it must not be returned the tank. The purity of the fluid can no long be guaranteed.
Filling capacities
| Model Total capacity | |
| GL 350 BlueTEC 4MATI C | 8.2 US gal (31.2 l) |
Engine oil
General notes
Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change.
Otherwise, you may damage the engine and the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (▷ page 445).
The engine oils are matched to the performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems.
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or visit the website as http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle.
| Model Engine | model | MB Approval |
| GL 450 4MATIC to GL 550 4MATICnger | 278 229.5 | |
| AMG vehicles | 157 229.5 | |
| GL 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC | 642 228.51, 229.31, 229.51 |
i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers.
Filling capacities
The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter.
! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a specification other than is necessary to fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise cause engine damage or damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
| Model Capacity | |
| GL 450 4MATIC | 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) |
| GL 550 4MATIC | |
| AMG vehicles | Without external oil cooler: 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) |
| GL 350 BlueTEC MATIC | 4 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) |
Additives
! Do not use any additives in the engine This could damage the engine.
Engine oil viscosity
heatmap
| Value | Temperature Range (°C) | | :--- | :--- | | 0W-30 | 0W-40 | | 5W-30 | 5W-40 | | 10W-30 | 5W-50 | | 10W-40 | 10W-60 | | 10W-50 | 10W-60 | | 15W-30 | 15W-40 | | 15W-50 | 15W-50 | | 20W-40 | 20W-50 | P18.00-2310-31Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this means that it is thick; a low viscosity means that it is thin.
Select an engine oil with an SAE classificat (viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside temperatures. The table shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore strongly recommended that you carry out regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification.
Brake fluid
WARNING
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals.
Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling brake fluid (▷ page 445).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.
Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
Coolant
Important safety notes
WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
For the engine cool down before you add antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine.
! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine.
Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures or adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection.
The coolant is checked with every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperature prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating.
i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant (▷ page 445).
The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks:
• corrosion protection
- antifreeze protection
- raising the boiling point
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35^ (-37 ^ ), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 266^ (130 ^ ).
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should:
- be at least 50%. This will protect the eng cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 °F (-37 °C).
- not exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 °F [-45 °C]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively.
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with
MB Specifications for Service Products 310.
Filling capacities
| Model Capacity | |
| GL 450 4MATIC | Approx. 11.6 US qt(11.0 l) |
| GL 550 4MATIC | |
| GL 350 BlueTEC | 4 Approx. 12.2 US qt(11.5 l) |
| MATIC | |
| AMG vehicles | Approx. 13.1 US qt(12.4 l) |
Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze.
Windshield washer system
Important safety notes
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system it could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged.
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked.
When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (▷ page 445).
At temperatures above freezing:
▶ Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit.
Always have work on the climate control system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
▶ Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperature.
- Down to 14 °F (-10 °C): mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 2 parts water.
- Down to -4 °F (-20 °C): mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 1 part water.
- Down to -20.2 °F (-29 °C): mix 2 parts WinterFit to 1 part water.
i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washed fluid all year round.
Refrigerant instruction label
text_image
ture R-134a 550 ± 10g A 001 989 08 03 (PAG) DAIMLER AG A 246 817 15 20 SAE J639 P00.10-5318-31Example: refrigerant instruction label
MB Warning symbol
② Refrigerant filling capacity
③ Applicable SAE standards
er4 PAG oil part number
⑤ Type of refrigerant
Warning symbols ① indicate:
- possible dangers
• having service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop
Climate control system refrigerant
Important safety notes
The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R-134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant type used can be found on the radiator cross member. Missing values were not available at time of going to print.
Filling capacities
Missing values were not available at time of going to print.
! Only the refrigerant R-134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for R-134a refrigerant.
Otherwise, the climate control system may be damaged.
Service work, such as topping-up refrigerant or replacing components, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations must be adhered to, SAE standard J639 included.
AMG vehicles Capacity
Refrigerant
PAG oil
| All other models | Capacity |
| Refrigerant ed | 44.1 ± 0.4 oz (125 ± 10 g) |
| PAG oil | 4.9 ± 0.4 oz (140 10 g) |
Vehicle data
General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
- the heights specified may vary as a result of:
- tires
- load
- condition of the suspension
- optional equipment
- optional equipment reduces the maximum payload.
Dimensions and weights
text_image
① ② P72.20-3105-31Missing values were not available at time of going to print.
| Model | 11Opening height | 22Maximum headroom |
| ItModels without ON&OFFROAD package | 83.9 in - 86.9 in (2132 mm 2207 mm) | 76.1 in - 79.1 in -(1934 mm 2009 mm) |
| Models with ON&OFFROAD package | 83.9 in - 88.1 in 2132 mm - 2237 mm | 76.1 in - 80.3 in (1934 mm 2039 mm) |
| AMG vehicles | 84.1 in - 86.6 in 2136 mm - 2199 mm | 78.8 in 2002 mm |
Missing values were not available at time of going to print.
| All models (except for AMG vehicles) | |
| Vehicle width including exterior mirrors | 84.3 in (2141 mm) |
| Maximum vehicle height | 75.2 in (1910 mm) |
| Maximum vehicle height (ON&OFFROAD package) | 76.4 in (1940 mm) |
| Minimum vehicle height (highway driving level) | 72.8 in (1850 mm) |
| Wheelbase | 121.1 in (3075 mm) |
| Maximum ground clearance | 10.9 in (276 mm) |
| Maximum ground clearance (ON&OFFROAD package) | 12.0 in (306 mm) |
| Minimum ground clearance | 7.9 in(201 mm) |
| Turning radius | 40.7 ft(12.40 m) |
| Maximum roof load | 220 lb(100 kg) |
| Model (except AMG vehicles) | Vehicle length | ||
| GL | 450 | 4MATIC | 201.6 in(5120 mm) |
| GL | 350 | BlueTEC 4MATIC | |
| GL | 550 | 4MATIC | 202.6 in(5146 mm) |
| AMG vehicles | |
| Vehicle length | 202.6 in(5146 mm) |
| Vehicle width including exterior mirrors | 84.3 in(2141 mm) |
| Vehicle width without exterior mirrors | 78.0 in(1982 mm) |
| Maximum vehicle height | 74.9 in(1902 mm) |
| Minimum vehicle height | 72.4 in(1839 mm) |
| Wheelbase | 121.1 in(3075 mm) |
| Maximum ground clearance | 9.8 in(249 mm) |
| Minimum ground clearance | 7.4 in(188 mm) |
| Turning radius | 40.8 ft(12.45 m) |
| Maximum roof load | 220 lb(100 kg) |
Vehicle data for off-road driving Fording depth
natural_image
Side profile illustration of a SUV on a road with mountain background and scale indicator (no text or symbols)① Fording depth
| Fording depth | |
| Vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD package | |
| Raised level 20 in | (50 cm) |
| Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package | |
| Off-road level 3 23.6 in | (60 cm) |
| Off-road level 2 20 in | (50 cm) |
| Off-road level 1 20 in | (50 cm) |
| AMG vehicles | 20 in (50 cm) |
For more information about off-road fording, see (▷ page 195).
Approach/departure angle
natural_image
Side view of a SUV on a road with two directional arrows indicating movement or positioning (no text or symbols)All vehicles (except AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG bodystyling)
| 1 | 1 | 2 | 2 | |
| Vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD package | ||||
| Highway level 25° 20° | ||||
| Raised level 30° 25° | ||||
| Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package | ||||
| Highway level 25° 20° | ||||
| Off-road level 1 28° 23° | ||||
| Off-road level 2 30° 25° | ||||
| Off-road level 3 33° 27° | ||||
Vehicles with AMG bodystyling
| 112 | ||
| Vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD package | ||
| Highway level 20° 20° | ||
| Raised level 24° 24° | ||
| Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package | ||
| Highway level 20° 20° | ||
| Off-road level 1 22° 22° | ||
| 11 | 22 | |
| Off-road level 2 24° 24° | ||
| Off-road level 3 26° 26° |
AMG vehicles
| 11 | 22 | |
| Highway level (in sports mode with the AMG adaptive suspension system activated) | 19° | 19° |
| Raised level 23° 22° |
For further information about approach/ departure angles, see (▷ page 200).
Maximum gradient-climbing capability
Note that the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability depends on the off-road condition and the road surface conditions.
Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD
package: the maximum gradient climbing ability is 100% when the LOW RANGE off-road gear is selected.
Vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD
package: the maximum gradient climbing ability is 80%.
Accelerate carefully and make sure that the wheels do not spin when driving on steep terrain.
If the load on the front axle is reduced when pulling away on a steep uphill slope, the front wheels have a tendency to spin. 4ETS recognizes this and brakes the wheels accordingly. The rear wheel torque is increased, making it easier to drive off.
For further information about the maximum gradient climbing ability, see (▷ page 200).
Trailer tow hitch
Mounting dimensions
! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the cooling system and drive train may be necessary, depending on the vehicle type.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis frame.
text_image
1 256 188 112 332 231 144 1126 4471 144 503 1 2 1 1 P31.10-3370-31Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch (example)
① Anchorage points
② Rear axle center line
Trailer loads
Trailer loads, trailer drawbar noseweights and axle loads
Missing values were not available at time of going to print.
| All models (except GL 63 AMG 4MATIC) | |
| Permissible trailer load, unbraked | |
| Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient climbing capability of 12% from a standstill) | 7500 lbs (3402 kg) |
| Maximum drawbar noseweight (the drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load) | 600 lbs (272 kg) |
| Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer | 3970 lbs (1800 kg) |
| GL 63 AMG 4MATIC | |
| Permissible trailer load, unbraked | |
| Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient climbing capability of 12% from a standstill) | 7465 lbs (3250 kg) |
| Maximum drawbar noseweight (the drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load) | 309 lbs (140 kg) |
| Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer | 4189 lbs (1900 kg) |
The actual noseweight may not be higher than the value which is given. The value can be on the trailer tow hitch or trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies.
The maximum permissible trailer drawbar noseweight is the maximum weight with which the trailer drawbar can be loaded. Limit for Mercedes-Benz-approved trailer couplings.
Ball position
text_image
7,5" 2" 2,75" P00.01-4229-31Ball position of the ball coupling
When choosing a ball coupling, the dimensions stated in the illustration must not be exceeded.